HITACHI INVERTER-DRIVEN

MULTI-SPLIT SYSTEM
HEAT PUMP AIR CONDITIONERS
SET FREE FSG(1)/FS3, FS5 SERIES
AND
SET FREE FXG/FX3 SERIES

Models
<Indoor Units>
• In-the-Ceiling Type
RPI-0.8FSG1 RPI-2.5FSG1 RPI-8FSG1
RPI-1.0FSG1 RPI-3.0FSG1 RPI-10FSG1
RPI-1.5FSG1 RPI-4.0FSG1
RPI-2.0FSG1 RPI-5.0FSG1
• 4-Way Cassette Type
RCI-1.0FSG2 RCI-2.5FSG2 RCI-5.0FSG2
RCI-1.5FSG2 RCI-3.0FSG2
RCI-2.0FSG2 RCI-4.0FSG2
• 2-Way Cassette Type
RCD-1.0FSG1 RCD-2.5FSG1 RCD-5.0FSG1
RCD-1.5FSG1 RCD-3.0FSG1
RCD-2.0FSG1 RCD-4.0FSG1
• Wall Type
RPK-1.0FSGM6 RPK-2.0FSGM6
RPK-1.5FSGM6 RPK-2.3FSGM6
• Floor Type
RPF-1.0FSG(E) RPF-1.5FSG(E)
• Floor Concealed Type
RPFI-1.0FSG(E) RPFI-1.5FSG(E)
• Ceiling Type
RPC-2.0FSG1 RPC-3.0FSG1 RPC-5.0FSG1
RPC-2.5FSG1 RPC-4.0FSG1

<Outdoor Units>
• FSG(1) Series
RAS-5FSG RAS-16FSG RAS-24FSG1
RAS-8FSG RAS-20FSG RAS-30FSG1
RAS-10FSG
• FS3, FS5 Series
RAS-5FS3 RAS-16FS3 RAS-24FS5
RAS-8FS3 RAS-20FS3 RAS-30FS5
RAS-10FS3
This service mamual provides the technical • FXG Series
information for the HITACHI Inverter-Driven RAS-8FXG RAS-10FXG
Multi-Split System Heat Pump Air • FX3 Series
Conditioners, “SET FREE, FSG(1)/FS3, FS5 RAS-8FX3 RAS-10FX3
and FXG/FX3 Series”.
Read this manual carefully before starting <System Equipment>
service activities. • Total Heat Exchangers
KPI-2521 KPI-5021 KPI-8021 KPI-10021

P5413553

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 - CONTENTS -
No. Page

1. TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Initial Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.1 Rotary Switch and Dip Switch Setting .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Checking of Electrical Wiring ........................................................................................................ 1-5
1.1.3 Checking by 7-Segment Display ................................................................................................. 1-10
1.1.4 Emergency Operation when Inverter Compressor is Damaged ................................................... 1-11
1.1.5 Failure of Power Supply to Indoor Unit and Remote Control Switch ............................................ 1-13
1.1.6 Abnormal Transmission between Remote Control Switch and Indoor Unit .................................. 1-14
1.1.7 Abnormalities of Devices .............................................................................................................. 1-15
1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ................................................................................................................ 1-23
1.2.1 Alarm Code Table ......................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.2.2 Troubleshooting by Alarm Code ................................................................................................... 1-24
1.2.3 Troubleshooting in Check Mode by Remote Control Switch ........................................................ 1-79
1.2.4 Troubleshooting by 7-Segment Display ........................................................................................ 1-85
1.2.5 Function of RSW, DSWs and LEDs .............................................................................................. 1-94
1.3 Procedure of Checking Each Main Parts ........................................................................................... 1-103
1.3.1 Self-Checking of PCBs using Remote Control Switch .................................................................. 1-103
1.3.2 Self-Checking of Remote Control Switch ..................................................................................... 1-105
1.3.3 Self-Checking of Indoor Unit PCB
(Except for: RCI, RCD, RPI (0.8 to 5.0HP), RPC (After Alteration) and KPI) .............................. 1-107
1.3.4 Self-Checking of 7-Day Timer (PSC-3T) ...................................................................................... 1-109
1.3.5 Self-Checking of Central Station (PSC-3S1) ................................................................................ 1-110
1.3.6 Procedure of Checking Other Main Parts ..................................................................................... 1-111
1.4 Test Run ............................................................................................................................................. 1-125
1.4.1 Test Run Mode by Remote Control Switch ................................................................................... 1-125
1.4.2 Test Run Mode by Outdoor Unit ................................................................................................... 1-126
1.4.3 Checking List (FSG and FS3 Series) ........................................................................................... 1-127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 - CONTENTS -
No. Page

2. SERVICING ................................................................................................................................................ 2-1

2.1 Outdoor Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Removing Air Intake Grille ............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Removing Front Service Panel ..................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.3 Removing Fan Guard Nets ........................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.4 Removing Outdoor Fan ................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.1.5 Removing Compressor (RAS-5FSG and RAS-5FS3) .................................................................. 2-6
2.1.6 Removing Compressors
(RAS-8FSG, RAS-10FSG, RAS-16FSG, RAS-20FSG, RAS-8FS3, RAS-10FS3, RAS-16FS3,
RAS-20FS3, RAS-8FXG, RAS-10FXG, RAS-8FX3 and RAS-10FX3) ........................................ 2-10
2.1.7 Removing Compressors for MC1 and MC2
(RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1, RAS-24FS5 and RAS-30FS5) ..................................................... 2-15
2.1.8 Removing Compressors for MC3 and MC4
(RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1, RAS-24FS5 and RAS-30FS5) ..................................................... 2-19
2.1.9 Removing High Pressure Switch, High Pressure Sensor and Low Pressure Sensor .................. 2-23
2.1.10 Removing Coil for Reversing Valve Coil ....................................................................................... 2-26
2.1.11 Removing Coil for Solenoid Valve Coil ......................................................................................... 2-27
2.1.12 Removing Thermistor for Liquid Pipe ........................................................................................... 2-28
2.1.13 Removing Reversing Valve (RAS-5FSG, RAS-8FSG, RAS-10FSG, RAS-16FSG, RAS-20FSG,
RAS-5FS3, RAS-8FS3, RAS-10FS3, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FS3, RAS-8FXG, RAS-10FXG,
RAS-8FX3 and RAS-10FX3) ........................................................................................................ 2-29
2.1.14 Removing Reversing Valve (RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1, RAS-24FS5 and RAS-30FS5) ......... 2-30
2.1.15 Removing Electrical Components (RAS-5FSG, RAS-8FSG, RAS-10FSG, RAS-16FSG,
RAS-20FSG, RAS-5FS3, RAS-8FS3, RAS-10FS3, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FS3, RAS-8FXG,
RAS-10FXG, RAS-8FX3 and RAS-10FX3) .................................................................................. 2-31
2.1.16 Removing Electrical Components
(RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1, RAS-24FS5 and RAS-30FS5) ..................................................... 2-33
2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type (RPI-0.8FSG1 to RPI-5.0FSG1) ......................................................................... 2-37
2.2.1 Removing Long Life Filter ............................................................................................................. 2-37
2.2.2 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB) ........................................................................................ 2-37
2.2.3 Removing Indoor Fan and Fan Motor ........................................................................................... 2-39
2.2.4 Removing Thermistor for Liquid Piping and Gas Piping ............................................................... 2-46
2.2.5 Removing Electronic Expansion Valve Coil .................................................................................. 2-47
2.2.6 Removing Float Switch ................................................................................................................. 2-47
2.2.7 Removing Drain Pump ................................................................................................................. 2-48
2.2.8 Removing Drain Pan .................................................................................................................... 2-49
2.3 In-the-Ceiling Type (RPI-8FSG1 and RPI-10FSG1) .......................................................................... 2-51
2.3.1 Removing Long Life Filter ............................................................................................................. 2-51
2.3.2 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB) ........................................................................................ 2-51
2.3.3 Removing Indoor Fan and Fan Motor ........................................................................................... 2-52
2.3.4 Removing Electronic Expansion Valve and Thermistors .............................................................. 2-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 - CONTENTS -
No. Page

2.4 4-Way Cassette Type ......................................................................................................................... 2-55

2.4.1 Removing Long Life Filter ............................................................................................................. 2-55
2.4.2 Removing Air Intake Grille ............................................................................................................ 2-55
2.4.3 Removing Electrical Box Cover .................................................................................................... 2-56
2.4.4 Removing Optional Air Panel ........................................................................................................ 2-56
2.4.5 Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor ......................................................................................... 2-57
2.4.6 Removing Bell-Mouth ................................................................................................................... 2-58
2.4.7 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB) ........................................................................................ 2-59
2.4.8 Removing Drain Pan .................................................................................................................... 2-60
2.4.9 Removing Drain-Up Mechanism ................................................................................................... 2-61
2.4.10 Removing Float Switch ................................................................................................................. 2-61
2.4.11 Removing Thermistors for Liquid Pipe and Gas Pipe ................................................................... 2-62
2.4.12 Removing Electronic Expansion Valve Coil .................................................................................. 2-63
2.4.13 Removing Automatic Louver Motor .............................................................................................. 2-65
2.5 2-Way Cassette Type ......................................................................................................................... 2-66
2.5.1 Removing Long Life Filter and Air Intake Grille ............................................................................ 2-66
2.5.2 Removing Electrical Box Cover .................................................................................................... 2-66
2.5.3 Removing Optional Air Panel ........................................................................................................ 2-67
2.5.4 Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor ......................................................................................... 2-68
2.5.5 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB) ........................................................................................ 2-70
2.5.6 Removing Float Switch ................................................................................................................. 2-71
2.5.7 Removing Drain-Up Mechanism ................................................................................................... 2-72
2.5.8 Removing Drain Pan .................................................................................................................... 2-73
2.5.9 Removing Thermistors for Liquid and Gas Pipes ......................................................................... 2-74
2.5.10 Removing Electronic Expansion Valve Coil .................................................................................. 2-75
2.5.11 Removing Automatic Louver Motor .............................................................................................. 2-77
2.6 Wall Type ........................................................................................................................................... 2-79
2.6.1 Removing Air Filter ....................................................................................................................... 2-79
2.6.2 Removing Front Panel .................................................................................................................. 2-80
2.6.3 Removing Motor for Automatic Louver ......................................................................................... 2-82
2.6.4 Removing Thermistors for Liquid Pipe, Gas Pipe, Discharge Air and Suction Air ........................ 2-83
2.6.5 Removing Electrical Box Cover .................................................................................................... 2-85
2.6.6 Removing Indoor PCB .................................................................................................................. 2-86
2.6.7 Removing Drain Pan .................................................................................................................... 2-87
2.6.8 Removing Heat Exchanger ........................................................................................................... 2-88
2.6.9 Removing Fan and Fan Motor ...................................................................................................... 2-90
2.6.10 Removing Electronic Expansion Valve Coil .................................................................................. 2-92
2.7 Floor Type .......................................................................................................................................... 2-94
2.7.1 Removing Air Intake Grille ............................................................................................................ 2-94
2.7.2 Removing Air Filter ....................................................................................................................... 2-94
2.7.3 Removing Discharge Air Grille ...................................................................................................... 2-95
2.7.4 Removing Front Cover ................................................................................................................. 2-95
2.7.5 Removing Fan Motor .................................................................................................................... 2-96
2.7.6 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB) ........................................................................................ 2-98
2.7.7 Removing Thermistors for Liquid Pipe and Gas Pipe ................................................................... 2-100

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 - CONTENTS -
No. Page

2.8 Floor Concealed Type ........................................................................................................................ 2-102

2.8.1 Removing Air Filter ....................................................................................................................... 2-102
2.8.2 Removing Front Covers ................................................................................................................ 2-102
2.8.3 Removing Fan Motor .................................................................................................................... 2-103
2.8.4 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB) ........................................................................................ 2-103
2.8.5 Removing Thermistors for Liquid Pipe and Gas Pipe ................................................................... 2-103
2.9 Ceiling Type ....................................................................................................................................... 2-104
2.9.1 Removing Air Filter and Air Intake Grille ....................................................................................... 2-104
2.9.2 Removing Side Cover ................................................................................................................... 2-104
2.9.3 Removing Discharge Air Grille ...................................................................................................... 2-105
2.9.4 Removing Fan Motor .................................................................................................................... 2-106
2.9.5 Removing Bearing ........................................................................................................................ 2-108
2.9.6 Removing Coupling ...................................................................................................................... 2-108
2.9.7 Removing Automatic Louver Motor .............................................................................................. 2-109
2.9.8 Removing Thermistors for Liquid Pipe and Gas Pipe, and Electronic Expansion Valve Coil ....... 2-109
2.9.9 Checking Procedures for Electronic Expansion Valve Coil .......................................................... 2-110
2.9.10 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB) ........................................................................................ 2-111
2.10 Total Heat Exchanger ......................................................................................................................... 2-112
2.10.1 Structure ....................................................................................................................................... 2-112
2.10.2 Removing Electrical Parts ............................................................................................................ 2-112
2.10.3 Removing Air Filter and Total Heat Exchanger Element ............................................................... 2-113
2.10.4 Removing Fan Motor .................................................................................................................... 2-114
2.10.5 Air Filter Cleaning ......................................................................................................................... 2-115
2.10.6 Total Heat Exchanger Cleaning .................................................................................................... 2-115
2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger ............................................................................................... 2-116
2.11.1 Required Tools for Cleaning (for All Indoor Units) ........................................................................ 2-116
2.11.2 In-the-Ceiling Type ....................................................................................................................... 2-117
2.11.3 Cleaning 4-Way Cassette Type Indoor Unit .................................................................................. 2-120
2.11.4 Cleaning 2-Way Cassette Type Indoor Unit .................................................................................. 2-124
2.11.5 Cleaning Wall Type Indoor Unit .................................................................................................... 2-127
2.11.6 Cleaning Floor Type and Floor Concealed Type Indoor Unit ........................................................ 2-128
2.11.7 Cleaning Ceiling Type Indoor Unit ................................................................................................ 2-131
2.12 Collecting Refrigerant for Replacing Indoor Unit ................................................................................ 2-133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 - CONTENTS -
No. Page

3. MAIN PARTS .............................................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Inverter ............................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Specifications of Inverter (For 380/415V, 50Hz and 380V, 60Hz Power Source) ......................... 3-1
3.1.2 Specifications of Inverter (For 220V, 60Hz Power Source) .......................................................... 3-3
3.1.3 Arrangement of Inverter Power Unit ............................................................................................. 3-5
3.1.4 Inverter Time Chart ....................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.1.5 Protective Function ....................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.1.6 Overload Control .......................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.2 AC Chopper ....................................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.3 Auto-Louver Mechanism .................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.1 4-Way Cassette Type ................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.2 2-Way Cassette Type ................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.3 Ceiling Type ..................................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.4 Scroll Compressor ............................................................................................................................. 3-17
3.4.1 Reliable Mechanism for Low Vibration and Low Sound ............................................................... 3-17
3.4.2 Principle of Compression .............................................................................................................. 3-17
3.4.3 Structure ....................................................................................................................................... 3-18
3.5 Thermistor .......................................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.1 Thermistor for Indoor Unit ............................................................................................................. 3-20
3.5.2 Thermistor for Outdoor Unit .......................................................................................................... 3-21
3.6 Electronic Expansion Valve ................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.6.1 Electronic Expansion Valve for Outdoor Units .............................................................................. 3-23
3.6.2 Electronic Expansion Valve for Indoor Units ................................................................................. 3-24
3.7 Pressure Sensor ................................................................................................................................ 3-25
3.8 High Pressure Protection Device ....................................................................................................... 3-26
3.9 Noise Filter (NF) ................................................................................................................................. 3-27
3.10 Capacitor (CB1, CB2) ........................................................................................................................ 3-29
3.11 Reactor (DCL) .................................................................................................................................... 3-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 - CONTENTS -
No. Page

4. OPTIONAL FUNCTION .............................................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Indoor Unit
(For RPF(I)-FSG(E), RPK-FSGM(6), RPC-FSG1 (Before Alteration) and RPI (8, 10HP) Series) .... 4-1
4.1.1 Remote Control ON/OFF Function ............................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Power Supply ON/OFF 1 (Automatic Operation When Power Supply ON) .................................. 4-5
4.1.3 Power Supply ON/OFF 2 (Restarting Function After Power Failure) ............................................ 4-5
4.1.4 Control by Field-Supplied Room Thermostat ............................................................................... 4-6
4.1.5 Operation Control by Remote Temperature Sensor (Except for RPK-FSGM Series) .................. 4-7
4.1.6 Cooling or Heating Operation Mode Setting Change by External Input (Level Signal Input) ....... 4-7
4.1.7 Picking Up Operation Signal ......................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2 Indoor Unit (For RPI (0.8 to 5.0HP), RCI, RCD, RPC (After Alteration) and KPI Series) ................... 4-11
4.2.1 Input and Output Setting of Indoor PCB Connector ..................................................................... 4-11
4.2.2 Remote Control Thermistor Function ............................................................................................ 4-13
4.2.3 Remote Control ON/OFF Function ............................................................................................... 4-14
4.2.4 Power Supply ON/OFF 1 (Automatic Operation When Power Supply ON) .................................. 4-18
4.2.5 Power Supply ON/OFF 2 (Restarting Function After Power Failure) ............................................ 4-18
4.2.6 Control by Field-Supplied Room Thermostat (Except for KPI Series) .......................................... 4-19
4.2.7 Operation Control by Remote Temperature Sensor (Except for KPI Series) ................................ 4-20
4.2.8 Cooling or Heating Operation Mode Setting Change by External Input (Except for KPI Series) .. 4-20
4.2.9 Precooling/Preheating Operation (KPI Series Only) ..................................................................... 4-21
4.2.10 Picking Up Operation Signal ......................................................................................................... 4-21
4.3 Outdoor Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.3.1 Demand ........................................................................................................................................ 4-27
4.3.2 Forced Stoppage .......................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.3.3 Demand Current Control (Only for 24 and 30HP) ........................................................................ 4-28
4.3.4 Fixing Operation Mode ................................................................................................................. 4-28
4.3.5 Snow Sensor ................................................................................................................................ 4-29
4.3.6 Defrosting Condition Changeover ................................................................................................ 4-30
4.3.7 Indoor Fan Control during Thermo-OFF at Heating ..................................................................... 4-30
4.3.8 All Season Heating Operation ...................................................................................................... 4-31
4.3.9 All Season Cooling Operation ...................................................................................................... 4-31
4.3.10 Night Shift (Low Sound) Operation ................................................................................................ 4-32
4.3.11 Picking Up Signals from Outdoor Unit Printed Circuit Board ........................................................ 4-33
4.4 Remote Control Switch, PC-P1H and PC-2H2 .................................................................................. 4-35
4.4.1 Name of Part ................................................................................................................................ 4-35
4.4.2 Simultaneous Operation ............................................................................................................... 4-36
4.4.3 Operation System with Two Remote Control Switches ................................................................ 4-38
4.4.4 Optional Function Setting ............................................................................................................. 4-40
4.4.5 Optional Functions of Remote Control Switch .............................................................................. 4-43
4.4.6 Indication of Address (ADDS) and Refrigerant Cycle Number (RN) ............................................. 4-47
4.5 Wireless Remote Control Switch, PC-LH3 ......................................................................................... 4-48
4.5.1 Name of Part ................................................................................................................................ 4-48
4.5.2 Identifying of Indoor Units Installed Side By Side ......................................................................... 4-49
4.5.3 Simultaneous Operation ............................................................................................................... 4-50
4.5.4 Emergency Operation ................................................................................................................... 4-52
4.5.5 Optional Function Setting (In Case of PC-RLH4, PC-RLH5 and PC-RLH7) ................................ 4-53
4.5.6 Optional Functions of Wireless Remote Control Switch ............................................................... 4-54
4.6 7-Day Timer, PSC-5T ......................................................................................................................... 4-55
4.7 Central Station, PSC-5S .................................................................................................................... 4-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 - CONTENTS -
No. Page

5. FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Burnt-out Compressor due to Insufficient Refrigerant Charge ........................................................... 5-1
5.2 Insufficient Cooling Performance When A Long Piping Is Applied ..................................................... 5-2
5.3 Abnormally High Operating Sound [In-the-Ceiling Type Indoor Unit] ................................................. 5-3
5.4 Alarm Code “31” ................................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.5 Not Cooling Well due to Insufficient Installation Space for Outdoor Unit ........................................... 5-5
5.6 Attention for SET-FREE FXG/FX3 Series .......................................................................................... 5-6
5.7 Select Guide of Drain Pipe for Indoor Unit ......................................................................................... 5-11
5.8 Caution on Refrigerant Leakage ........................................................................................................ 5-12
5.9 Maintenance Work ............................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.10 Service & Maintenance Record by 7-Segment Display ..................................................................... 5-15
5.11 Service & Maintenance Record by Remote Control Switch ............................................................... 5-16
5.12 Service & Maintenance Record ......................................................................................................... 5-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 There are some alterations (mainly in PCB) in the indoor unit, and the distinction of the alterations
are partly outlined in this manual.
See the following table for the details.

Before Alteration After Alteration

Model
CODE Production Shift CODE Production Shift
RPC-2.0FSG1 60277344 60277631 From U4UH7706
RPC-2.5FSG1 60277345 60277632 From U4UH7711
RPC-3.0FSG1 60277346 60277633 From U4UR7514
RPC-4.0FSG1 60277347 60277634 From U4UK7994
RPC-5.0FSG1 60277348 60277635 From U4UT2827
RCD-1.0FSG1 60277510 60277571 From U4UR7004
RCD-1.5FSG1 60277511 60277572 From U4UN0462
RCD-2.0FSG1 60277512 60277573 From U4UN0507
RCD-2.5FSG1 60277513 60277574 From U4US3677
RCD-3.0FSG1 60277514 60277575 From U4UT2126
RCD-4.0FSG1 60277515 60277576 From U4UT2131
RCD-5.0FSG1 60277516 60277577 From U4UT2136
RPI-0.8FSG1 60277401 60277591 From U4UH8281
RPI-1.0FSG1 60277402 60277592 From U4UH8301
RPI-1.5FSG1 60277403 60277593 From U4UD3950
RPI-2.0FSG1 60277339 60277594 From U4UH8341
RPI-2.5FSG1 60277340 60277595 From U4UH8361
RPI-3.0FSG1 60277341 60277596 From U4UH8381
RPI-4.0FSG1 60277342 60277597 From U4UH8431
RPI-5.0FSG1 60277343 60277598 From U4UH8451
RPI-8FSG1 60277485 From First Production - -
RPI-10FSG1 60277486 From First Production - -
RPK-1.0FSGM 60277412 60277699 *1) From U4UR1494
RPK-1.5FSGM 60277413 60277700 *1) From U4UR1514
RPK-2.0FSGM 60277414 60277701 *1) From U4UR1578
RPK-2.3FSGM 60277415 60277702 *1) From U4UR1588
RPF-1.0FSG 60277305 From First Production - -
RPF-1.5FSG 60277306 From First Production - -
RPFI-1.0FSG 60277307 From First Production - -
RPFI-1.5FSG 60277308 From First Production - -
RCI-1.0FSG2 - - 60277611 From First Production
RCI-1.5FSG2 - - 60277612 [Full Model Change]
RCI-2.0FSG2 - - 60277613
RCI-2.5FSG2 - - 60277614
RCI-3.0FSG2 - - 60277615
RCI-4.0FSG2 - - 60277616
RCI-5.0FSG2 - - 60277617
COMMON 1. The indication "USE PC-P1H"
is shown in the indication label
of the packing.

RC
I

2. The indication "USE PC-P1H"

is shown on the electrical box cover.
*1): The model name is indicated as shown when after alteration. (RPK Models Only)
ex.) RPK-1.0FSGM6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1. TROUBLESHOOTING
1.1 Initial Troubleshooting
1.1.1 Rotary Switch and Dip Switch Setting
(1) Indoor Unit
The PCB in the indoor unit is equipped with 7 types of dip switches and rotary switch. Before testing
unit, set these dip switches according to the following instructions. Unless these dip switches are
set in the field, the unit can not be operated.

Before setting dip switches, firstly turn OFF power source and set the position of the dip switches.
If the switches are set without turning OFF the power source, the switches can not function.

NOTE
The “
” mark indicates position of dip switches. Figures show the setting before shipment.

a. Unit No. Setting (RSW)

Setting is required. Set the unit No. of all indoor units respectively and serially, by following
setting position shown in the table below. Numbering must start from “0” for every outdoor unit.
Setting Position
F 01
CD E

23

Set by inserting slotted screwdriver

456
AB

7 9
8 into the groove

No. 0 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No.5 No. 6 No. 7

Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit

Rotary F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01
CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E
23

23

23

23

23

23

23

23
Switch
456

456

456

456

456

456

456

456
AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB
7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9
Setting 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

No. 8 No. 9 No. 10 No. 11 No. 12 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15

Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit

Rotary F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01
CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E
23

23

23

23

23

23

23

23

Switch
456

456

456

456

456

456

456

456
AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

Setting
7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

RPC(Before Alteration)
b. Optional Function Setting (DSW2) RPF, RPFI, RPI-8,10 and RPK RCD(Before Alteration)
No setting is required. RPI-0.8 to 1.5(Before Alteration)
Setting position before shipment is all OFF.
ON ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF 1 2 OFF
c. Capacity Code Setting (DSW3)
No setting is required, due to setting before shipment. This switch is used for setting the capacity
code which corresponds to the Horse-Power of the indoor unit.
0.8 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.3 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 8.0 10.0
RCI       
RPI          
RCD       
RPF and RPFI  
RPK    
 : Available
Horsepower 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Setting
Position
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Horsepower 2.5 2.8 3.0 4.0 5.0 8.0 10.0
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Setting
Position
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

1-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

d. Capacity Adjustment Setting (DSW4: for RPF, RPFI, RPI-8,10 and RPC(Before Alteration))
No setting is required. Setting position before shipment is all OFF.

Setting ON
Pattern 1 2 OFF

e. Refrigerant Cycle No. Setting (DSW5)

Setting is required. Setting position before shipment is all OFF.

Horse-Power 0.8 to 10
Setting ON
Pattern 1 2 3 4 OFF

f. Unit Code Setting (DSW6; Except for RCI and RPK Model)
No setting is required. Setting positions of the model code for indoor units are shown below.

Model Code a b c RPI-0.8FSG1

Setting ON ON ON
Model Code <Model Code>
Position 1 2 3 4 OFF 1 2 3 4 OFF 1 2 3 4 OFF
(a) RPI-0.8FSG1 to RPI-10FSG1
Model Code d e (b) RCD-1.0FSG1 to RCD-5.0FSG1
(c) RPC-2.0FSG1 to RPC-5.0FSG1
Setting ON ON (d) RPF-1.0FSG(E) and RPFI-1.0 FSG(E)
Position 1 2 3 4 OFF 1 2 3 4 OFF (e) RPF-1.5FSG(E) and RPFI-1.5FSG(E)

g. Fuse Recover (DSW7) (for Auxiliary use)

No setting is required. Setting position before shipment is all OFF.

Setting ON
Pattern 1 2 OFF

(2) Outdoor Unit

TURN OFF all power sources before setting. Without turning OFF, the switches do not work and the
contents of the setting are invalid. Mark of “■” indicates the position of dip switches. Set the dip
switches according to the figure below.

Check to ensure that the #8 pin of DSW5 is correctly set according to the power supply of the
unit. If the setting is different from the power supply of the unit, it may cause the unit stoppage
due to alarm or the breakdown of the compressor.

NOTE
• By using switch DSW4, 7 and 8 the unit is started or stopped after 10 to 20 seconds after the switch is
operated.
• Make the outdoor unit No. clear to distinguish from other outdoor units for service and maintenance.

1-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

<In Case of 5 to 20HP>

<DSW1 to 3: for FSG/FS3 Series>

DSW1 Ref. System No. Setting DSW2 Capacity Setting DSW3 Height Difference
SR When H-Link is used, setting NSR Each outdoor unit is set as shown SR
is required. below before shipment.
B.S.
ON 5HP O.U. 8HP O.U. 10HP O.U. * The O.U. is located higher than I. U.
ON
ON ON ON (0 to 50m)
1 2 3 4 * The O.U. is located lower than I.U.
1 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 (0 to 20m)
No.0 Unit Setting Condition
16HP O.U. 20HP O.U.
ON
Set the unit number of outdoor unit ON ON * The O.U. is located lower than I.U.
at each refrigerant cycle. (20 to 40m)
(Setting before shipment is unit 0.) 1 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

<DSW1 to 3: for FXG/FX3 Series>

DSW1 Ref. System No. Setting DSW2 Capacity Setting DSW3 Height Difference
SR When H-Link is used, setting NSR SR
is required.
RAS-8FXG RAS-10FXG <Setting Before Shipment>
ON ON ON
ON * The O.U. is located ON * The O.U. is located
higher than I. U. lower than I. U.
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 (0 to 20m) (0 to 20m)
1 2 1 2
No.0 Unit Setting Condition RAS-8FX3 RAS-10FX3
Set the unit number of outdoor unit ON ON ON * The O.U. is located ON * The O.U. is located
at each refrigerant cycle. higher than I. U. lower than I. U.
(Setting before shipment is unit 0.) 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 (20 to 50m) 1 2 (20 to 40m)

<Common for FSG/FS3 and FXG/FX3 Series>

DSW4 Trial/Service 1 DSW5 Option Function 1 DSW6 Piping Length
SR This dip switch is used when trial or SR Set the dip switch according to your requirements. SR
servicing operation is performed.
B.S. Power Supply #7 #8
B.S.
ON B.S. 380V/50Hz : ON 0 to 25m 25 to 50m
ON 415V/50Hz : OFF
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 380V/60Hz
Cooling Heating 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 220V/60Hz
1 2 1 2
ON ON
Setting Item Pin No.
50 to 75m 75 to 100m
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Circulator Function of Heating Thermo-OFF #1
ON ON
Night Shift (Low Noise) #2
Enforced Comp. Stop
Cancellation of Outdoor Ambient Temp. Limit of Heating #3
ON 1 2 1 2
Cancellation of Outdoor Ambient Temp. Limit of Cooling #4
Defrosting Condition Change for Cold Area #5
1 2 3 4 5 6

DSW7 Comp. Emergency Operation DSW8 Trial/Service 2 DSW9 Option Function 2

NSR NSR Exchanged NSR
B.S. B.S. Compressor Operation
ON
ON ON ON

1 2 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4
Set the pin at the ON side at emergency operation.
DSW10 Transmitting
Setting Item Pin No.
SR Cancellation of when fuse
Except No.1 Comp. Operation #1 B.S. Terminal Resistance is melted
Except No.2 Comp. Operation #2
ON ON ON
Except No.3 Comp. Operation #3
Except No.4 Comp. Operation #4
1 2 1 2 1 2

Push Switch Dip Switch Arrangement

PSW1 DSW1 DSW2 DSW3 DSW4 DSW5
Manual Defrosting
DSW6 DSW7 DSW8 DSW9 PSW1 PSW2 PSW3
PSW2 PSW3 DSW10
for Checks

SEG2 SEG1
B.S.: Before Shipment, NSR: No Setting is Required, SR: Setting Required

1-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

<In Case of 24 and 30HP>

DSW1 Ref. System No. Setting DSW2 Capacity Setting DSW3 Height Difference
SR When H-Link is used, setting NSR Each outdoor unit is set as shown SR
is required. below before shipment.
B.S.
ON ON * The O.U. is located higher than I. U.
RAS-24FSG1 RAS-30FSG1 (0 to 50m)
RAS-24FS5 RAS-30FS5 * The O.U. is located lower than I.U.
1 2 3 4 1 2
ON ON (0 to 20m)
No.0 Unit Setting Condition
Set the unit number of outdoor unit 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ON
* The O.U. is located lower than I.U.
at each refrigerant cycle. (20 to 40m)
(Setting before shipment is unit 0.) 1 2

DSW4 Trial/Service 1 DSW5 Option Function 1

SR This dip switch is used when trial or servicing operation SR Set the dip switch according to your requirements.
is performed.
B.S.
B.S. Cooling Heating
ON
ON ON ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Setting Item Pin No.
Enforced Except No.1 Circulator Function of Heating Thermo-OFF #1
Compressor Compressor Night Shift (Low Noise) #2
Stop Operation
Cancellation of Outdoor Ambient Temp. Limit of Heating #3
ON ON
Cancellation of Outdoor Ambient Temp. Limit of Cooling #4
Defrosting Condition Change for Cold Area #5
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Combination of Indoor Units are more than 16 #8

DSW6 Piping Length DSW7 Comp. Emergency Operation DSW8 Trial/Service 2

SR NSR NSR Exchanged
B.S. B.S. Compressor Operation
ON
ON ON
B.S.
0 to 25m 25 to 50m 1 2 3 4 1 2
1 2 1 2
ON ON
Set the pin at the ON side at emergency
1 2 1 2 operation. DSW9 Optional Function 2

Setting Item Pin No. SR Set the dip switch according to your requirements.
50 to 75m 75 to 120m Except No.2 Comp. Operation #1 Setting Item Pin No.
B.S.
ON ON Except No.3 Comp. Operation #2 Power Supply
ON (415V: ON, 380V and 220V: OFF) #2
Except No.4 Comp. Operation #3
1 2 1 2 Except No.5 Comp. Operation #4 Power Supply
1 2 3 4 (220V: ON, 380V and 415V: OFF) #3

DSW10 Transmitting Push Switch

SR
Cancellation of Short Circuit PSW1
B.S. End Resistance of Fuse Manual Defrosting
ON ON ON
PSW2 PSW3
1 2 1 2 1 2
for Checks

Dip Switch Arrangement

SEG2 SEG1
DSW1 DSW2 DSW3 PSW1 PSW2 PSW3
DSW4 DSW5
DSW6 DSW7 DSW8 DSW9

B.S.: Before Shipment, NSR: No Setting is Required, SR: Setting Required

1-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(3) CH Unit (For FX Series Only)

Before setting dip switches, firstly turn OFF power source and set the position of the dip switches.
If the dip switches are set without turning OFF the power source, the switches can not function.

NOTE

The “■” mark indicates position of dip switches. The figures below show the setting before
shipment.

a. Position of Dip Switches

The PCB2 in the electrical box of CH unit is equipped with 2 types of dip switches (DSW2, DSW5),
as shown in the figure below.
PCB2

DSW2

DSW5

b. Setting of Dip Switches

The dip switches are set before shipment and no setting in the field is required. These are utilized
for the self-diagnosis of PCB.

Factory Setting Position

(Dip Switch)

DSW2 DSW5
ON ON
OFF OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2

1.1.2 Checking of Electrical Wiring

 Check to ensure that the terminal for power source wiring (terminals “L1” to “L1” and “N” to “N” of
each terminal board: AC380-415V, terminals “R” to “R” and “T” to “T” of each terminal board:
AC220V) and intermediate wiring (Operating Line: terminals “1” to “1” and “2” to “2” of each terminal
board: DC5V) between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit coincide correctly, as figure below. If not,
some component will be damaged.
 Check to ensure that the twist pair cable with shield (≥0.75mm2) are used for intermediate wiring to
protect noise obstacle at total length of less than 1000m and size complied with local code.
 Check to ensure that the wirings and the breakers are chosen correctly, as shown in Table 1.1. and
1.2.
 All the field wiring and equipment must comply with local code.

1-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Example for Electrical Wiring Connection of FSG, FS3, FSG1 and FS5 System
Outdoor Unit (5 to 20HP)
<380-415V/50Hz, 380V/60Hz>
Max. 4 Units / Power Supply Line (5, 8 and 10HP)
Outdoor Unit 1 Outdoor Unit / Power Supply Line (16 and 20 HP)

RAS-5FS3
RAS-8FS3
RAS-10FS3 No. 0 System No. 1 System No. 3 System
Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit
RAS-16FS3
TB1 TB2 TB1 TB2 TB1 TB2
RAS-20FS3 L1 L2 L3 N 1 2 L1 L2 L3 N 1 2 L1 L2 L3 N 1 2
RAS-5FSG
RAS-8FSG
RAS-10FSG
RAS-16FSG
RAS-20FSG
Operating Line (Shielded Twist Pair Cable)
DC5V (Non-Pole Transmission H-LINK System)
ELB
ELB Distribution Box or Pull Box *2
Distribution Box or Pull Box *2
FUSE

Main Switch
ELB

3N
380V/50 Hz
415V/50 Hz
415V/60 Hz L1 L2 N L1 L2 N
TB1 TB1
No. 0 No. 1
Indoor Unit Indoor Unit
1N (3N ) TB2 Remote TB2 Remote
220V/50 Hz 1 2 A B Control 1 2 A B Control
240V/50 Hz Cable Cable
(Shielded Twist (Shielded Twist
220V/50 Hz Pair Cable) *1 Pair Cable) *1
Operating Line (Shielded Twist Pair Cable)
DC5V (Non-Pole Transmission H-LINK System) Remote Remote
Control Control
Switch Switch
TB : Terminal Board (PC-P1H) (PC-P1H)
PCB : Printed Circuit Board
: Field Wiring
: Field Supplied
No. 0 System Indoor Units No.1 System Indoor Units
: Optional Accessory (Max. 16 Units per Refrigerant Cycle)

*1: When installing PC-P1H remote control switch in Australia, connect the both ends of shield tube to earth.
*2: It is need for China and Australia only.

<220V/60Hz>
Outdoor Unit
RAS-5FS3 No. 0 System No. 1 System No. 3 System
Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit
RAS-8FS3
TB1 TB2 TB1 TB2 TB1 TB2
RAS-10FS3 R S T 1 2 R S T 1 2 R S T 1 2
RAS-16FS3
RAS-20FS3
RAS-5FSG
RAS-8FSG
RAS-10FSG
RAS-16FSG
RAS-20FSG
Operating Line (Shielded Twist Pair Cable)
DC5V (Non-Pole Transmission H-LINK System)

ELB
Distribution Box or Pull Box *2
ELB
Distribution Box or Pull Box *2
FUSE

Main Switch
ELB

3
220V/60Hz
L1 L2 N L1 L2 N
TB1 TB1
No. 0 No. 1
Indoor Unit Indoor Unit
TB2 Remote TB2 Remote
1 Control Control
1 2 A B 1 2 A B
220V/60 Hz Cable Cable
(Shielded Twist (Shielded Twist
Pair Cable) *1 Pair Cable) *1
Operating Line (Shielded Twist Pair Cable)
DC5V (Non-Pole Transmission H-LINK System) Remote Remote
Control Control
Switch Switch
TB : Terminal Board (PC-P1H) (PC-P1H)
PCB : Printed Circuit Board
: Field Wiring
: Field Supplied
No. 0 System Indoor Units
: Optional Accessory No.1 System Indoor Units
(Max. 27 Units per Refrigerant Cycle...RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5
Max. 32 Units per Refrigerant Cycle...RAS-30FSG1, RAS-30FS5)

*1: When installing PC-P1H remote control switch in Australia, connect the both ends of shield tube to earth.
*2: It is need for China and Australia only.

1-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Outdoor Unit (24 and 30HP)

<380-415V/50Hz, 380V/60Hz>

Outdoor Unit No. 0 System

Outdoor Unit
RAS-24FSG1 TB1 TB2
RAS-30FSG1 L1 L2 L3 N 1 2
RAS-24FS5
Operating Line (Shielded Twist Pair Cable)
RAS-30FS5 DC5V (Non-Pole Transmission H-LINK System)

ELB
ELB Distribution Box or Pull Box *2
Distribution Box or Pull Box *2
FUSE

Main Switch
ELB

3N
380V/50 Hz
415V/50 Hz
415V/60 Hz L1 L2 N L1 L2 N
TB1 TB1
No. 0 No. 1
Indoor Unit Indoor Unit
1N (3N ) TB2 Remote TB2 Remote
220V/50 Hz 1 2 A B Control 1 2 A B Control
240V/50 Hz Cable Cable
(Shielded Twist (Shielded Twist
220V/50 Hz Pair Cable) *1 Pair Cable) *1
Operating Line (Shielded Twist Pair Cable)
DC5V (Non-Pole Transmission H-LINK System) Remote Remote
Control Control
Switch Switch
TB : Terminal Board (PC-P1H) (PC-P1H)
PCB : Printed Circuit Board
: Field Wiring
: Field Supplied
No. 0 System Indoor Units
: Optional Accessory
(Max. 27 Units per Refrigerant Cycle...RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5
Max. 32 Units per Refrigerant Cycle...RAS-30FSG1, RAS-30FS5)

*1: When installing PC-P1H remote control switch in Australia, connect the both ends of shield tube to earth.
*2: It is need for China and Australia only.

<220V/60Hz>
Outdoor Unit No. 0 System
Outdoor Unit
RAS-24FSG1 TB1 TB2
RAS-30FSG1 R S T 1 2
RAS-24FS5
Operating Line (Shielded Twist Pair Cable)
RAS-30FS5 DC5V (Non-Pole Transmission H-LINK System)

ELB
Distribution Box or Pull Box *2
ELB
Distribution Box or Pull Box *2
FUSE

Main Switch
ELB

3
220V/60Hz
L1 L2 N L1 L2 N
TB1 TB1
No. 0 No. 1
Indoor Unit Indoor Unit
TB2 Remote TB2 Remote
1 Control Control
1 2 A B 1 2 A B
220V/60 Hz Cable Cable
(Shielded Twist (Shielded Twist
Pair Cable) *1 Pair Cable) *1
Operating Line (Shielded Twist Pair Cable)
DC5V (Non-Pole Transmission H-LINK System) Remote Remote
Control Control
Switch Switch
TB : Terminal Board (PC-P1H) (PC-P1H)
PCB : Printed Circuit Board
: Field Wiring
: Field Supplied
No. 0 System Indoor Units
: Optional Accessory
(Max. 27 Units per Refrigerant Cycle...RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5
Max. 32 Units per Refrigerant Cycle...RAS-30FSG1, RAS-30FS5)

*1: When installing PC-P1H remote control switch in Australia, connect the both ends of shield tube to earth.
*2: It is need for China and Australia only.

1-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 1.1 Electrical Data and Recommended Wiring, Breaker Size/1 Outdoor Unit <FS Series>

ELB
Max. Power
Running Supply Nominal Fuse
Power Nominal
Model Current Line Sensitive
Supply Current
Current
(A) (φmm) (A) (mA) (A)
RAS-5FSG
18 MLFC 0.75SQ 20 20
RAS-5FS3
RAS-8FSG
28 MLFC 2SQ
RAS-8FS3
40 40
RAS-10FSG
35 MLFC 3.5SQ 30
RAS-10FS3
RAS-16FSG 380-415V >57
57 MLFC 5.5SQ 100
RAS-16FS3 /50Hz (Ex. 100)
RAS-20FSG >71
71 MLFC 8SQ 100
RAS-20FS3 (Ex. 100)
RAS-24FSG1
74 MLFC 8SQ 100 80
RAS-24FS5
100
RAS-30FSG1
87 MLFC 14SQ 120 100
RAS-30FS5
RAS-5FSG
18 MLFC 0.75SQ 20 20
RAS-5FS3
RAS-8FSG
30 MLFC 2SQ 30 30
RAS-8FS3
RAS-10FSG
36 MLFC 3.5SQ 40 30 40
RAS-10FS3
RAS-16FSG
380V/60Hz 58 MLFC 5.5SQ 60 60
RAS-16FS3
RAS-20FSG
72 MLFC 8SQ 75 75
RAS-20FS3
RAS-24FSG1
77 MLFC 8SQ 100 80
RAS-24FS5
100
RAS-30FSG1
90 MLFC 14SQ 120 100
RAS-30FS5
RAS-5FSG
27 MLFC 2SQ 30 30
RAS-5FS3
RAS-8FSG
45 MLFC 3.5SQ 50
RAS-8FS3
60
RAS-10FSG
55 MLFC 5.5SQ 60 30
RAS-10FS3
RAS-16FSG
220V/60Hz 88 MLFC 14SQ 100 100
RAS-16FS3
RAS-20FSG
112 MLFC 14SQ 120 125
RAS-20FS3
RAS-24FSG1
132 MLFC 22SQ 150 150
RAS-24FS5
100
RAS-30FSG1
141 MLFC 22SQ 150 150
RAS-30FS5
ELB: Earth Leakage Breaker
MLFC: Flame Retardant Polyflex Wire

NOTE:
Regarding the wiring or breakers, follow to the local code.

1-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Example for Electrical Wiring Connection of FXG and FX3 System

Outdoor Unit Max. 4 Units / Power Supply Line

RAS-8FXG
RAS-8FX3
RAS-10FXG No. 0 System No. 1 System No. 3 System
Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit
RAS-10FX3
TB1 TB2 TB1 TB2 TB1 TB2
L1 L2 L3 N 1 2 L1 L2 L3 N 1 2 L1 L2 L3 N 1 2

Distribution Box or Pull Box *2 Operating Line (Shielded Twist Pair Cable)
DC5V (Non-Pole Transmission H-LINK System)
ELB
ELB Distribution Box or Pull Box *2

FUSE

Main Switch
ELB No. 1 System
CH Units
3N
380V/50 Hz No. 0 Group No. 1 Group
415V/50 Hz CH Unit CH Unit

415V/60 Hz

1N (3N )
220V/50 Hz
240V/50 Hz
220V/50 Hz

TB : Terminal Board
L1 L2 N L1 L2 N
PCB : Printed Circuit Board
TB1 TB1
: Field Wiring
No. 0 No. 1
: Field Supplied Indoor Unit Indoor Unit
: Optional Accessory TB2 Remote TB2 Remote
1 2 A B Control 1 2 A B Control
Cable Cable
(Shielded Twist (Shielded Twist
Pair Cable) *1 Pair Cable) *1
Operating Line (Shielded Twist Pair Cable)
DC5V (Non-Pole Transmission H-LINK System) Remote Remote
Control Control
Switch Switch
(PC-P1H) (PC-P1H)

No. 0 System Indoor Units No.1 System Indoor Units

(Max. 16 Units per Refrigerant Cycle)

*1: When installing PC-P1H remote control switch in Australia, connect the both ends of shield tube to earth.
*2: It is need for China and Australia only.

Table 1.2 Electrical Data and Recommended Wiring, Breaker Size/1 Outdoor Unit <FX Series>

ELB
Max. Power
Running Supply Nominal Fuse
Power Nominal
Model Current Line Sensitive
Supply Current
Current
(A) (φmm) (A) (mA) (A)
RAS-8FXG
32 MLFC 2SQ
RAS-8FX3 380-415V 40 30 40
RAS-10FXG /50Hz
35 MLFC 3.5SQ
RAS-10FX3
ELB: Earth Leakage Breaker
MLFC: Flame Retardant Polyflex Wire

NOTE:
Regarding the wiring or breakers, follow to the local code.

1-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.1.3 Checking by 7-Segment Display

(1) Simple Checking by 7-Segment Display

1  Turn on All Indoor Units  All the Indoor Units Connected to the Outdoor Unit

2 Turn on the Outdoor Unit

3 Auto-addressing Starts During auto-addressing, the following items can be checked using the
outdoor unit's on-board 7-segment LED display.
Outdoor Unit
(1) Disconnection of power supply to the indoor unit.
Printed
(2) Reverse connection of the operating line between the outdoor and
Circuit Board
indoor units.
PCB1
In this case, "03" appears after 30 seconds.
(3) Duplication of indoor unit number. See Alarm Code 35.

Normal
(1) The outdoor unit's on-board 7-segment LED display is not indicated.
Case

(2) The outdoor unit's on-board 7-segment LED display indicates as follows if there is something wrong.

(A) The indoor units are not

supplied with power. continues to flash after 30 seconds.

Abnormal
(B) Disconnection of the
Case
operating line between the continues to flash after 30 seconds.
outdoor and indoor units.

(C) Duplicated settings of the indoor unit number DIP switch DSW1 (Refer to the description of
alarm code "35", in the item 1.2.2, "Troubleshooting by Alarm Code".)

1-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.1.4 Emergency Operation when Inverter Compressor is Damaged

(1) Failure of Inverter Compressor
a. Contents of Operation
(Applied Models: RAS-8FSG(3), 10FSG(3), 16FSG(3), 20FSG(3), 24FSG1(5), 30FSG1(5) /
RAS-8FXG(3), 10FXG(3))
* This operation is an emergency operation by a constant compressor, when the inverter
compressor is failed.
* By turning ON “#1” of DSW7 on PCB1 and “#1” of DSW1 on PCB3, emergency operation is
started. (In Case of 5 to 20HP)
* By turning ON “#6” of DSW4 on PCB1 and “#1” of DSW1 on ISPM, emergency operation is
started. (In Case of 24 and 30HP)
* Control of the emergency operation is same with normal control except the inverter compressor
stoppage.
b. Operating Condition
The constant speed compressor is forced to be stopped for compressor protection under the
condition below.
Total Capacity of Thermo-ON indoor units < 50% of Outdoor Unit Capacity
In case of the above condition, the compressor is operated and stopped repeatedly, and it may
cause the compressor failure. Therefore, the compressor is forced to be stopped to protect it.
NOTE:
If the printed circuit board for inverter (PCB3) is damaged, this is not available.
Setting airflow of indoor unit is keeping during enforced stoppage.
Therefore, it is recommended that setting airflow is “Lo” to avoid the person in the room feels cold.
c. Method of Emergency Operation
Checking Before Emergency Operation.
* Measure insulation resistance of the inverter compressor.
Do not perform the emergency operation when the insulation resistance is 0Ω.
There is a possibility that refrigerant oil may be oxidized, if the emergency operation is
performed, the other compressor is damaged.
* In case of total capacity of Thermo-ON indoor units are more than 50% of outdoor unit capacity,
emergency operation is available.
* In this emergency operation, frequency of the compressor is not controlled at each 1Hz.
Therefore, alarm code “07”, “43”, “44”, “45” or “47” may be indicated on LCD. Details of alarm
codes are shown in the alarm code table (page 1-23).
* This emergency operation does not provide sufficient cooling and heating capacity.
* This method is an emergency operation temporarily when the inverter compressor is damaged.
Therefore, change the new one as soon as possible.
* Turn OFF “#1” of DSW7 on PCB1 and “#1” of DSW1 on PCB3 after changing the new
compressor. (In Case of 5 to 20HP)
Turn OFF “#6” of DSW4 on PCB1 and “#1” of DSW1 on ISPM after changing the new
compressor. (In Case of 24 and 30HP)
If this setting is not performed, the inverter compressor will be damaged.
d. Emergency Operation
* Turn OFF all the power source switches.
* Disconnect the wiring from the inverter compressor. Insulate the faston terminals for inverter
compressor wires by insulation tape.
* Set the No.1 of DSW7 on the PCB1 and No.1 of DSW1 on the PCB3 at the “ON” side.
(In Case of 5 to 20HP)
Set “#6” of DSW4 on PCB1 and “#1” of DSW1 on ISPM at the “ON” side.
(In Case of 24 and 30HP)
* Turn ON all the power source switches.
* Operate the system by remote control switches.
* The system is stopped by turning OFF all the remote control switches or turning OFF all the
power source switches.

1-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(2) Failure of Constant Speed Compressor

a. Contents of Operation
(Applied Models: RAS-8FSG(3), 10FSG(3), 16FSG(3), 20FSG(3), 24FSG1(5), 30FSG1(5) /
RAS-8FXG(3), 10FXG(3))
* This operation is an emergency operation by the inverter compressor, when the constant speed
compressor is failed.
* This operation is controlled by a normal control.
b. Operating Condition
* Set the No.2, 3 or 4 of DSW7 on the PCB1 at the “ON” side. (In case of 5 to 20HP)
* Set the No.1, 2, 3 or 4 of DSW7 on the PCB1 at the “ON” side. (In case of 24 and 30HP)
* Temperature of THM2, THM3 and THM4 on the top of compressors are not ignored by setting
DSW7.
If the thermistor is short-circuited or cut, this operation is available.

1-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.1.5 Failure of Power Supply to Indoor Unit and Remote Control Switch
 Lights and LCD are not Indicated.
 Not Operated
If fuses are melted or a breaker is activated, investigate the cause of over current and take
necessary action.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Measure voltage
Power Failure or Power is Not ON by volt-meter. Supply power.

Check for any Remove the cause

Short Circuit Supplied
uncovered part of wires. of short-circuit and
between Wires
replace the fuse.

Measure insulation Remove the cause

Short Circuit of
resistance. of short-circuit and
Melted Fuse or Wires to Earth
replace the fuse.
Activation of
Breaker at
Power Source Failure of Indoor Unit Measure resistance Replace the AC
Fan Motor between wires and chopper for indoor fan,
insulation resistance. fan motor and fuse.

Replace the AC
Failure of AC Chopper
chopper for indoor
for Indoor Fan
fan and fuse.

Remove the cause

Short Circuit Supplied Check for any
of short-circuit and
between Wires uncovered part of wires.
replace the fuse.

Measure insulation Remove the cause

Short Circuit of
resistance. of short-circuit and
Control Circuit to Earth
Melted Fuse replace the fuse.
at Control
Circuit Measure resistance Replace the AC
Failure of Indoor Unit
between wiring and chopper for indoor fan,
Fan Motor
insulation resistance. fan motor and fuse.

Replace the AC
Failure of AC Chopper
chopper for indoor
for Indoor Fan
fan and fuse.

Measure voltage
Failure of Transformer at Indoor Unit Side at secondary side. Replace the transformer.

Replace cable or
Disconnected Cable of Remote Control Switch Connect the cable. repair it.

Insufficient Connection
or Incorrect Connection
Insufficient of Indoor Unit PCB
Contacting at
Connectors of Check connectors. Correctly connect it.
Remote Control Insufficient Connection
Switch or Incorrect Connection
of PCB in Remote
Control Switch

1-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(1.1.5 Failure of Power Supply to Indoor Unit and Remote Control Switch)

Check it by Replace remote

Failure of Remote Control Switch
self-checking mode *1). control switch if failed.

Unconnected Wires Correctly connect

to PCB Check connectors.
wires.
Failure of PCB
Check it by
Failure of PCB self-checking mode *2). Replace PCB if failed.

Take action according to the procedure

Incorrect Wiring Connection
indicated in "TEST RUN".

*1): Refer to Item 1.3.2.

*2): Refer to Item 1.3.1.

1.1.6 Abnormal Transmission between Remote Control Switch and Indoor Unit
 “RUN” Lamp on Remote Control Switch:
Flickering every 2 seconds

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Disconnection or Insufficient Contacting of Check cable and Repair cable or

Remote Control Cable connections. connect it.

Incorrect Wiring Connection Check wiring and

connections. Repairing
(Incorrect Polarity)

Check it by Replace it if remote

Failure of Remote Control Switch
self-checking mode *1). control switch is faulty.

Disconnected Wire Correctly connect

to PCB Check connectors.
Failure of PCB wires.
(in Indoor Unit
and Remote
Control Switch) Check it by
Failure of PCB self-checking mode *2). Replace PCB if failed.

*1): Refer to Item 1.3.2.

*2): Refer to Item 1.3.1.
*3): This phenomenon occurs when the system is newly installed and is started within 5 minutes after power supply,
since automatic setting of unit No. is performed during this period.

1-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.1.7 Abnormalities of Devices

In the case that no abnormality (Alarm Code) is indicated on the remote control switch, and normal
operation is not available, take necessary action according to the procedures mentioned below.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Disconnected Measure coil

Failure of Coil resistance by tester.
Replace indoor unit
Indoor Unit
fan motor.
Fan Motor Burnt-Out Measure insulation
Coil resistance.

Disconnected Measure coil

Failure of Coil resistance by tester.
Replace outdoor unit
Outdoor Unit
fan motor.
Fan Motor Burnt-Out Measure insulation
Coil resistance.

"RUN" light is
ON and LCD Failure of
is indicated. Magnetic Measure voltage
Insufficient Replace PCB for
However, the Switch for between contacting
Contacting outdoor unit.
system does Outdoor Unit parts.
not operated. Fan Motor

(ex.
The indoor, Measure resistance
Failure of Comp. Motor
outdoor fans between two wires.
or compressor Replace compressor.
does not
operate.) Check for abnormal
Failure of Comp.
sound from comp.

Failure of
Check magnetic
Magnetic Insufficient Replace magnetic
switch activates
Switch for Contacting switch.
correctly or not.
Comp.

Disconnected
Correctly connect
Wiring to Check connections.
wiring.
Failure of PCB
One of PCBs
Failure of Check PCB by Replace PCB
PCB self-checking *1). if failed.

Failure of
Failure of Thermistor
Check it by
Air Inlet
Check Mode *2).
The Comp. Thermistor Disconnection Replace or correctly
does not Stop of Thermistor connect wires if
or Start even abnormality exists.
if the Setting
temperature Abnormality of Remote
on LCD is Check it by Test Run.
Control Switch Cord
Changed *3)

Check it by Replace PCB if

Failure of Indoor Unit PCB
self-checking *1). failed.

1-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(1.1.7 Abnormalities of Devices)

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Check Setting Condition

of "Thermistor of
Remote Control Switch"
by Optional Setting
* Setting and Control
"00": Control by Indoor
Thermistor for
Suction Air In case that
Incorrect Optional "01": Control by thermistor of remote
Setting Thermistor of control switch is not
Remote Control used, set at "00".
The Comp. Switch
does not Stop "02": Control by
or Start even Average Value of
if the Setting Indoor Thermistor
temperature for Suction Air
on LCD is and Thermistor of
Changed *3) Remote Control
Switch

Check Setting Condition

of "i1" and "i2" by In case that room
Input/Output Setting thermostat is not
Incorrect * Setting and Control used, set for input
Input/Output Setting "01": Room Thermostat signal actually used.
(Cooling) If no signal is used,
"02": Room Thermostat set at "00".
(Heating)

*1): Refer to Item 1.3.1 to 1.3.4.

*2): Refer to Item 1.2.3.
*3): Even if controllers are normal, the compressor does not operate under the following conditions.
* Indoor Air Temp. is lower than -21°C or Outdoor Air Temp. is lower than -5°C during cooling operation.
* Indoor Air Temp. is higher than 30°C or Outdoor Air Temp. is higher than 23°C during heating operation.
* When a cooling (or heating) operation signal is given to the outdoor unit and a different mode as heating
(or cooling) operation signal is given to indoor units.
* When an emergency stop signal is given to outdoor unit.

1-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(1.1.7 Abnormalities of Devices)

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Failure of
Failure of Thermistor Replace or correctly
Discharge Check thermistor by
connect wiring when
Air Temp. Disconnected self-checking *2).
it is abnormal.
Thermistor Wire of
Thermistor

Indoor Fan Failure of Remote

Replace if failed.
Speed is Control Switch
Not Changed Check it by
self-checking *1).
Failure of PCB for Replace if PCB
Indoor Unit is failed.

Check the indoor unit

Failure of AC Chopper stoppage when the Replace if AC
for Indoor Unit remote control switch Chopper is failed.
is switched OFF.

Failure of Failure of
Thermistor Thermistor Replace of correctly
for Outdoor
connect when it is
Evaporating Disconnected abnormal.
Temp. during Wire of
Heating Thermistor

Disconnected
Measure resistance
4-Way Valve
of coil.
Failure of Coil
Replace 4-Way valve.
4-Way Valve Incorrect
Activation of Enforced power supply.
No Defrosting 4-Way Valve
Operation Mode
is Available
Disconnected Control Wires
during Heating Correctly connect
between Indoor Unit and Check connectors.
Operation or wiring.
Outdoor Unit and CH Unit
Defrosting
Operation is
Continued Disconnected Correctly connect
Check connectors.
Failure of Wires to PCB wiring.
Outdoor Unit
PCB Failure of Check it by Replace it when check
PCB self-checking *1). mode is not available.

Disconnected Correctly connect

Check connectors.
Failure of Wires to PCB wiring.
Indoor Unit
PCB Failure of
PCB

Check PCB by
Light and Replace if PCB is failed.
self-checking *1).
LCD Indication
Failure of PCB in Indoor Unit
on Remote
or Remote Control Switch
Control Switch
are Kept ON

*1): Refer to Item 1.3.1 to 1.3.4.

*2): Refer to Item 1.3.1.

1-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(1.1.7 Abnormalities of Devices)

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Indoor Heat Load is Greater

Calculate heat load. Use a bigger unit.
than Cooling Capacity

Gas Leakage Correctly charge

or Shortage Measure superheat. refrigerant after
of Refrigerant repairing gas leakage.
Excessively
Small
Measure and check
Diameter Use correct pipes.
field-supplied pipes.
Tube or
Long Piping
Incorrect
Activation of Check whether or not
Replace check valve
Check Valve temp. difference exists
for outdoor unit.
of Outdoor before/after check valve.
Unit

Check for clogging. Remove clogging.

Check for connection

Replace connector.
cord and connector.
Failure or
Malfunction Is there operation
Replace coil.
of Expansion sound from coil?
Valve
Is thermistor on
Replace thermistor.
compressor normal?
Insufficient
Cooling Is thermistor
Operation Excessively installed correctly on Correctly install it.
Low Suction compressor?
Pressure
Clogged
Capillary Is there dewing after Replace capillary tube
Tube in capillary tube? in CH Unit.
CH Unit

Clogged
Strainer in
Indoor Unit Check temp. difference
Replace strainer in
or CH Unit at inlet and outlet of
indoor unit.
Clogging at strainer.
Low Pressure
Piping
Clogging at
Low Pressure Check temp. difference. Remove clogging.
Piping

Insufficient Check for clogged

Clean air filter.
Air Flow to air filter.
Indoor Unit
Heat Check for obstacle at
Exchanger Remove obstacles.
inlet or outlet.

Excessively Insufficient revolution

Low Air Replace fan motor.
of indoor unit fan motor?
Temp. to
Indoor Unit
Heat Check Short-circuited Remove cause of
Exchanger indoor unit air. short-circuited air.

1-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(1.1.7 Abnormalities of Devices)

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Check Clogging of
Outdoor Unit Remove clogging.
Heat Exchanger.
Obstacles at inlet or
Insufficient outlet of outdoor unit Remove obstacles.
Air Flow to heat exchanger?
Outdoor Unit
Heat Is service space for
Exchanger Secure service space.
outdoor unit sufficient?

Correct Fan Speed? Replace fan motor.

Excessively Short-Circuited Air Remove cause of

High Air to Outdoor Unit? short-circuited air.
Temp. to
Outdoor Unit
Heat Any Other Heat Load
Remove heat source.
Exchanger near Outdoor Unit?

Excessively
Check expansion valve Correctly charge
Excessively Charged
opening. refrigerant.
High Refrigerant
Discharge Non-
Pressure Check each temp. Charge refrigerant
Condensed
and pressure. after vacuum pumping.
Gas in Cycle
Clogging of
Discharge Check for clogging. Remove clogging.
Piping
Insufficient
Cooling Check for clogging. Remove clogging.
Operation

Check for connecting

Replace connector.
cord and connector.
Failure or
Malfunction Is there operation
Replace coil.
of Expansion sound from coil?
Valve
Is thermistor on
Replace thermistor.
compressor normal?

Is thermistor installed
correctly on Correctly install it.
compressor?

Check temp. difference

Malfunction or Internal
at inlet and outlet of Replace 4-way valve.
Leakage of 4-Way Valve
4-way valve.

Failure of
Bypass Check for leakage of
Replace solenoid valve.
Solenoid solenoid valve.
Excessively Valve
Low Suction
Pressure Malfunction
Check temp. difference
or Internal
between inlet and Replace 4-way valve.
Leakage of
outlet of 4-way valve.
4-Way Valve

Check for expansion Replace failed

Discharge Temp. of
valve of indoor unit in expansion valve of
Indoor Unit is Unstable.
the same system. indoor unit.

1-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(1.1.7 Abnormalities of Devices)

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Indoor Heat Load is Greater Calculate heat load. Replace the unit with
than Heating Capacity a bigger unit.

Gas Leakage Correctly charge

or Insufficient refrigerant after gas
Measure superheat.
Refrigerant leakage check and
Charge repairing.
Excessively
Small Measure field-supplied Use specified pipes.
Diameter or piping.
Long Piping

Check for clogging. Remove clogging.

Check for connecting

Replace connector.
cord and connector.
Failure or
Malfunction Is there operation
Replace coil.
of Expansion sound from coil?
Valve
Is thermistor on
Replace thermistor.
compressor normal?

Is thermistor
installed correctly Correctly install it.
on compressor?
Insufficient Clogging of
Heating Indoor Unit/ Check temp. difference Replace strainer for
Operation Excessively CH Unit/ between inlet and outlet outdoor unit, indoor
Low Outdoor Unit of strainer. unit or CH unit.
Suction Strainer
Pressure
Clogging
Check temp. difference
of Suction Remove clogging.
of each part.
Piping

Is outdoor unit heat

Remove clogging.
exchanger clogged?

Insufficient Is there any obstacles

Air Flow at inlet or outlet of Remove obstacles.
through outdoor unit?
Outdoor Unit
Heat Is service space for Secure sufficient
Exchanger outdoor unit sufficient? service space.

Check for speed of Replace fan motor.

outdoor unit fan.

Excessively
Low
Air Temp. Check for any Remove cause of
through short-circuited air short-circuited air.
Outdoor Unit to outdoor unit.
Heat
Exchanger
Defrosting is
Check thermistor for Replace thermistor
Insufficiently
defrosting. for defrosting.
Completed

1-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(1.1.7 Abnormalities of Devices)

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Check for filter clogging. Remove clogging.

Insufficient
Air Flow to Check for any obstacles
Indoor Unit at inlet or outlet of Remove obstacles.
Heat indoor unit.
Exchanger
Check indoor fan speed. Replace fan motor.

Excessively
High Air
Excessively Temp. to Check whether or not Remove cause of
High Indoor Unit short-circuited air exists. short-circuited air.
Discharge Heat
Pressure Exchanger
Excessively
Check expansion valve Correctly charge
Charged
opening. refrigerant.
Refrigerant
Non-
Condensate Check refrigerant Recharge refrigerant
Gas in Ref. quantity. *1) after vacuum pumping.
Insufficient Cycle
Heating
Operation Clogging of
Discharge Check for clogging. Remove clogging.
Pr. Piping

Check temp. difference

Malfunction or Internal
between inlet and outlet Replace 4-way valve.
Leakage of 4-Way Valve
of 4-way valve.

Check temp. difference

Malfunction of Check Valve
between inlet and outlet Replace check valve.
of Outdoor Unit
of check valve.

Failure of
Bypass Check for leakage of
Replace solenoid valve.
Solenoid solenoid valve.
Excessively Valve
High Suction
Pressure Malfunction
Check temp. difference
or Internal
between inlet and outlet Replace 4-way valve.
Leakage of
of 4-way valve.
4-Way Valve

Check for expansion Replace failed

Discharge Temp. of
valve of indoor unit in expansion valve of
Indoor Unit is Unstable.
the same system. indoor unit.

*1): Refer to TCII, SP2-K03 and SP2-L01.

1-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(1.1.7 Abnormalities of Devices)

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Foreign Particles Inside Remove foreign

Check it by viewing.
of Fan Casing particles.

Indoor Unit Fan Runner Adjust position of

Check it by viewing.
is Hitting Casing fan runner.

Outdoor Unit Propeller Fan Adjust position of

Check it by viewing.
is Hitting Shroud propeller fan.

Faulty Check each part is

Tightly fix it.
Installation tightly fixed.
Cooling or
Heating
Operation Liquid Ref. Check expansion valve
Ensure superheat.
with Compression opening.
Abnormal Abnormal
Sound Sound from Wear or
Compressor Breakage of Abnormal Sound from
Replace compressor.
Internal Inside of Compressor
Comp. Parts

No Heating Check resistance. Replace oil heater

by Oil Heater (Oil Heater, Fuse) or fuse.

Hamming Sound from Check surface of Replace magnetic

Magnetic Conductor contacts. switch.

Abnormal Vibration of Check each fixing

Tightly fix it.
Cabinets screws.

Obstacle at Outdoor Fan Check obstacles. Remove obstacles.

Outdoor Fan
is Not Operated
When
Compressor In case that
Wait for switching of
is Operated Watching Condition for 4-Way Valve is not
4-Way Valve.
Heating Operation switched, check for
(1 to 3 minutes)
insufficient refrigerant.

Discharge Pressure Does

Not Increase Higher than Check operation
Add refrigerant. *1)
1.5MPa due to insufficient pressure.
Indoor Fan refrigerant.
is Not Operated
When Disconnected Wiring for Connect wiring
Check wiring.
Compressor Indoor Fan correctly.
is Operated

Failure of AC Chopper Check AC chopper. Replace AC chopper.

*1): Refer to TCII, SP2-K03 and SP2-L01.

1-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

 Alarm Code Indication of Remote Control Switch
Indoor Unit Alarm Code Model Code Connected No. Alarm Code
Number of Indoor Units

COOL MED COOL MED

ADDS. RN
Indicated
A/C ALARM A/C ALARM
for a second
alternately

1.2.1 Alarm Code Table

Code No. Category Content of Abnormality Leading Cause
01 Indoor Unit Tripping of Protection Device Failure of Fan Motor, Drain Discharge, PCB, Relay
02 Outdoor Unit Tripping of Protection Device Activation of PSH
03 Transmission Abnormality between Indoor (or outdoor) and Incorrect Wiring. Failure of PCB.
Outdoor (or Indoor) Tripping of Fuse. Power Supply OFF.
04 Inverter Abnormality between Inverter and Control PCB Failure in Transmission between PCBs
05 Transmission Abnormality of Power Source Wiring Reverse Phase Incorrect Wiring
Voltage Drop by Excessively Low or High Voltage Drop of Power Supply, Incorrect Wiring or
06 Voltage Drop
Voltage to Outdoor Unit Insufficient Capacity of Power Supply Wiring

07 Decrease in Discharge Gas Superheat Excessive Refrigerant Charge, Expansion Valve

Open Lock
Cycle
08 Increase in Discharge Gas Temperature Insufficient Refrigerant. Ref. Leakage, Clogging or
Expansion Valve Close Lock
09 Outdoor Unit Tripping of Protection Device Failure of Fan Motor
11 Inlet Air Thermistor
12 Outlet Air Thermistor
Sensor on Failure of Thermistor, Sensor, Connection
13 Freeze Protection Thermistor
Indoor Unit
14 Gas Piping Thermistor
19 Tripping of Protection Device for Fan Motor Failure of Fan Motor
21 High Pressure Sensor
22 Outdoor Air Thermistor
Sensor on
23 Discharge Gas Thermistor on Comp. Failure of Thermistor, Sensor, Connection
Outdoor Unit
24 Evaporating Thermistor
29 Low Pressure Sensor
30 * Incorrect Wiring Connection Incorrect Wiring Connection between Outdoor Unit,
CH Unit and Indoor Unit
31 Incorrect Setting of Outdoor and Indoor Unit Incorrect Setting of Capacity Code.
Failure of Power Supply, PCB in Other Indoor Unit.
32 Abnormal Transmission of Other Indoor Unit Failure of Other Indoor Unit of the Same
Refrigerant Cycle.
System
35 Incorrect Setting in Indoor/Outdoor Unit No. Existence of the same Indoor Unit No. in the same
refrigerant cycle.
38 Abnormality of Protective Circuit in Failure of Indoor Unit PCB. Incorrect Wiring
Outdoor Unit Connection to PCB in Outdoor Unit
Abnormality of Running Current at Overcurrent, Melted Fuse of Failure of Current
39
Constant Compressor Sensor
43 Pressure Ratio Decrease Protection Activating Failure of Compressor, Inverter

44 Low Pressure Increase Protection Activating Overload to Indoor in Cooling, High Temperature of
Outdoor Air in Heating Expansion Valve Open Lock
45 Pressure High Pressure Increase Protection Activating Overload Operation. Excessive Refrigerant
Clogging of Heat Exchanger
46 High Pressure Decrease Protection Activating Insufficient Refrigerant
47 Low Pressure Decrease Protection Activating Insufficient Refrigerant. Expansion Valve Close
Lock. Refrigerant Leakage.
51 Abnormality of Current Sensor for Inverter Failure of Sensor on Inverter PCB
52 Overcurrent Protection Activating Overload, Overcurrent, Locked to Compressor
53 Inverter IPM Protection Activating Automatic Stoppage of IPM (Overcurrent, Low
Voltage or Overheating)

54 ** Increase in Inverter Fin Temperature Abnormal Inverter Fin Thermistor,

Abnormal Outdoor Fan
56 ** Abnormality of Detection for Fan Motor Position Abnormal Detection Circuit of Transmission
57 ** Outdoor Fan Fan Controller Protection Activating Abnormal Fan Speed
58 ** Abnormality of Fan Controller Overcurrent, Abnormal Fan Controller Fin
59 AC Chopper AC Chopper Circuit Protection Failure of FET, Power Supply, CT for Fan Motor
3 Time Occurrence of Alarm Giving Damage to
EE Compressor Compressor Protection
Compressor within 6 hours
dd *** Transmission Incorrect Wiring between Indoor Units Incorrect Wiring between Indoor Units and Remote
Control Switch
* : For only FXG and FX3 series. Other code Nos. are common with FSG and FS3 series.
** : For only 24, 30FSG1/FSG5 (220V 60Hz), *** : In case of PC-2H2

1-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.2.2 Troubleshooting by Alarm Code

Alarm
Code Activation of Safety Device in Indoor Unit

 “RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.
 The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the contact between #1 and #2 of CN14 is not closed over 120
seconds during the cooling, fan or heating operation.

* RCI-FSG2, RCD-FSG1, RPI-FSG1 Series:

Is DC12V applied between #2 and GND No Activation of Safety Device
of CN14? (such as Float Switch FS) or
* RPF-FSG(E), RPFI-FSG(E), RPC-FSG1 Series: Incorrect Wiring
Is DC24V applied both ends of R24?

Yes

Faulty PCB

RCI, RCD, RPI, Types Other Types

THM1 THM2 THM3 THM4 THM5 THM6

THM1 THM2 THM3 THM4 THM5 CN19 CN25

LED1 LED2

CN1 CN3 CN4 HA CN14 CN12

CN9

CN10 LED4
CN13 CN14

R24

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

High Drain Clogging of Remove clogged

Check drain pan.
Level Drainage foreign particles.

Check continuity when Replace float switch

Fault
drain level is low. if faulty.
Activation of
Float Switch
Faulty Faulty Measure resistance Repair looseness and
Float Switch Contacting by tester. replace connector.

Faulty
Check connections. Repair connection.
Connection

Check PCB by
Faulty Indoor Unit PCB Replace it if faulty.
self-checking *1).

*1): Refer to TCII, SP2-K03 and SP2-L01.

1-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Activation of Safety Device in Outdoor Unit

 “RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.
 The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm is indicated when one of safety devices is activated during compressor running.

No Is Y52C1 of No
Does CMC1 ON 7-segments ON?
Faulty PCB1
when starting? (when in check
mode "SC")
Yes No
Yes

 Is the voltage
between PCN3 #1 No (No Voltage)
and faston terminal Faulty PCB1
"N" 220V or 240V
during Y52C1 ON?
No (No Looseness)
Yes Check Wiring Connection
Except for PCB1

Is the protective Is PCN3 or PCN2

device still operating? Restart after connecting
loosened?
(No continuity between PCN3 or PCN2 correctly.
No (5 to 20HP) Yes
#1 and #3 of PCN2 (5 to 20HP)
Is PCN3, PCN2,
<5 to 20HP>, Restart after connecting
PCN16, PCN17
No continuity between PCN3, PCN2, PCN16,
or PCN18
#1 and #3 of PCN2, PCN17 or PCN18
loosened?
PCN6, PCN7 and correctly. (24 and 30HP)
(24 and 30HP)
PCN8 <24 and 30HP>
Yes

Does CMC1 turn No Voltage

ON for more than Faulty PCB1
3 seconds?
Yes

Normal PCB1

Check activation of the following safety devices. Remove the cause after checking.
(1) High Pressure Switch
(PSH: 3.0MPa (30 kgf/cm2G) for FS3, FS5 and FX3 Series
3.3MPa (33 kgf/cm2G) for FSG, FSG1 and FXG Series)

 Check Item
Connector Faston
Power Supply
for CMC1 Terminal
380-415V/50Hz
PCN3 N
380V/60Hz
220V/60Hz PCN3 S1

1-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Clogging of Heat
Remove clogging.
Exchanger?

Check for dust on

Remove dust.
air filter.
Insufficient Air Flow to
Heat Exchanger
Check for any obstacles
(Outdoor Heat Exchanger
at inlet or outlet of Remove obstacles.
during Cooling Operation
heat exchanger.
or Indoor Heat Exchanger
during Heating Operation)
Check the service
Secure service space.
space.

Check for speed.

Replace fan motor
Outdoor Fan: Cooling
if faulty.
Indoor Fan: Heating

Disconnected of Repair looseness or

Connector reconnect connector.
Expansion Valve Trouble
Fully opened and locked. Replace expansion
Activation of (see 1-117 page) valve.
High Pressure
Switch due to
Excessively
High Discharge Reduce heat load or
Calculate heat load.
Pressure use a bigger unit.

Check for hot air near

Make good circulation.
Excessively High Temp. the ceiling (Heating).
Air to Indoor Unit
Heat Exchanger Check for short Remove
circuited air (Heating). short-circuited air.

Check for other

Remove heat source.
heat source.

Measure discharge
Faulty
pressure.
Pressure Replace it if faulty.
Check continuity after
Switch
decreasing of pressure.
Faulty High
Pressure Insufficient Measure resistance Repair looseness.
Switch Contacting by tester. Replace connector.

Incorrect
Check connections. Repair connections.
Connection

1-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Check for clogging. Remove clogging.

Check connecting
Replace connector.
wiring and connectors.

Faulty or Malfunction of Check operating sound

Replace coil.
Expansion Valve from coil.

Check discharge gas

Replace thermistor.
thermistor.

Check attaching
state of discharge Reattach thermistor.
gas thermistor.
Activation of
High Pressure Faulty Gas Bypass Replace gas bypass
Check for clogging.
Switch due to Solenoid Valve solenoid valve.
Excessively
High Discharge
Pressure Check cycle operating
Charge refrigerant
Overcharged Refrigerant temp. and expansion
correctly.
valve opening.

Mixture of Non-Condensable Check ambient temp. Recharge refrigerant

Gas in Refrigerant Cycle and pressure. after vacuum pumping.

Clogging of Discharge Piping Check for clogging. Remove clogging.

Liquid Line Stop Valve or

Gas Line Stop Valve are Check stop valves. Fully open stop valve.
not in Operation

Clogging of Check Valve Check for clogging. Replace check valve.

1-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING
FS SYSTEM

Alarm
Code Abnormal Transmitting between Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit

 “RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.
 The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
or the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
 This alarm is indicated when abnormality is maintained for 3 minutes after normal transmitting
between indoor units and outdoor unit, and also abnormality is maintained for 30 seconds after the
micro-computer is automatically reset.
The alarm is indicated when the abnormal transmitting is maintained for 30 seconds from starting of
the outdoor unit.

 Investigate the cause of overcurrent and take necessary action when fuses are melted or the
breaker for the outdoor unit are activated.
 Regarding RCI-FSG2, RCD-FSG1, RPI-FSG1 and RPK-FSGM* Series, non-pole checking is not
required.

1-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Is DSW10-1P No
(Terminal Resistance) Set it correctly.
on PCB1 ON?
Yes
 Is the voltage
No between faston No
Is LED1 (red) on Check the fuses of
terminal "R1" and outdoor unit power
PCB1 ON?
"N" of PCB1 220V supply.
Yes or 240V?
Yes
Remove CN2 of
PCB1. *1) Is connector (PCN1, Yes
Plug PCN1 and CN1
CN1) for transformer
correctly.
is loosened?
No Outdoor
Yes Unit
Is LED3 (yellow) Yes
on PCB1 ON? Is the fuse for
Replace fuse.
PCB1 melted?
No No

Faulty PCB1
Is LED3 (yellow) No
on PCB1 flickering
more than once in
10 seconds? PCB1: Outdoor Unit Printed Circuit Board
Yes PCB1': Indoor Unit Printed Circuit Board

Connect CN2 of
PCB1.

Is PCB1' setting No
Non-pole operating. Set it correctly.
*2)
Yes
Yes Is LED3 (yellow) Yes
Is LED3 on
ON even if CN2 of Faulty PCB1'.
PCB1' ON?
PCB1' is removed?
No
No
Check other indoor units.

No Check wiring between

Is LED3 (yellow) on
outdoor unit and indoor
PCB1' flickering more than
units or fuse (EF1) for Indoor
once in 10 seconds.
PCB1'. Unit
Yes

Does refrigerant system No

setting between DSW1
Set it correctly.
on PCB1' and DSW5 on
PCB1' correspond?
Yes
No
Does Alarm occur with
Faulty PCB1'.
all indoor units?
Yes

Faulty PCB1.
*1): In case that terminal resistance (DSW10-1P) is OFF when H-Link Connection is performed.
Set the terminal resistance to ON when CN2 is removed.
Set the terminal resistance to OFF when CN2 is reconnected.
*2): PCB1' Factory Setting for Non-Pole Transmitting
 Check Item
Item Setting Position Power Supply Faston Terminal
SW2 Left Side (New Transmission Side) 380-415V/50Hz
between R1 and N
JP1 Short Circuited 380V/60Hz
CN2 Transmission Wire Connecting 220V/60Hz between R1 and S1
CN18 Non-Occupied

1-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Power Failure of No Power Supply Measure voltage by

Supply power.
tester.

Check for breakage Remove short circuit

Short Circuit between Wires
of insulation. and replace fuse.

Short Circuited Wire Measure insulation Remove short circuit to

to Ground resistance. ground and replace fuse.
Melted Fuse for
Power Source Measure resistance
Replace comp. and
or Activation of Faulty Comp. Motor between wires and
fuse.
Outdoor Unit insulation resistance.
Breaker
Measure resistance
Faulty Outdoor Unit Replace outdoor unit
between wires and
Fan Motor fan motor and fuse.
insulation resistance.

Failure of AC Chopper Replace the AC chopper

for Outdoor Fan for outdoor fan and fuse.

Check for breakage Remove short circuit

Short Circuit between Wires
of insulation. and replace fuse.

Short Circuit of Control Measure insulation Remove short circuit

Circuit (to Ground) resistance. and replace fuse.
Melted Fuse for
Control Circuit Faulty Solenoid Coil for
Measure resistance Replace magnetic
or Activation of Magnetic Switch for Comp.
of coil. switch and fuse.
Outdoor Unit Motor
Breaker
Measure resistance Replace the AC
Failure of Outdoor Unit
between wires and chopper for outdoor fan,
Fan Motor
insulation resistance. fan motor and fuse.

Failure of AC Chopper Replace the AC chopper

for Outdoor Fan for outdoor fan and fuse.

Between Outdoor Unit

Disconnected and Indoor Unit Check continuity of
Replacing wires,
Wires Insufficient wires.
repairing, tightening
Contacting or Check for looseness
screws and correct
Incorrect of connection screws.
Power Source Wiring wiring.
Connection Check terminal Nos.
for Outdoor Unit

Disconnected Wires to PCB Check connections. Correctly connect wires.

Faulty PCB
(Outdoor Unit,
Indoor Unit)
Faulty PCB Replace it if faulty.

Check continuity Replacing Wires,

Disconnected Wire
and looseness of Repairing and
Insufficient Contacting
Incorrect Wiring connection screws. Tightening Screws
(SW1 Setting and
CN2 Connection)
Incorrect Wiring Check terminal Nos. Correctly connect wires.

1-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING
FX SYSTEM

Alarm
Code Abnormal Transmitting between Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit

 “RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.
 The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
or the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm is indicated when abnormality is maintained for 3 minutes after normal transmitting
between indoor units, CH units and outdoor unit, and also abnormality is maintained for 30 seconds
after the micro-computer is automatically reset.
The alarm is indicated when the abnormal transmitting is maintained for 30 seconds from starting of
the outdoor unit.
 Investigate the cause of overcurrent and take necessary action when fuses are melted or the
breaker for the outdoor unit are activated.
 Regarding RCI-FSG2, RCD-FSG1, RPI-FSG1 and RPK-FSGM Series, non-pole checking is not
required.

1-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Is DSW10-1P No
(Terminal Resistance) Set it correctly.
on PCB1 ON? *1)
Yes
 Is the voltage
No between faston No
Is LED1 (red) on Check the fuses of
terminal "R1" and outdoor unit power
PCB1 ON?
"N" of PCB1 220V supply.
Yes or 240V?
Yes
Remove CN2 of
PCB1. *2) Is connector (PCN1, Yes
Plug PCN1 and CN1
CN1) for transformer
correctly.
is loosened?
No Outdoor
Yes Unit
Is LED3 (yellow) Yes
on PCB1 ON? Is the fuse for
Replace fuse.
PCB1 melted?
No No

Faulty PCB1
Is LED3 (yellow) No
on PCB1 flickering
more than once in
10 seconds? PCB1: Outdoor Unit Printed Circuit Board
Yes PCB1': Indoor Unit Printed Circuit Board

Connect CN2 of
PCB1.

Is DSW5-1P (End No
Terminal Resistance) Set it correctly.
of PCB(1) ON?
Yes
No Is voltage between No
Is LED1 (red) on "R1" and "N" of PCN1
Check CH unit wiring.
PCB(1) ON? on PCB(1) 220V
or 240V
Yes
Yes

Is connector (TR, Yes

Plug TR and CN7
CN7) for transformer on
correctly.
PCB(1) is loosened?
No
Yes
Is the fuse for CH
Replace fuse.
PCB(1) melted? Unit
No

Yes Is LED3 (green) Yes Faulty PCB(1)

Is LED3 (green) on
still ON after removing
PCB(1) ON?
CN9 on PCB(1)?
No
No
Check other CH units.

Is LED3 (yellow) No Check wiring between

on PCB(1) flickering outdoor unit and indoor
more than once in units or fuse (EF3) for
10 seconds? PCB(1).
Yes

Remove CN8 of PCB(1).

To Next Page

1-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Yes
Is LED2 (yellow)
on PCB(1) ON?
No
Faulty PCB(1)
Is LED2 (yellow) No No
on PCB(1) flickering Are other units in CH
more than once in same condition? Unit
10 seconds?
Yes
Yes Faulty PCB1

Connect CN8 of
PCB(1).

Is PCB1' setting No
Non-pole operating. Set it correctly.
*3)
Yes
Yes Is LED3 (yellow) Yes
Is LED3 on
ON even if CN2 of Faulty PCB1'.
PCB1' ON?
PCB1' is removed?
No
No
Check other indoor units.

No Check wiring between

Is LED3 (yellow) on
outdoor unit and indoor
PCB1' flickering more than Indoor
units or fuse (EF1) for
once in 10 seconds? Unit
PCB1'.
Yes

Does refrigeration system No

setting between DSW1
Set correctly.
on PCB1' and DSW5
on PCB1' correspond?
Yes
No
Does Alarm occur with
Faulty PCB1'.
all indoor units?
Yes

Faulty PCB(1)

*1): PCB1 Factory Setting for Non-Pole Transmitting

Item Setting Position

SW1 Right Side (New Transmission Side)
DSW9-2P ON
DSW10-1P ON
CN101 Transmission Wire Connecting
CN19 Non-Occupied

*2): In case that terminal resistance (DSW10-1P) is OFF when H-Link Connection is performed.
Set the terminal resistance to ON when CN2 is removed.
Set the terminal resistance to OFF when CN2 is reconnected.
*3): PCB1' Factory Setting for Non-Pole Transmitting
 Check Item
Item Setting Position Power Supply Faston Terminal
SW2 Left Side (New Transmission Side) 380-415V/50Hz
between R1 and N
JP1 Short Circuited 380V/60Hz
CN2 Transmission Wire Connecting 220V/60Hz between R1 and S1
CN18 Non-Occupied

1-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Measure voltage
Power Failure or No Power Supply Supply power.
by tester.

Short Circuit between Check for breakage Remove short circuit

Wires of insulation. and replace fuse.

Short Circuited Wire Measure insulation Remove short circuit to

to Ground resistance. ground and replace fuse.
Melted Fuse for
Power Source Measure resistance
or Activation of Faulty Comp. Motor between wires and Replace comp. and fuse.
Breaker insulation resistance.
(Outdoor Unit
and CH Unit) Measure resistance
Fault Outdoor Unit Replace outdoor unit
between wires and
Fan Motor fan motor and fuse.
insulation resistance.

Failure of AC Chopper Replace the AC chopper

for Outdoor Fan for outdoor fan and fuse.

Short Circuit between Check for breakage Remove short circuit

Wires of insulation. and replace fuse.

Short Circuit of Control Measure insulation Remove short circuit

Circuit (to Ground) resistance. and replace fuse.
Melted Fuse for Faulty Solenoid Coil
Control Circuit Measure resistance Replace magnetic switch
for Magnetic Switch
or Activation of coil. and fuse.
for Comp. Motor
of Breaker
(Outdoor Unit Measure resistance Replace the AC chopper
Failure of Outdoor Unit
and CH Unit) between wires and for outdoor fan, fan
Fan Motor
insulation resistance. motor ad fuse.

Failure of AC Chopper Replace the AC chopper

for Outdoor Fan for outdoor fan and fuse.

Measure input voltage

Faulty Transformer (CH Unit) Replace transformer.
at CN1 on PCB(2) *1)

Measure output
Incorrect Power Supply Circuit of PCB1 Replace PCB1.
voltage of PCB1 *2)

Disconnected Between Outdoor Unit Check continuity of

and Indoor Unit Replacing wires,
Wires Insufficient wires.
repairing, tightening
Contacting or Check for looseness
screws and correct
Incorrect Power Source Wiring of connection screws.
wiring.
Connection for Outdoor Unit Check terminal Nos.

Disconnected Wires
Check connections. Correctly connect wires.
Faulty PCB to PCB
(Outdoor Unit,
Indoor Unit)
Faulty PCB Replace it if faulty.

Check continuity and Replacing Wires,

Disconnected Wire
looseness of connection Repairing and
Insufficient Contacting
screws. Tightening Screws
Incorrect Wiring
Correctly Connect
Incorrect Wiring Check terminal Nos.
Wires

Check for unit number Set unit number

Incorrect Setting of Indoor Unit Number setting of RSW on correctly by dip switches
Indoor PCB on Indoor PCB.
*1): Input Voltage at CN1 on PCB(2).
(22.2VAC between #1 and #2, 14.5VAC between #3 and #4)
*2): 12VDC between VCC12 and GND2, 5VDC between VCC05 and GND1,
12VDC between VCC12 and GND1, 15VDC between VCC15 and GND1,
24VDC between VCC24 and GND1, 12VDC between VCC12T and GND1,

1-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Abnormal Transmitting between Inverter and Outdoor PCB1, 3

 “RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.
 The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section, and the unit
No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB1.

 This alarm is indicated when abnormality is maintained for 30 seconds after normal transmitting between the
outdoor unit PCB1 and inverter PCB3, and also abnormality is maintained for 30 seconds after the micro-
computer is automatically reset. The alarm is indicated when the abnormal transmitting is maintained for 30
seconds from starting of the outdoor unit. (In case of 5 to 20HP)
 This alarm is indicated when abnormality is maintained for 30 seconds after normal transmitting between the
outdoor unit PCB1 and ISPM, and also abnormality is maintained for 30 seconds after the micro-computer is
automatically reset. The alarm is indicated when the abnormal transmitting is maintained for 30 seconds from
starting of the outdoor unit. (In case of 24 and 30HP)
No
Is LED2 (green) on Disconnect CN14
PCB1 flickering? of PCB1.

Yes

Check PCB3 Yes Yes

(5 to 20HP) Check PCB3 and
Is LED4 (yellow) on Is LED2 (green) on check the wiring
Check ISPM PCB3 flickering? PCB1 flickering?
(24 and 30HP) between PCB1
and PCB3.
No No (5 to 20HP)
Check ISPM and
Check PCB3 check the wiring
No between PCB1
(5 to 20HP) Is LED4 (yellow) on
Check ISPM PCB3 OFF? and ISPM.
(24 and 30HP) (24 and 30HP)
Yes

Check the wiring between

Faulty PCB1.
PCB1 and PCB3.
(5 to 20HP)
Check the wiring between
PCB1 and ISPM.
(24 and 30HP)

PCB1: Control PCB in Outdoor Unit

PCB3: Inverter PCB (High Voltage) (5 to 20HP)
ISPM: Inverter System Power Module (24 and 30HP)

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Disconnected Between Control PCB Check continuity of

and Inverter PCB Replacing wires,
Wires, Insufficient wires.
repairing, tightening
Contacting or Check for looseness
screws and incorrect
Incorrect Power Source Wiring of connection screws.
wiring.
Connection for Outdoor Unit Check connection No.

Faulty PCB (PCB1

for Control, PCB3 Disconnected Wires Check connections. Repair wiring
for Inverter) to PCB connections.
(5 to 20HP)
Faulty PCB (PCB
for Control, ISPM
for Inverter) Faulty PCB Replace PCB if faulty.
(24 and 30HP)
Check continuity. Replacing Wires,
Disconnected Wires
Check for looseness Repairing and
Insufficient Contacting
of connection screws. Tightening Screws
Incorrect Wiring
Incorrect Wiring Correctly Connect
Check connection Nos.
Wires

1-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Abnormality of Picking up Phase Signal

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the main power source phase is reversely connected or one
phase is not connected.

Yes
Single Phase Correctly connect each phase
(Is there any phase not connected?) of power source.
PCB1 is normal
No
Yes
Correctly connect each phase
Reverse Phase Connection?
of power source.
PCB1 is normal
No
Yes
Is there any excessively voltage
Abnormality with Power Source.
decrease at power source?
PCB1 is normal
No

Faulty PCB1 or other cause.

Refer to next page.

NOTE:
PCB1: Outdoor Unit Printed Circuit Board
Voltage for unit to
be suspended. Running Voltage:
"B" V
Power Supply "A" "B"
380-415V, 50Hz 342 to 456
323
Starting Voltage: 380V, 60Hz 342 to 418
Less than "A" V 220V, 60Hz 187 198 to 242

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item (Turn OFF Main Switch)

Check it according to Replacing Wires, Repair,

Activation of Reverse or Single Phase electrical wiring in Page Tightening Screws or
Reverse Phase 1-6, 1-7 and 1-9. Correct Wiring
Sensor in
Outdoor Unit Replace PCB if
Faulty Outdoor Unit PCB
faulty.

1-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Excessively Low or High Voltage for Inverter (For 5 to 20HP)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when voltage between terminal “P” and “N” of transistor module (IPM) is
insufficient and its occurrence is three times in 30 minutes. In the case that the occurrence is smaller
than 2 times, retry is performed.

Restart operation.

* In case of 380-415V/50Hz, 380V/60Hz:

Is the power supply voltage No
Check wiring and
380V+ _10% or 415V+_10%?
cable capacity.
* In case of 220V/60Hz:
Is the power supply voltage 220V+
_10%?
Yes

* In case of 380-415V/50Hz, 380V/60Hz: No

Is the voltage over 323V during operation?
* In case of 220V/60Hz:
Is the voltage over 170V during operation?

Yes

Does the voltage Yes

fall during operation
by operation of
other apparatus?
Frequency can
No increase higher
than 60Hz.
Does LED2 on PCB3
Yes
ON after compressor's How is Compressor
Faulty PCB3 for inverter.
electromagnetic compressor stops immediately.
Replace it.
switches (CMC) operation? (lower than 30Hz)
turn on?
Compressor stops
No when frequency
increase. (Approx.
Is connection No 30Hz to 60Hz
correctly between
Connect correctly.
PCB3 and transistor
module?
(Loose Wiring,
Yes Change of
* Be careful especially because of high voltage.
 Yes Color)
Is the DC voltage Check capacitors
Replace capacitors.
over 460V? (CB1, 2).
Fault Capacitors have high voltage.
No  Check Item Normal Be careful especially. *1)
Power Supply Voltage (DC) PCB3 is faulty.
380-415V/50Hz Replace it.
460V
380V/60Hz
220V/60Hz 230V
Check the wiring, diode
module (DM) and
capacitors (CB1, 2). *2)

*1): If capacitor has high voltage, perform the high voltage discharge work refer to item 1.3.6.
*2): Checking procedures of diode module is indicated in item 1.3.6.
*3): DC voltage measuring position:
IPM “P” Terminal to “+” Terminal of Tester, “N” Terminal to “-” Terminal of Tester
Measuring Position: DC 1000V

1-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Excessively Low or High Voltage for Inverter (For 24 and 30HP)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the alarm code is indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when voltage between terminal “P” and “N” of inverter module (ISPM) is
insufficient and its occurrence is three times in 30 minutes. In the case that the occurrence is smaller
than 2 times, retry is performed.

Restart operation.

* In case of 380-415V/50Hz, 380V/60Hz:

Is the power supply voltage No
Check wiring and
380V+ _10% or 415V+_10%?
cable capacity.
* In case of 220V/60Hz:
Is the power supply voltage 220V+
_10%?
Yes

* In case of 380-415V/50Hz, 380V/60Hz: No

Is the voltage over 323V during operation?
* In case of 220V/60Hz:
Is the voltage over 170V during operation?

Yes

Does the voltage Yes

fall during operation
by operation of
other apparatus? Frequency can
No increase higher
than 60Hz.
Yes
How is Compressor Faulty ISPM.
Does LED201 on compressor stops immediately.
ISPM ON? Replace it.
operation? (lower than 20Hz)
No Compressor stops
when frequency
increase. (Approx.
Is connection 20Hz to 60Hz)
correctly between No
ISPM and capacitors Connect correctly.
(CB1 and CB2), DCL
or CMC?
(Loose Wiring,
Yes Change of
* Be careful especially because of high voltage.
 Yes Color)
Is the DC voltage Check capacitors
Replace capacitors.
over 460V? (CB1, 2).
Fault Capacitors have high voltage.
No Normal Be careful especially. *1)
 Check Item
Power Supply Voltage (DC) Faulty ISPM.
380-415V/50Hz Replace it.
460V
380V/60Hz
220V/60Hz 230V Check the wiring, ISPM
and CB. *2)
In case the wiring is
CN8
PC208 PC207 correct, replace ISPM.
CN9

CN207 CN206

N TB2

RB

R201
N
R200

+ P ZN20
LED201
*1): If capacitor has high voltage, perform the high voltage
- P1

TB3
ZN202
discharge work refer to item 1.3.6.
P R216
R215

*2): Checking procedures of ISPM is indicated in item 1.3.6.

Direct Current
Measuring Position RB
R
PD
S
P
T
N
U V W

Measuring Range: DC1000V

1-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Decrease of Discharge Gas Superheat

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 In the case that the discharge gas superheat less than 15 deg. at the top of the compressor is
maintained for 30 minutes, retry operation is performed. However, when the alarm occurs again
within 90 minutes, this alarm code is indicated.
Is the thermistor on No
Position of Thermistor
top of compressor Faulty Thermistor
good? *1) THM8(Td1) THM8(Td1) THM9(Td2)

Yes

Is the thermistor No
installed correctly Install it correctly.
on the compressor? for Inverter Drive for Inverter for Constant
Drive Speed Drive
Yes
Heating RAS-5FSG, RAS-5FS3 RAS-8FSG, RAS-8FS3
Is it at cooling or RAS-10FSG, RAS-10FS3
heating mode when the Heating Operation RAS-8FXG, RAS-8FX3
alarm has occurred? RAS-10FXG, RAS-10FX3

Cooling THM8(Td1) THM9(Td2) THM12(Td3) THM13(Td4)

20,24,30HP
only
Cooling Operation

Check the high-pressure Check the discharge

and compressor discharge pressure and compressor for Inverter
gas temperature and discharge gas temperature Drive for Constant Speed Drive
calculate superheat value and calculate superheat RAS-16FSG, RAS-16FS3 RAS-20FSG,
by outdoor unit PCB. value by outdoor unit PCB. RAS-20FS3
RAS-24FSG1,
RAS-24FS5,
RAS-30FSG1,
Is superheat value Superheat: under RAS-30FS5
under 15 degrees oC? 15 degrees oC?
No No
Yes Yes
<FX Series Only>
Remove sudden
Eliminate rapid
changes of load
change of heat No No
Is the opening Is the opening of the like short path of
load in a room or
degree of ex. valve outdoor unit heat outgoing air to the
short path of
of outdoor bypass exchanger's expansion air intake of the
discharged air
below 5%? valve under 12%? outdoor unit, or the
among outdoor
Yes Yes cause of frequent
units.
thermo-ON/OFF.
No Is the connector
Plug the connector
(CN12) for ex. valve Are the connectors
CN12 of PCB1
of outdoor bypass (*2) of PCB1 of the
properly. No
connected properly? outdoor unit heat Plug the connectors
Yes exchanger's electric (*2) of PCB1
expansion valve properly.
No
Match the Are the refrigerant connected properly?
refrigerant piping piping and electric
Yes
and electric wiring. wiring matching?
No
Yes Charge correct
Is refrigerant
refrigerant volume.
correctly charged?
No Is the connector on Refer to TCII.
Plug the indoor unit PCB for Yes
No
connector properly. ex. valve connected
properly? Check the ex.
Is gas leaking?
valve.
Yes

*1): Refer to "Characteristics of Thermistor" of page 1-53. Repair leaks of gas.

Correctly charge
*2): PCB1 Connector No. 5 to 20HP CN10 and CN11 refrigerant.
is shown in the right 24 and 30HP CN10, CN11, CN12
table. and CN20

1-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item (Turn OFF Main Switch)

Ref. Cycle is Different from Check ref. cycle and

Repair wiring.
the Electrical System the electrical system.

Measure pressure.
Correctly charge
Overcharged Refrigerant (Refer to Figure in
refrigerant.
Test Run of TCII.)

Check ex. valve Replace ex. valve

Faulty Ex. Valve
(Refer to 1.3.6). if faulty.

Replace PCB and

Decrease of Fault Replace PCB if faulty.
check operation.
Discharge Gas
Superheat Faulty PCB
Disconnected
Repair wiring
Wires for Ex. Check connections.
connections.
Valve Control

Replace thermistor
Fault Measure resistance.
if faulty.
Faulty
Discharge Incorrect Check mounting state. Correctly mount
Gas Mounting (Refer to page 1-39.) thermistor.
Thermistor
Remove looseness,
Incorrect
Check connections. replace connector or
Connection
repair connections.

1-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Excessively High Discharge Gas Temperature

Code at the Top of Compressor Chamber

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm is indicated when the following conditions occurs three times within one hour;
(1) The temperature of the thermistor on the top of the compressor is maintained higher than 132°C
for 10 minutes, or (2) The temperature of the thermistor on the top of the compressor is maintained
higher than 140°C for 5 seconds.
Position of Thermistor
Is the thermistor on No
THM8 (Td1) THM8 (Td1) THM9 (Td2)
top of compressor Faulty Thermistor
good?
See page 1-53 for the
Yes thermistor resistance.
Is the thermistor No
for Inverter Drive for Inverter for Constant
installed correctly Install it correctly.
Drive Speed Drive
on the compressor?
Yes RAS-5FSG, RAS-5FS3 RAS-8FSG, RAS-8FS3
RAS-10FSG, RAS-10FS3
Heating RAS-8FXG, RAS-8FX3
Is it at cooling or RAS-10FXG, RAS-10FX3
heating mode when the Heating Operation
alarm has occurred? THM8 (Td1) THM9 (Td2) THM12 (Td3) THM13 (Td4)
20, 24, 30HP
Cooling only

Cooling Operation

Check the outdoor unit Check the outdoor unit for Inverter
Drive for Constant Speed Drive
PCB if the compressor PCB to see if the
discharge gas compressor discharge RAS-16FSG, RAS-16FS3 RAS-20FSG,
temperature is over gas temperature is RAS-20FS3
No No RAS-24FSG1,
132oC. over 132oC. RAS-24FS5,
Yes Yes RAS-30FSG1,
RAS-30FS5
<FX Series Only>
Remove sudden
Remove sudden
changes of load
changes of load like No No like short path of
short path of discharge Is the opening degree Is the opening of the
discharge air to the
air to the intake of the of ex. valve of outdoor outdoor unit ex. valve
air intake of the
outdoor unit, or the bypass 100%? 100%?
outdoor unit, or the
cause of frequent
Yes Yes cause of frequent
thermo-ON/OFF.
thermo-ON/OFF.
No Is the connector
Plug the connector Are the connectors
(CN12) for ex. valve (*1) of PCB1 of the
No
CN12 of PCB1 Plug the connectors
of outdoor bypass outdoor unit heat
properly. (*1) of PCB1
connected properly? exchanger's ex. valve properly.
Yes connected properly?
Remove sudden No *1): PCB1 Connector No. is
Is the opening of all Yes shown in the below table.
changes of indoor load the operating indoor
(short path, etc.) or units ex. valve 100%? 5 to 20HP CN10 and CN11
short path of air 24 and 30HP CN10, CN11,
Yes
between outdoor units. CN12 and CN20
No
Charge correct
Is the amount of
refrigerant volume.
refrigerant correct?
Refer to TCII.
Yes
No
Check the ex.
Is gas leaking?
valve.
Yes

Repair leaks of gas.

Recharge refrigerant.

1-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Ref. Cycle is Different from Check ref. cycle and

Repair wiring.
the Electrical System the electrical system.

Correctly charge
Shortage of Refrigerant Check pressures.
refrigerant.

Check ex. valve Replace ex. valve

Faulty Ex. Valve
(Refer to 1.3.6). if faulty.

Replace PCB and

Fault Replace PCB if faulty.
check operation.
Excessively High Faulty PCB
Discharge Gas Disconnected
Temperature Repair wiring
Wires for Ex. Check connections.
(at Top of connections.
Valve
Compressor)

Faulty Gas Bypass Replace solenoid

Ref. Leakage
Solenoid Valve valve if faulty.

Check resistance Replace thermistor

Fault
of thermistor. if faulty.
Faulty
Incorrect
Discharge Correctly mount
Mounting of Check mounting state.
Gas thermistor.
Thermistor
Thermistor
Remove looseness,
Incorrect
Check connections. replace connectors or
Wiring
repair connections.

1-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Activation of Protection Device for Outdoor Fan Motor

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the temperature of the internal thermostat () for the outdoor fan
motor is higher than 130°C.
 Check Item
HP Mark Power Supply
5 to 20HP ITO1, 2 380-415/380V, 220V 50/60Hz
24, 30HP ITO1, 2, 3 380-415V 50Hz, 380V 60Hz
ITO1, 3 220V 60Hz

Is continuity present after

No temperature has dropped to No
Does the outdoor
under 83oC at the internal Replace the motor.
fan run?
thermostat of the outdoor
fan motor?
Yes
Yes

Is connection bad at the Yes

connector PCN14 on PCB1 or Correct connection.
fan motor connectors (CN1, CN2, Replace the connector.
CN50, CN51, CN52)?
No

If the voltage is over

<Common> 264V or under 187V,
Is 220V or 240V applied across No
check the power source
R2 and S2 on PCB2 (AC Chopper)? and check the wiring
Is 220V or 240V applied across around the outdoor unit
R2 and N of TB1? PCB.
Yes

Replace the outdoor fan motor

if faulty. Or check outdoor
temperature. If it is unusual,
take suitable action to reduce it.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Measure coil
Faulty Outdoor Unit
resistance and Replace motor if faulty.
Fan Motor
insulation resistance.

Check continuity after Replace fan motor if no

Activation Fault fan motor temperature continuity of internal
of Internal decreases to room temp. thermostat under 83oC.
Thermostat for
Outdoor Unit Faulty
Fan Motor Insufficient Measure resistance Correct looseness.
Internal
Contacting by tester. Replace connectors.
Thermostat

Incorrect
Check connections. Repair connections.
Connection

1-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Abnormality of Thermistor for Indoor Unit Inlet Air Temperature

Code (Air Inlet Thermistor)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.24 kΩ) or cut (greater
than 840 kΩ) during the cooling or heating operation. The system is automatically restarted when the
fault is removed.

No
Is it connected to
Connect it.
THM1 (intake) of PCB?

Yes

Is resistance of THM1 No
between 0.24kΩ and Faulty Thermistor
840kΩ?
Yes
Indoor Unit
Air Inlet Thermistor
Faulty PCB

In Case of 4-Way Cassette Type

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item (Turn OFF Main Switch)

Replace thermistor
Fault Check resistance.
if faulty.
Faulty Intake
Air Thermistor
Repair wiring and
Incorrect Connection Check connection.
connections.

Replace PCB and

Faulty PCB Replace PCB if faulty.
check operation.

90
82
80

70
61
60
Thermistor 50 46
Resistance
(KΩ) 40 35

30 27
20.5
20 16
12.5
10
10 8 5.3 3.6 2.5

0 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

Ambient Temperature (oC)

Thermistor Characteristics
NOTE:
This data is applicable to the following thermistors;
1. Indoor Unit Discharge Air Temperature, 2. Indoor Unit Liquid Refrigerant Temperature, 3 Indoor Unit
Intake Air Temperature, 4. Outdoor Air Temperature, 5. Outdoor Unit Evaporating Temperature, 6. Indoor
Unit Gas Piping

1-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Abnormality of Thermistor for Indoor Unit Discharge Air Temperature

Code (Air Outlet Thermistor)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
 This alarm code is indicated when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.24 kΩ) or cut (greater
than 840 kΩ) during the cooling or heating operation.

No
Is the thermistor connected
Connect it.
to THM2 of PCB?
Yes
No
Is resistance of THM2
between 0.24 and 840kΩ? Faulty Thermistor

Yes Refer to page 1-44 for

thermistor resistance.
Faulty PCB

Indoor Unit
Air Outlet Thermistor

In Case of 4-Way Cassette Type

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item (Turn OFF Main Switch)

Replace thermistor
Fault Check resistance.
if faulty.
Faulty Air Outlet
Thermistor
Repair wiring and
Incorrect Connection Check wiring to PCB.
connections.

Replace PCB and

Faulty PCB Replace PCB if faulty.
check operation.

1-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Abnormality of Thermistor for Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger Liquid

Code Refrigerant Pipe Temperature (Freeze Protection Thermistor)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
 This alarm code is indicated when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.24 kΩ) or cut (greater
than 840 kΩ) during the cooling operation or heating operation.

Freeze Protection
No Thermistor (THM3)
Is the thermistor connected
Connect it.
to THM3 of PCB?
Yes
No
Is resistance of THM3
between 0.24 and 840kΩ? Faulty Thermistor

Yes Refer to page 1-44 for

thermistor resistance.
Faulty PCB

In Case of 4-Way Cassette Type

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item (Turn OFF Main Switch)

Replace thermistor
Fault Check resistance.
Faulty Freeze if faulty.
Protection
Thermistor Repair wiring and
Incorrect Connection Check wiring to PCB.
connections.

Replace PCB and

Faulty PCB Replace PCB if faulty.
check operation.

1-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Abnormality of Thermistor for Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger

Code Gas Refrigerant Pipe Temperature (Gas Piping Thermistor)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
 This alarm code is indicated when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.24 kΩ) or cut (greater
than 840 kΩ) during the cooling or heating operation. The system is automatically restarted when
the fault is removed.

No
Is it connected to
Connect it.
THM5 of PCB?

Yes

Is resistance of THM5 No
between 0.24kΩ and Faulty Thermistor
840kΩ?
Refer to page 1-44 for Thermistor for
Yes thermistor resistance. Heat Exchanger
Gas Pipe
Faulty PCB In Case of 4-Way Cassette Type

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item (Turn OFF Main Switch)

Replace thermistor
Faulty Thermistor Fault Check resistance.
if faulty.
for Indoor Unit
Heat Exchanger
Gas Pipe Temp. Repair wiring and
Incorrect Connection Check wiring to PCB.
connections.

Replace PCB and

Faulty PCB Replace PCB if faulty.
check operation.

1-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Activation of Protection Device for Indoor Fan Motor

Code (RCI-Model)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the alarm code is indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the following conditions occurs three times in 30 minutes.
* Indoor fan rotates less than 70rpm for 5 seconds during operation.
Does the indoor
fan run?
No

Check the connector PCB1: CN1, CN19, PCN1, PCN7

as shown on the right. PCB2: CN201, CN202, PCN201, PCN202, PCN203

Insufficient voltage for PCB2.

Yes (DC 280V)
Is LED1 on
PCB2 OFF? Faulty PCB2 Replace PCB2

No

Is the voltage between Vcc15

Is DC power No and GND1 of PCB2 15V+10%?
supply for PCB2 Faulty PCB2 Replace PCB2
correctly?

Yes

Yes
Is LED4 on PCB2 Faulty PCB1 Insufficient voltage for PCB1. Replace PCB1
OFF? or Transformer or Transformer

No

Is the voltage between Vcc05

Is DC power No and GND of PCB1 5V+5%?
Faulty PCB1 Replace PCB1
supply for PCB1 or Transformer or Transformer
correctly? Is the voltage between Vcc12
and GND of PCB1 12V+10%?
Yes
Remove CN201 on PCB2.
Is fan motor Yes Is the voltage between CN201 #3
speed control command Faulty and GND1 more than 1V? Replace
to fan motor Fan Motor Fan Motor
correctly?

No
Is the voltage between GND
of PCB1 and PC1 2# of PCB2
Yes several voltage?
Is pulse signal to Faulty PCB2 Replace PCB2
PCB2 correctly?

PCN202
No
PC1-2# PC1 Electrical
Faulty PCB1 Box

LED
CN201 CN202
CN201-3#
PCB2
Replace PCB1
TB1
CN201
TB2 CN203
PCN7 PCN11 CN1 PCN203

LED4
PCB1 CN19
Transformer

1-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Activation of Protection Device for Indoor Fan Motor

Code (except RCI and RPK Model)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the temperature of the internal thermostat for the indoor fan motor
is higher than 130°C.

Yes
No Is continuity present No No
Does the indoor
at the internal thermostat Is fan motor hot? Replace the motor.
fan run?
of indoor fan motor?
Yes Yes

No
Is connection bad at Repair wiring and
the connector? connections.

Yes

No
Is the coil resistance
Replace the motor.
of fan motor normal?

Yes

Check indoor temperature.

If it is unusual, take suitable
action to reduce it.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item (Turn OFF Main Switch)

Measure coil
Faulty Indoor Unit
resistance and Replace motor if faulty.
Fan Motor
insulation resistance.

Check continuity after

Activation Replace fan motor if
Fault fan motor temperature
of Internal no continuity.
decreases to room temp.
Thermostat for
Indoor Unit Faulty
Fan Motor Insufficient Measure resistance Correct looseness.
Internal
Contacting by tester. Replace connectors.
Thermostat

Incorrect
Check connections. Repair connections.
Connection

1-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Activation of Protection Device for Indoor Fan Motor

Code (RPK-Model)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the running current of the indoor fan motor is higher than 1A.

No In the case of Hi-Tap No Yes

Does the indoor setting, is the voltage Is the fuse (EF1,
Replace the PCB.
fan run? between #5-#31 of EF2) cut out?
CN29 on PCB normal?
Yes Yes No
Replace the motor.

No
Is connection bad at Repair wiring and
the connector? connections.

Yes

No
Is the coil resistance
Replace the motor.
of fan motor normal?

Yes

Check the dislocation of

motor shaft and the
obstacle of current of air.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Measure coil
Faulty Indoor Unit
resistance and Replace motor if faulty.
Fan Motor
insulation resistance.

Check the output voltage

Activation of Fault and fuse in the case of Replace PCB.
Overcurrent Hi-Tap Setting.
Protection
Device for
Indoor Fan Motor Insufficient Measure resistance Correct looseness.
Faulty PCB
Contacting by tester. Replace connectors.

Incorrect
Check connections. Repair connections.
Connection

1-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Abnormality of High Pressure Sensor for Outdoor Unit

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the pressure sensor voltage decreases lower than 0.1V or
increases higher than 4.9V during running.

Is the connection CN7 Yes

of the outdoor unit Connect correctly.
PCB1 bad?
No

Is 12 VDC applied No
across #1 and #3 of the
PCB1 defective.
connector CN7 of the
outdoor unit PCB1?
Yes

Is voltage under
0.1 VDC or over 4.9VDC No
across #2 and #3 of the
connector CN7 of the
outdoor unit PCB1?
Yes

Yes
Clogged Check Joint? Replace check joint.
No

Abnormality of High Faulty PCB1.

Pressure Sensor.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Check output voltage Replace pressure

Fault
is correct. sensor if faulty.
Faulty High
Pressure Sensor
Repair wiring and
Incorrect Connection Check connections.
connections.

Replace PCB and

Faulty PCB Replace PCB if faulty.
check operation.

Indicated
Malfunction of Pressure
Pressure Value Check for clogging
Sensor due to Faulty Replace check joint.
is Excessively of check joint.
Check Joint
High or Low

1-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Abnormality of Thermistor for Outdoor Air Temperature

Code (Outdoor Unit Ambient Thermistor)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.2 kΩ) or cut (greater
than 500 kΩ) during running. However, this alarm occurs during test running mode only. In the
case that the thermistor is abnormal during running, operation continues based on the assumption
that the outdoor temperature, is 35°C (Cooling) / 6°C (Heating).

No
Is it connected to
Connect it.
THM7 (TA) of PCB1?

Yes

Is resistance of THM7 No
between 0.2kΩ and Faulty Thermistor Outdoor
500kΩ? Unit Ambient
Refer to page 1-44. Thermistor (THM7)
Yes

Faulty PCB1

Refer to page 1-44 for thermistor resistance.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item (Turn OFF Main Switch)

Replace thermistor
Fault Check resistance.
Faulty Thermistor if faulty.
for Outdoor Unit
Ambient Repair wiring and
Incorrect Connection Check wiring to PCB.
connections.

Replace PCB and

Faulty PCB Replace PCB if faulty.
check operation.

1-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Abnormality of Thermistor for Discharge Gas

Code Temperature on the Top of Compressor Chamber

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section, or
the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB. (*1)
If abnormality with the thermistor is found, check all the thermistors as shown below.

 This alarm code is indicated when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.9 kΩ) or cut (greater
than 2,350 kΩ) during running.

No
Is the setting of DSW2 Set DSW2 on PCB1
on PCB1 right? correctly.

Yes
Characteristics of Thermistor

Are thermistors, THM8,

THM9, THM12 and No
THM13 connected to Connect them.
THM8(TD1), THM9(TD2), 200
THM12(TD3) and R25=200kΩ
THM13(TD4)? Resistance B=3920k
of Thermistor
Yes (kΩ) 100
72.3
14.2
Is resistance of 8.32
THM8, THM9, THM12 No
0 25 50 100 120 150
and THM13 same with Faulty Thermistor.
characteristic in right Ambient Temperature (oC)
figure? (*1) Indication on the display
Yes of the outdoor unit PCB.
1 2 3 Faulty TD1
Faulty PCB1 2 2 3 Faulty TD2
3 2 3 Faulty TD3
4 2 3 Faulty TD4
Position of Thermistor
THM8 (TD1) THM8 (TD1) THM9 (TD2) THM8 (TD1) THM9 (TD2) THM12 (TD3) THM13 (TD4)
20, 24, 30HP
only

for Inverter Drive for Inverter for Constant for Inverter

Drive Speed Drive Drive for Constant Speed Drive

RAS-5FSG, RAS-5FS3 RAS-8FSG, RAS-8FS3 RAS-16FSG, RAS-16FS3 RAS-20FSG,

RAS-10FSG, RAS-10FS3 RAS-20FS3
RAS-8FXG, RAS-8FX3 RAS-24FSG1,
RAS-10FXG, RAS-10FX3 RAS-24FS5,
RAS-30FSG1,
RAS-30FS5

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Replace thermistor
Fault Check resistance.
if faulty.
Faulty Discharge
Gas Thermistor
Repair wiring and
Incorrect Connection Check wiring to PCB.
connections.

Replace PCB and

Faulty PCB Replace PCB if faulty.
check operation.

Check setting of Correctly set

Incorrect Setting of DSW2 on PCB1
DSW2 on PCB1. DSW2 on PCB1.

1-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Abnormality of Thermistor for Evaporating Temperature

Code during Heating Operation (Outdoor Unit)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and or the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB. (*1)
If abnormality with the thermistor is found, check all the thermistors as shown below.

 The evaporating thermistor during the heating operation is attached to the heat exchanger as shown
below figure.
If this thermistor is faulty, this alarm is indicated. The position is indicated below.

THM11

THM10
THM10 THM5
THM11
THM10 THM11 THM10

RAS-5FSG, 5FS3 RAS-16FSG, 16FS3 RAS-8FXG, 8FX3 RAS-24FSG1, 24FS5

RAS-8FSG, 8FS3 RAS-20FSG, 20FS3 RAS-10FXG, 10FX3 30FSG1, 30FS5
RAS-10FSG, 10FS3

Is CN105 or CN106
No
on PCB1 connected (*1) Indication on the display
to THM10 (Te1), or Connect it. of the outdoor unit PCB.
THM11 (Te2) or
THM15 (Te3)? 1 2 4 Faulty Te1
Yes 2 2 4 Faulty Te2
3 2 4 Faulty Te3
Is resistance of the No
thermistor between Faulty Thermistor
0.2kΩ and 500kΩ?
Regarding the thermistor characteristics,
Yes refer to page 1-44.

Faulty PCB1

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item (Turn OFF Main Switch)

Replace thermistor
Faulty Thermistor Fault Check resistance.
if faulty.
for Evaporating
Temperature
during Heating Repair wiring and
Incorrect Connection Check wiring to PCB.
connections.

Replace PCB and

Faulty PCB Replace PCB if faulty.
check operation.

1-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Abnormality of Low Pressure Sensor

Code (Outdoor Unit)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the pressure sensor voltage decreases lower than 0.1V or
increases higher than 4.9V during running.

Is the connection CN8 Yes

of the outdoor unit Connect correctly.
PCB1 mated loose?
No

Is 5 VDC applied across No

#1 and #3 of the connector
Faulty PCB1
CN8 of the outdoor circuit
board PCB1?
Yes

Is voltage under 0.1 VDC

or over 4.9 VDC across No
#2 and #3 of the connector Faulty PCB1
CN8 of the outdoor circuit
board PCB1?
Yes

Yes
Is the Check Joint
Replace the check joint.
clogged?
No

Abnormality with Low

Pressure Sensor.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Check output voltage Replace pressure

Fault
is correct. sensor if faulty.
Faulty Low
Pressure Sensor
Repair wiring and
Incorrect Connection Check connections.
connections.

Replace PCB and

Faulty PCB Replace PCB if faulty.
check operation.

Indicated
Malfunction of Pressure
Pressure Value Check for clogging
Sensor due to Faulty Replace check joint.
is Excessively of check joint.
Check Joint
High or Low

1-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Incorrect Wiring Connection (FX Series Only)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when there are more than two (2) CH units connected between outdoor
unit and indoor unit due to incorrect wiring connection.
 This alarm code is indicated when the outdoor unit PCB (PCB1) for FSG/FS3 series is attached
incorrectly to the FXG/FX3 series outdoor unit.

No
Is wiring connection Correct the wiring connection
correct? and start the unit again.
Outdoor Unit PCB is correct.
Yes

No Replace the PCB1 with the

Is PCB1 for FXG/FX3
one for FXG/FX3 series and
series?
start the unit again.
Outdoor Unit PCB is for FSG/FS3 series.
Yes

Fault PCB for CH Unit

Correct Wiring Incorrect Wiring

Incorrect Example;
Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit Two (2) CH units between
outdoor unit and indoor unit

No. 1, 2 No. 1, 2 No. 1, 2 No. 1, 2

of TB2 of TB2 of TB2 of TB2

CH Unit CH Unit CH Unit CH Unit

No. 3, 4 No. 3, 4 No. 3, 4 No. 3, 4

of TB2 of TB2 of TB2 of TB2
Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor
Unit Unit Unit Unit

1-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Incorrect Capacity Setting or Combined Capacity

Code between Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the capacity setting dip switch, DSW2 on the outdoor unit PCB1,
is not set (all the settings from #1 to #3 are OFF) or mis setting.
 This alarm code is indicated when the total indoor unit capacity is smaller than 50% or greater than
150% of the combined outdoor unit capacity.

Are #1-#3 of DSW2 on No

the outdoor unit PCB1 Set the capacity for PCB1.
set correctly?
Yes

Are #1-#4 of DSW3 on No

the indoor unit PCB set Set the capacity for PCB.
correctly?
Yes

Are the setting of

DSW1 on the outdoor No
unit PCB1 and the setting Set them correctly.
of DSW5 on the indoor
unit PCB totally same in
a refrigerant cycle?

In case of 16 or less of total indoor unit, set the dip switch DSW1
Yes
of outdoor unit PCB1 and DSW5 of indoor unit PCB correctly.
Total capacity of the
In case of 17 or more of total indoor unit, set DSW5 of indoor unit
indoor units is wrong. PCB at {(DSW1 of outdoor unit PCB1)+1}.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Check combination
Incorrect Capacity Setting of Indoor Unit of indoor units and Correctly set dip switch,
capacity setting on PCB. DSW3.

Check capacity setting Correctly set dip switch,

Incorrect Capacity Setting of Outdoor Unit
on outdoor unit PCB. DSW2.

Check outdoor unit

Ensure that total
Total Indoor Unit Capacity Connected to the model by calculating
indoor unit capacity is
Outdoor Unit is Beyond Permissible Range total indoor units
from50% to 130%.
capacity.

Check refrigeration
Refrigeration Cycle Setting of Outdoor Unit cycle setting on
Set them correctly.
and Indoor Unit is Different outdoor unit PCB and
indoor unit PCB.

Combination
Combined Indoor Unit
Outdoor Unit Model Total Capacity Notes
Total Q'ty
(HP)
RAS-5FSG(3) 2-8 sets *1) 2.5-6.5 *1): If the capacity of one indoor unit
RAS-8FSG(3), RAS-8FXG(3) 4.0-10.4 is the same as of the outdoor
2-12 sets unit, the system can be operated.
RAS-10FSG(3), RAS-10FXG(3) 5.0-13.0
RAS-16FSG, RAS-16FS3 2-13 (16) sets *2) 8.0-20.8 *2): In case of changing the indoor
RAS-20FSG, RAS-20FS3 2-16 sets 10.0-26.0 unit capacity from 1.0HP or 1.5HP
RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5 2-27 sets 12.0-31.2 to 1.3HP by dip switch setting.
RAS-30FSG1, RAS-30FS5 2-30 sets 15.0-39.0

1-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Abnormality in Transmitting of Other Indoor Units

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated on the remote control switch of other indoor unit when no transmitting
data is issued from a malfunctioning indoor unit for more than 60 minutes after receiving transmitting
data from the indoor unit.

Is there any indoor Yes Is the connector CN2 Yes

Plug the connector CN2
unit with indication on PCB of indoor unit
properly and restart operation.
of alarm code "03"? loose?
No No

Is there any indoor Is LED3 (yellow) Yes Check the wires between
unit whose lamp is not flickering on the PCB the indoor unit, CH unit and
lit or whose LCD is not of indoor unit? outdoor unit.
indicated at the remote
control switch? No

Yes
Yes Check connections of the
Is LED3 OFF? PCB of indoor unit, CH unit
or connector CN1.
Check the power source, No
fuse and transformer of
the indoor unit or CH unit.

Is still LED3 ON?

Yes

Faulty indoor unit PCB.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Abnormal Transmitting Check indoor unit

Indoor Unit Outdoor Unit Take action according
showing alarm code
Outdoor Unit Indoor Unit to pages 1-28 to 34.
"03".

Check indoor unit

Abnormal Incorrect Power Supply Take action according
showing no light ON on
Transmitting (to Indoor Unit or CH Unit) *1) to pages 1-13 to 14.
remote control switch.
from Other Units
If all indoor unit show
alarm code 32, check
Faulty Indoor Unit PCB
PCB by self-checking Replace PCB if faulty.
or CH Unit PCB
mode for all indoor unit
or CH unit.

*1): This abnormality is indicated on an indoor unit which is normal, since this is due to abnormality of transmitting of
the indoor units or power source abnormality in the same refrigeration cycle and electrical system. If the power
source is abnormal, abnormality can not be indicated by its indoor unit, so, this alarm is indicated on the remote
control switch of other indoor unit.

1-58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Incorrect Indoor Unit No. Setting

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated 3 minutes after power is supplied to the outdoor unit when the indoor
unit No. connected to the outdoor unit is duplicated by setting of RSW.

In the case of H-Link System, this alarm code is indicated when DSW1 of the outdoor unit PCB and DSW5
of the indoor unit PCB are incorrectly set.
In this case, set correctly DSW1 and DSW5 after turning off Main Switch.

Alarm Abnormality of Picking up Circuit for Protection

Code (Outdoor Unit)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when AC 220V or 240V is supplied to voltage *A or *B on PCB1 in the
outdoor unit during inverter compressor stoppage.

No
Faulty PCB1
Is 220VAC or 240VAC applied *A
during stopping? No No
Is 220VAC or 240VAC applied *B
during stoppage?
Yes
PCB1 is normal Yes

Check wiring connection

of other PCB. *1)

Power Supply *A *B
380-415V/50Hz Between terminal #3 of PCN14 on PCB1 Between terminal #3 of PCN2 on PCB1
380V/60Hz and faston terminal "N" on PCB1 and faston terminal "N" on PCB1
220V/60Hz Between terminal #3 of PCN14 on PCB1 Between terminal #3 of PCN2 on PCB1
and faston terminal "S" on PCB1 and faston terminal "S" on PCB1

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Abnormality of
Check voltage supplied Repair wiring
Picking up Circuit Incorrect Connection
to connectors. connections.
for Protection

Faulty PCB Replace PCB.

*1): Check wiring system connecting to PCN14 and PCN2 on PCB1.

1-59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Abnormality of Running Current at Constant Compressor

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the following conditions occurs;

• The running current of the constant compressor exceeds the value of overcurrent limitation during
operating.
• The running current of the constant compressor is detected 0A and retry when 3 minutes are
passed after all compressors are stopped, and this phenomenon occurs three times within
30 minutes.

No
Does the CMC2~4 Check wiring connection
turn ON? around PCB1.

Yes

No Check fuses and wiring

Does the constant
between CMC2~4 and
compressor operate?
constant compressor.
Yes

Is the running No Is the connector No

current indicated on CN4~6 of current
Connect it correctly.
7-Segment of PCB1 transformer correctly
at check mode? connected?
Yes Yes

Check constant compressor and

current transformer.
Remove the cause after checking.

Indication of 7-Segment
Abnormality of Constant Compressor

MC2

MC3

MC4

1-60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Operate within
Excessively High or
380-415V +
− 10% (50Hz)
Low Voltage of
380V +
− 10% (60Hz)
Power Source
220V +
− 10% (60Hz)
Excessively Large
Running Current of Imbalance Among Adjust voltage between
Compressor Motor Phase at Power Source each phase.

Excessively High
Check for causes.
Discharge Pressure

Melted Fuse for

Replace the fuses.
Power Source

Looseness of Screws
Single Phase Operation Tightly fix screws.
for Power Source

Overcurrent Deterioration of Contact

Replace magnetic
of Compressor of Magnetic Switch for
contactor.
Motor Compressor

Seizure of Compressor
Locked-up? Replace compressor.
Bearing

Insulation Failure of Measure insulation

Replace compressor.
Compressor Motor resistance.

Check continuity
Fault Replace CT when faulty.
during stoppage.

Incorrect Measure resistance Remove looseness

Faulty CT
Connection by tester. and replace connector.

Incorrect
Check wiring. Correctly wiring.
Wiring

1-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Code Activation to Protect System from Low Compression Ratio

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
 This alarm code is indicated when a compression ratio, ε= {(Pd + 0.1) / (Ps + 0.1)} is calculated from
a discharge pressure (MPa) and suction pressure (MPa) and the condition lower than
ε = 1.8 occurs more than 3 times including 3 in one hour.

No
Does the inverter operate? Check the inverter.
Yes
No
Check the compressor and
Does the compressor operate?
power cable.
Yes

Yes
Is the four-way valve spindle
Replace the four-way valve if faulty.
mounted at middle position?
No

No
Are the high-pressure sensor and Replace the high-pressure sensor
the low-pressure sensor good? or the low-pressure sensor if faulty.
Yes

Yes
Is there a leak in the Solenoid Replace the Solenoid Valve
Valve for Hot Gas Bypass (SVA)? (SVA) if faulty.
No

Check if the intake air temperature is

too low at the indoor or outdoor units.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Inverter is not Functioning Check inverter. Repair faulty part.

Compressor is not Operating Check compressor. Replace comp. if faulty.

Valve Stoppage at Medium Measure suction pipe Replace 4-way valve

Position of 4-Way Valve temp. of 4-way valve. if faulty.

Check connector for

Abnormality of High or Low
Excessively PCB, power source and Replace sensor if faulty.
Pressure Sensor
Low Compression pressure indication.
Ratio
Check indoor unit and
Excessively Low Indoor Replace thermistor
outdoor unit air temp.
Intake Air Temperature if faulty.
thermistor.

Leakage from Solenoid

Check Solenoid Valve. Replace SVA if leaking.
Valve: SVA Outdoor Unit

Leakage from Solenoid

Replace SVD1 and
Valve: SVD1, SVS1 of Check Solenoid Valve.
SVS1 if leaking.
CH Unit
<FX Series Only>

1-62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Activation to Protect System from Excessively Low Suction Pressure
Code

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the compressor is operated under the conditions higher than
0.9 MPa of suction pressure and its occurrence is more than 3 times including 3 in one hour.

Yes
Is there a leak in the Replace the solenoid valve SVA
solenoid valve SVA? if faulty.
No

Yes
Is the four-way valve spindle
mounted at middle position? Replace the four-way valve if faulty.

No
No
Replace the low-pressure sensor
Is the low-pressure sensor good?
if faulty.
Yes

Check if the indoor/outdoor intake

air temperature is too high.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Check connecting wires.

Leakage of Solenoid Check outlet pipe temp.
Replace solenoid valve,
Valve SVA of solenoid valve, SVA.
SVA if faulty.

Measure suction gas

Valve Stoppage at Medium Replace 4-way valve
pipe temp. of 4-way
Position of 4-Way Valve if faulty.
valve.

Excessively
Abnormal Suction Check connectors of
Low Suction Replace sensor if faulty.
Pressure Sensor PCB and power source.
Pressure

Excessively High Indoor Check indoor unit and

Replace thermistor
Unit and Outdoor Unit outdoor unit suction
if faulty.
Suction Air Temperature air temp. thermistor.

Leakage from Solenoid

Replace SVD1 and
Valve: SVD1, SVS1 of Check Solenoid Valve.
SVS1 if leaking.
CH Unit
<FX Series Only>

1-63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Activation to Protect System from Excessively High Discharge Pressure
Code

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
 This alarm code is indicated when the compressor is operated under the conditions higher than
2.65 MPa (26.5 kg/cm2G) of discharge pressure [ in case of FSG, FSG1 and FXG models, Pd is
higher than 2.84 MPa (28.4 kg/cm2G)] and its occurrence is more than 3 times including 3 in one
hour.
Yes
Is there a leakage of the Replace the solenoid valve SVA
solenoid valves SVA? if faulty.
No
Yes
Is the outdoor unit stop valve
Open the stop valve.
closed?
No
No Check connection of the circuit
Is the high-pressure sensor good? board connector. Replace the
high-pressure sensor if faulty.
Yes
Yes Check the circuit board and
Are ex. valves fully closed and connection of the circuit board
locked? connector. Replace the electronic
expansion valves if faulty.
No
Check the outdoor electronic expansion valve during cooling
and the indoor electronic expansion valve during heating.
Are electric wiring and refrigerant Yes
piping between the indoor and Correctly connect it.
outdoor unit incorrectly connected?
In the case of H-LINK connection,
No check the refrigeration cycle setting on
the PCB of outdoor unit and indoor unit.
Check if indoor or outdoor intake
air temperature is too high.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Check connection.
Leakage of Solenoid Valve Check outlet temp. of
Replace solenoid valve
SVA (Outdoor Unit) solenoid valve, SVA.
SVA if faulty.

Closed Stop Valve Check stop valve. Open stop valve.

Abnormal High Pressure Check connectors for Replace pressure

Sensor PCB. sensor if faulty.

Excessively High Indoor Check thermistor for

Excessively Replace thermistor
Unit and Outdoor Unit indoor unit and outdoor
High Discharge if faulty.
Inlet Air Temp. unit inlet air temp.
Pressure
Incorrect Connection between Check electrical system
Correctly connect.
Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit and ref. cycle.

Repair connector for

Locked Ex. Valve with Check connector for
PCB or ex. valve.
Fully Closed PCB.
Replace it if faulty.
Check solenoid valve
Fully Closed Solenoid Replace coil or
SVD1 opening in
Valve SVD1 (CH Unit) CH unit if faulty.
heating.
<FX Series Only>

Melted Fuses Check continuity of fuses. Replace fuses.

Stoppage of
Indoor Fan
<Wall Type Only> Replace PCB and Replace PCB
Faulty PCB
check operation. if faulty.

1-64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Activation to Protect System from Excessively Low Discharge Pressure

Code (for Protection of Refrigerant Shortage)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the compressor is operated under the conditions lower than
0.6MPa (6kgf/cm2G) for an hour.

(MPa) (V)

0.3 0.9
Discharge Voltage between
Pressure #2 and #3 of CN7
Alarm area
0.1 0.6

0 26
Outdoor Air Temperature (oC)

No
Is the amount of refrigerant
Correctly charge refrigerant.
correct?
Yes

Connect pressure gauge

at the check joint of the
compressor discharge pipe.

Yes
Is the high-pressure in the
Check for leakage of refrigerant.
alarm area?
No

Yes
Is the connector CN7 of
Plug the connector CN7 correctly.
outdoor unit PCB1 loose?
No

Yes
Is the high-pressure sensor
Remove clogging.
pipe clogged?
No

Is voltage between #1 and #3 of Yes

the connector CN7 of outdoor unit
Replace the high-pressure sensor.
PCB1 12V, and voltage between
#2 and #3 in the alarm area?
No
Check the outdoor unit PCB1 by
self-checking. Replace it if faulty.

1-65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Activation to Protect System from Excessively Low Suction Pressure

Code (Protection from Vacuum Operation)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
 This alarm code is indicated when a suction pressure is lower than 0.02 MPa (0.2 kg/cm2G) for over
12 minutes and its state occurs more than 3 times including 3 in one hour.
No
Is the amount of refrigerant correctly? Correctly charge refrigerant.
Yes
No
Is the outdoor stop valve open? Open the stop valve.
Yes
Yes
Is refrigerant leaking? Repair leaks.
No
No
Replace suction pressure sensor
Is suction pressure sensor normal?
if faulty.
Yes
Yes Check connection of the connectors
Are the electronic ex. valves fully
and the circuit board. Replace the
closed and locked?
electronic ex. valves if faulty.
No
Check the indoor ex. valve during cooling
and the outdoor ex. valve during heating.

Check if connections of electric wiring NOTE:

and refrigerant piping between the indoor In the case of H-LINK system, check the refrigerant
and outdoor unit are wrong. system setting of the outdoor PCB and indoor PCB.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item
(Turn OFF Main Switch)

Check ref. charged

Repair leakage and
Shortage of Ref. volume or check for
correctly charge.
leakage.
Closed Stop Valve Check stop valve. Open stop valve.

Abnormal Low or High Check connector Replace pressure

Pressure Sensor for PCB. sensor if faulty.
Excessively
Low Suction Incorrect Connection Correctly connect
Pressure Check electrical
between Indoor Unit and between indoor unit
(in Vacuum) system and ref. cycle.
Outdoor Unit and outdoor unit.
Repair or replace
Check connector
Locked Ex. Valve connector of PCB or
for PCB.
ex. valve.
Check Td thermistors
Closed Ex. Valve by for compressors and Repair or replace
Disconnecting Td Thermistor measure Td thermistor Td thermistor.
resistance.

Measure coil resistance Replace outdoor fan

Faulty Outdoor Fan Motor
and insulation resistance. motor if faulty.

Check for conduction

Internal after temperature of Replace outdoor fan
Thermostat for Fault
outdoor fan motor is motor.
Outdoor Fan decreased.
is Activated Faulty
in Heating Internal Incorrect Measure resistance Remove looseness
Operation Thermostat Contact by tester. and replace connector.

Incorrect
Check connection. Connect correctly.
Connection

1-66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Abnormality of Current Transformer (0A Detection) (For 5HP to 20HP)
Code

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the current transformer is abnormal (0A detection) and its state
occurs more than 3 times in 30 minutes.
Condition of Activation: When the frequency of compressor is maintained at 15 to 18Hz after compressor
is started, one of the absolute value of running current at each phase
U+, U-, V+ and V- is less than 0.5A (including 0.5A).

Power wiring of Comp.

Restart operation. is not through CT.
Pass the wires through CT.

Compressor stops Faulty PCB3 and

immediately. (nearly 18Hz) Replace PCB3 *2)
How is compressor
operation when
restarted?
Compressor is not
operated.
P17 is appeared. *1)

No
Is the coil resistance
Replace Comp.
of comp. normal?

Yes

No
Is output of transistor
Check transistor module.
module correct? *2)

Yes

Replace PCB3

*1): P17 is shown at 7-segment on the outdoor unit PCB.

*2): Perform the high voltage discharge work by referring to 1.3.6 before checking and replacing the inverter parts.

1-67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Abnormality of Current Transformer (For 24 and 30HP)
Code

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 In case that the abnormality of alarm code 51, 52, 53 or 54 occurs three times within 30 seconds, the
alarm code of abnormality occurred for the third time is indicated. Retry operation is performed up to
second time of abnormality occurrence.
Condition of Activation: When the frequency of compressor is maintained at 15 to 18Hz after compressor
is started, one of the absolute value of running current at each phase
U+, U-, V+ and V- is less than 0.5A (including 0.5A).

Restart operation.

Compressor stops Faulty ISPM and

immediately. (nearly 18Hz) replace ISPM. *2)
How is compressor
operation when
restarted?
Compressor is not
operated.
P17 is appeared. *1)

No
Is the coil resistance
Replace Comp.
of comp. normal?

Yes

Is output of ISPM
No
correct? *2)
Or is output of voltage Check ISPM.
between U and V,
V and W, W and U?

*1): P17 is shown at 7-segment on the outdoor unit PCB.

*2): Perform the high voltage discharge work by referring to 1.3.6 before checking and replacing the inverter parts.

1-68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Protection Activation Against Instantaneous Overcurrent of Inverter (1)

Code (For 5 to 20HP)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the electronic thermal relay for the inverter is activated 3 times
including 3 in 30 minutes. Retry operation is performed up to the occurrence of 2 times.
Conditions: Inverter current with 105% of the rated current, (1) runs continuously for 30 seconds or
(2) runs intermittently and the accumulated time reaches up to 3.5 minutes, in 10 minutes.

Rated Current
Model 380-415V 50Hz 220V 60Hz
380V 60Hz
RAS-5FSG(3), RAS-8FSG(3), RAS-10FSG(3) 14.0 / 25.0
RAS-16FSG(3), RAS-20FSG(3) 16.5 / 30.0
RAS-8FXG(3), RAS-10FXG(3) 14.0 / 25.0

Is the cause of
stoppage " " of "2"
troubleshooting by Refer to next page.
7-segments display
Restart operation. "2" or "4"?
"4"

Yes
Is the compressor (The circuit board is normal.)
current larger than
activation current?
Is discharge pressure
No high?
Smaller than
activation current. Check pressure and
refrigeration cycle.

Check for clogging of

the heat exchanger.

Check the fan motor.

Abnormal
Check the diode
Replace the diode module.
module. *1)

Normal

Check the inverter Abnormal

circuit board (PCB3) Connect it correctly.
connection. *2)
Normal
The inverter circuit board
is faulty. Replace it.

*1): Regarding the checking method for diode module, refer to page 1-113.
*2): Regarding replacing or the checking of inverter components, refer to page 1-111 regarding electrical discharge.

1-69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Protection Activation Against Instantaneous Overcurrent of Inverter (2)

Code (For 5 to 20HP)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when the instantaneous overcurrent tripping occurs 3 times including 3
in 30 minutes. Retry operation is performed up to the occurrence of 2 times.
Conditions: Inverter current is 150% of the rated current.

Turn off power and

No disconnect U, V, W
Yes No Faulty
Restart operation. from compressor Check the inverter Replace the inverter
Does it trip soon? terminals. circuit board. *3) circuit board.
Turn ON #1 of DSW1
No It trips on PCB3 and restart. Good
immediately. Does it trip?
No
Yes It trips. Is there any cause
Check the
of instantaneous
compressor.
voltage decrease?
Yes
It trips after a Check the power
certain period. source capacity.
Faulty
Check the transistor Replace the
module. *2) transistor module.
It trips
occasionally. Good
Replace the inverter
circuit board.
Is the compressor Yes
running current as Check the
same as rated compressor.
current?
No
Faulty
Check the diode Replace the diode
module. *1) module.
Good

Are the input currents Yes (Input currents nearly equal (±3%).)
Replace the inverter
of three phases nearly
circuit board.
equal? ( +
_ 3%)
No (Input currents out of balance.)
Check the power
supply.
Is the supply voltage No
Power Supply Mark (a)
380-415V±10% or
220V±10%? 380-415V 50Hz
320
380V 60Hz
Yes
220V 60Hz 170
No Check the capacity
Is it (a)V or more
and wiring of the
during operation?
power source.
Yes

Is it (a)V more No
during operation
when other devices
are operating?
Yes
Replace the inverter
circuit board.

1*): Regarding replacing or the checking method for the diode module, refer to page 1-113.
2*): Regarding the checking method for transistor module, refer to page 1-112.
3*): Regarding the checking of inverter components, refer to page 1-111 regarding electrical discharge.

1-70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Protection Activation Against Instantaneous Overcurrent of Inverter (1)

Code (For 24 and 30HP)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 In case that the abnormality of alarm code 51, 52, 53 or 54 occurs three times within 30 seconds, the
alarm code of abnormality occurred for the third time is indicated. Retry operation is performed up to
second time of abnormality occurrence.
Conditions: Inverter current with 105% of the rated current, (1) runs continuously for 30 seconds or
(2) runs intermittently and the accumulated time reaches up to 3.5 minutes, in 10 minutes.

Rated Current
Model 380-415V 50Hz 220V 60Hz
380V 60Hz
RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1, RAS-24FS5, RAS-30FS5 14.0 / 27.5

Is the cause of
stoppage " " of "2"
troubleshooting by Refer to next page.
7-segments display
Restart operation. "2" or "4"?
"4"

Yes
Is the compressor (ISPM is normal.)
current larger than
activation current?
Is discharge pressure
No high?
Smaller than
activation current. Check pressure and
refrigeration cycle.

Power Supply Activation Current

Check for clogging of
380-415V 50Hz the heat exchanger.
14.0A
380V 60Hz
220V 60Hz 27.5A
Check the fan motor.

Replace ISPM.

Check the inverter Abnormal

circuit board (ISPM) Connect it correctly.
connection. *1)

Normal
ISPM is faulty.
Replace it.

*1): Regarding replacing or the checking of ISPM, refer to page 1-114 regarding electrical discharge.

1-71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Protection Activation Against Instantaneous Overcurrent of Inverter (2)

Code (For 24 and 30HP)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 In case that the abnormality of alarm code 51, 52, 53 or 54 occurs three times within 30 seconds, the
alarm code of abnormality occurred for the third time is indicated. Retry operation is performed up to
second time of abnormality occurrence.
Conditions: Inverter current is 150% of the rated current.
Turn off power and
No disconnect U, V, W
Yes No
Restart operation. from compressor
Does it trip soon? terminals.
Turn ON #1 of DSW1
No It trips on ISPM and restart.
immediately. Does it trip?
No
Yes It trips. Is there any cause
Check the
of instantaneous
compressor.
voltage decrease?
Yes
It trips after a Check the power
certain period. source capacity.

Replace ISPM. *2)

It trips
occasionally.

Is the compressor Yes

running current as Check the
same as rated compressor.
current?
No
Faulty
Check ISPM. *1) Replace ISPM. *2)

Good

Are the input currents Yes (Input currents nearly equal (±3%).)
of three phases nearly Replace ISPM. *2)
equal? ( +
_ 3%)
No (Input currents out of balance.)
Check the power
supply.

Is the supply voltage No

Power Supply Mark (a)
380-415V±10% or
220V±10%? 380-415V 50Hz
320
380V 60Hz
Yes
220V 60Hz 170
No Check the capacity
Is it (a)V or more
and wiring of the
during operation?
power source.
Yes

Is it (a)V more No
during operation
when other devices
are operating?
Yes
Replace ISPM. *2)

1*): Regarding replacing or the checking method for ISPM, refer to page 1-114.
2*): Before the checking of ISPM, refer to page 1-111 regarding electrical discharge.

1-72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Protection Activation of Transistor Module (5 to 20HP)

Code or ISPM (24 and 30HP)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 Transistor module (5 to 20HP) or ISPM (24 and 30HP) have detecting function of abnormality.
This alarm is indicated when the transistor module detect the abnormality 3 times in 30 minutes
including 3. Retry operation is performed up to the occurrence of 2 times. (In Case of 5 to 20HP)
In case that the abnormality of alarm code 51, 52, 53 or 54 occurs three times within 30 seconds, the
alarm code of abnormality occurred for the third time is indicated. Retry operation is performed up to
second time of abnormality occurrence. (In Case of 24 and 30HP)
Conditions: Abnormal Current to the Transistor Module (5 to 20HP) or ISPM (24 and 30HP) such as
Short Circuited or Grounded
or
Abnormal Temperature of the Transistor Module (5 to 20HP) or ISPM (24 and 30HP)
or
Control Voltage Decrease

Turn off power, disconnect

No Check the compressor.
U, V, W from compressor
(If there is a short-circuit
terminals and restart.
between phase lines,
Does the protecting function
replace the compressor.)
activate? *3)
24 and 30HP
Yes
Replace ISPM.

Check the transistor module Faulty Good

Check the inverter Replace the transistor
(5 to 20HP) or the ISPM (24
circuit board. *2) module.
and 30HP). *1)
5 to 20HP
Good Faulty
Replace the transistor
module and inverter circuit
board.

Coat the silicon grease to all

Is the silicon grease coated all over
the touched face between
between the transistor module and
No the transistor module and the
the radiated fin? (5 to 20HP)
radiated fin fully (5 to 20HP).
Is the silicon grease coated all over
Coat the silicon grease to all
between the ISPM and the radiated fin?
the touched face between
Is the fixed screw on ISPM loose?
the ISPM and the radiated fin
(24 and 30HP)
fully. Fix the screw correctly
Yes (24 and 30HP). *4)

Yes
Is the heat exchanger of
Remove clogging.
outdoor unit clogged?

No
Replace the inverter
circuit board (5 to 20HP)
or ISPM (24 and 30HP).

1*): Regarding replacing or checking method for the transistor module (5 to 20HP) and the inveter components (24
and 30HP), refer to pages 1-112 and 1-114.
2*): Before the checking of inverter components, refer to page 1-111 regarding electrical discharge.
3*): Turn ON the No.1 switch of the dip switch DSW1 on PCB3/ISPM when restarting with disconnecting
theterminals of the compressor. After troubleshooting, turn OFF the No.1 switch of the dip switch DSW1 on
PCB3/ISPM (5 to 20HP/24 and 30HP).
4*): Use the silicon grease provided as accessory (Service Parts No.: P22760).

1-73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Increase in Inverter Fin Temperature (Only 24 and 30HP)

Code

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 In case that the abnormality of alarm code 51, 52, 53 or 54 occurs three times within 30 seconds, the
alarm code of abnormality occurred for the third time is indicated. Retry operation is performed up to
second time of abnormality occurrence.
Conditions: This alarm is indicated when the temperature of the internal themostat for ISPM is higher
than 100oC.

Yes
Restart operation.
Replace the ISPM.
Does it trip soon?

No

Is the silicon grease coated No Apply the silicon grease

securely between ISPM and between ISPM and fin
fin? securely. *2)
Yes

Yes
Is the heat exchanger of
Remove clogging.
outdoor unit clogged?

No

Replace the ISPM. *1)

1*): Regarding replacing or checking method for ISPM, refer to page 1-114.
2*): Use the silicon grease provided as accessory (Service Parts No.: P22760).

1-74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Abnormality of Fan Motor Protection

Code (Only 24 and 30HP 220V/60Hz)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm is indicated when the revolution pulse output from the fan motor is 10rpm or less and the
reverse revolution signal is detected. The fan motor is stopped once, and restarted after 10 seconds.
It occurs more than 10 times in 30 minutes, this alarm is indicated. The abnormality occurs when the
fan motor is stopped.

Restart operation.

Yes This alarm is indicated due to

Does the motor run? detected overcurrent by the
contrary wind. This is normal.
No
Alarm code is not indicated.
Yes
Does the fan stop by the
Remove the foreign matter.
foreign matter?
No

Check to remove the connector CN14 on PCB1 and CN201, CN203, CN206
and CN207 on ISPM and CN15 and CN110 of trunk connector.

Faulty
Are the connectors abnormal? Connect it correctly.
Good

Restart operation.

Yes
Does the motor run? This is normal.
No

Replace the fan motor.

Restart operation.

Yes
Does the motor run? This is normal.

No
Alarm code is not indicated.
Replace the PCB or
the fan controller.
In the case that the fan motor does not run
even the PCB is replaced, replace ISPM.

1-75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm Abnormality of AC Chopper Circuit Board

Code (Only for 5 to 20HP & 24, 30HP 380-415/380V 50/60Hz)

“RUN” light flickers and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.

The unit No., alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section,
and the unit No. and alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.

 This alarm code is indicated when a current value of AC chopper becomes (1) less than 0.5A when
outdoor unit fan is operating, or (2) more than 2A while outdoor unit fan stops.

Is outdoor unit fan operating Yes Abnormality of AC

during the indication of chopper circuit board
alarm code? (PCB2).
No

Is outdoor unit fan operated Yes Is the connection of No

for more than 2 seconds CT5 at outdoor circuit Connect CT5 correctly.
when the unit is restarted? board (PCB1) right?
No Yes
Abnormality of CT5.

Is the connection of CN13 No

at outdoor unit circuit board
Connect correctly.
(PCB1) and CN201 at AC
chopper circuit board right?
Yes

Is the connection of S3, R3 No

at outdoor unit circuit board
(PCB1) or faston of EF9 and Connect correctly.
S1, R1 at AC chopper circuit
board right?
Yes

Yes
Is the fuse of EF9 melted? Replace fuse.

No

Is the connection of MAIN1, No

COM1, SUB1 at AC chopper Connect correctly.
circuit board right?
Yes

Is the connection of relay No

connector CN1 for outdoor Connect correctly.
fan motor right?
Yes

Faulty AC chopper.
Replace the AC chopper.

1-76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Incorrect Wiring Among Indoor Units
Code

 This alarm code is indicated only when remote control switch PC-2H2 is used being connected to
indoor unit.
 This alarm occurs in the case of incorrect connection like that TL terminal is connected to Vc terminal
as below when indoor units are wired.

I. U. 1

CN13(blue) CN12(yellow) CN13(blue) CN12(yellow)

Vc TG TL Vc TG TL Vc TG TL Vc TG TL

Incorrect
Wiring
Vc TG TL
Remote
Remote Control Control
Switch (yellow) Switch

The unit No. and unit code are as below regardless of the indoor unit being connected to the remote
control switch.
Indoor Unit No. 00
Cycle System 00
Unit Code E.00

No
Is wiring among indoor Repair the wiring among
units right? indoor units.

Yes
JP4

Turn off the main power

switch and cut the wire JP4
at remote control switch,
then turn on the main power
switch again.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check Item (Turn OFF Main Switch)

Repair the wiring

Wiring Trouble Incorrect Wiring Check the wiring No.
correctly.

1-77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm
Compressor Protection
Code

 This alarm code appears when one of the following alarms occurs three times within 6 hours, which
may result in serious compressor damages, if the outdoor unit is continuously operated without
removing the cause.

Alarm Code: Content of Abnormality

02 Tripping of Protection Device in Outdoor Unit
07 Decrease in Discharge Gas Superheat
08 Increase in Discharge Gas Temperature
39 Abnormality of Running Current at Constant Comp.
43 Pressure Ratio Decrease Protection Activating
44 Low Pressure Increase Protection Activating
45 High Pressure Increase Protection Activating
46 High Pressure Decrease Protection Activating
47 Low Pressure Decrease Protection Activating

These alarms are able to be checked by the CHECK Mode 1. Follow the action indicated in each
alarm chart.
These alarms are cleared only by turning OFF the main power switch to the system. However,
careful attention is required before starting, since there is a possibility which will result in
serious damages to the compressors.

1-78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.2.3 Troubleshooting in Check Mode by Remote Control Switch

(PC-P1H)

Use the remote control CHECK switch in the following cases. FAN HIGH SWING
LOUVER ON/OFF TIMER SET TEMP.

(1) When the RUN lamp is flashing. COOL MED

HEAT LOW
ADDS RN HR
NO FUNCTION UNIT

(2) To trace back the cause of trouble after restarting from DRY A/C
DEFROST
+ CENTRAL
SERVICE
ABNML FILTER
AUTO VENT H.STRG T. RUN CHECK
stoppage with the RUN lamp flashing.
RUN / STOP TEMP.
(3) To check during normal operation or stoppage.
(4) To monitor the temperatures of intake and discharge air.
MODE FAN SPEED ON/OFF TIMER RESET

Check Check Mode 1: Current data will be displayed.

VENTI LOUVER CHECK
Mode TIME

Check Mode 2: Data held immediately before

failure, will be displayed.

Normal Mode
Indication will delay as transmission between the remote

control switch and indoor unit takes about 10 seconds.

All data may be displayed as "FF" or "-1" or "255".
CHECK
These transient data produced temporarily by software do
Press for more
not affect device functions at all. (The alarm code may also
than 3 seconds.
be indicated as "FF".)

HIGH
COOL
Alarm Code Identifying the Last Fault that has Occurred in
Unit Number and ADDS. RN the Indicated Unit.
Alarm Code Displayed A/C Unit number of connected unit or unit number for which
CHECK
checking mode was selected previously.

Perform within
Forward: Press the switch to rise

(A) 7 seconds to from 00 to 01 to 02 …
After check another unit.
Backward: Press the switch to descend
7 seconds from 15 to 14 to 13 …
HIGH
Check Mode 1 COOL
(See page 1-80 for To View the Previous Indication
A/C
details.) CHECK
TEMP
Press
HIGH
COOL

A/C
CHECK
To View the Next Indication
CHECK TEMP
Press for more Press
than 3 seconds.

Unit Number and

Alarm Code Displayed
Press to view the next data.
HIGH
Press to view the previous data.
See (A) COOL
ADDS. RN

A/C
After CHECK
7 seconds
HIGH
Check Mode 2 COOL
(See page 1-83 for
A/C
details.) CHECK

TEMP

HIGH
In Check Mode 2, Data of the first

COOL
Press three units connected serially to a
A/C remote control switch are available.
+
VENTI CHECK

You can press the CHECK switch to
CHECK
release Check Mode 2.
Check Mode Released Press Check Mode 1 cannot be released
even if you press the CHECK switch.

1-79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Although the wireless remote controller is used for wall type indoor unit with built-in receiver part, the
alarm code can be checked by connecting PC-P1H to the connector (Blue) of the unit as shown below and
pressing the operation switch.
NOTES:
1. The unit is not operated by pressing operation switch.
2. The above function is available only when alarm occurs.
3. The PCB check by remote controller is not available.
4. The indication is the data when connecting PC-P1H, not the data before the alarm occurs.

(1) Contents of Check Mode 1

>
The next indication is shown by pressing the part of “TEMP” switch. If the part of “TEMP” switch is

>
pressed the previous indication is shown.

Temperature Indication Indication of Category Code

Indication of Temperature, etc.

Indoor Unit Temp. Normal ……Temperature Displayed

1
Setting (oC)
- - Thermistor Open-circuited
or or PCB Defected
Indoor Unit Abnormal 129 (Temp. for Top of Comp.: 129)
2 Intake Air Temp.
at Thermistor (oC)
F F Thermistor Short-circuited
or or PCB Defected)
Indoor Unit 255
3 Discharge Air Temp. or
at Thermistor (oC) 127 (Temp. for Top of Comp.: 127)

See "1.3.1 Self-Checking of PCB's using

Indoor Unit Heat Remote Control Switch" in pages 1-103, 104.
4 Exchanger Liquid
Pipe Temp. (oC) (NOTE 1) During transient period such as starting time, etc.,
"- -" may be indicated for a limited time.

This is indicated only when a remote sensor is connected.

Temperature at The indication of "- -" is normally indicated.
5
Remote Sensor (oC)
RPK series can not connect a remote sensor.
Therefore indication is "- -".

Outdoor Unit
6 Ambient Air Temp.
(oC)

Indoor Unit Heat

7 Exchanger Gas
Pipe Temp. (oC)

Outdoor Unit
8 Evaporating Temp.
during Heating (oC)

This indicates the internal information for the remote

9 Control Information control switch. In case of SET-FREE, this indication
shows the operating compressor quantity.

Discharge Gas
10 Temp. at the Top of (ex.) During two compressors operation, average
Comp. Chamber (oC) temperature of two compressors is indicated.
In case that temperature is higher than 126oC, " ".

to next page
1-80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Thermo Temp. of
11 Remote Control Heating Thermo-ON Alarm FAN HIGH SWING
LOUVER ON/OFF TIMER SET TEMP.

Switch Cooling Thermo-ON Operation COOL MED

ADDS RN HR
HEAT LOW NO FUNCTION UNIT
DEFROST
Dark DRY A/C
+ CENTRAL
SERVICE
ABNML FILTER
AUTO VENT H.STRG T. RUN CHECK
H2
RUN / STOP TEMP.
Indication on Micro-Computer Input/Output 52H

Micro-Computer
12 Input/Output in Y52C2 Y211 MODE FAN SPEED ON/OFF TIMER RESET

Y212 Y52C1
Indoor Unit
VENTI LOUVER CHECK
Dark TIME
Y20B

Micro-Computer Y20A
13 Input/Output in
Outdoor Unit Outdoor Fan

Symbols with a letter Y are relays on PCB

00 Operation OFF, Power OFF
01 Thermo-OFF (NOTE 1)
02 Alarm (NOTE 2)
03 Freeze Protection, Overheating Protection
05 Instantaneous Power Failure at Outdoor Unit, Reset
(NOTE 3)
06 Instantaneous Power Failure at Indoor Unit, Reset (NOTE 4)
07 Stoppage of Cooling Operation due to Low Outdoor Air
Temperature, Stoppage of Heating Operation due to
Indication of Unit Stoppage Cause
High Outdoor Air Temperature
08 Compressor Quantity Changeover, Stoppage (HP > 8)
14 Cause of Stoppage 09 Demand of 4-Way Valve Changeover Stoppage (FX Only)
10 Demand, Enforced Stoppage
11 Retry due to Pressure Ratio Decrease
12 Retry due to Low Pressure Increase
13 Retry due to High Pressure Increase
14 Retry due to Abnormal Current of Constant Compressor
Abnormality Occurrence Counter (HP > 8)
15 Retry due to Abnormal High Temperature of Discharge
Abnormality Gas, Excessively Low Suction Pressure
15
Occurrence Times 16 Retry due to Decrease of Discharge Gas Superheat
17 Retry due to Inverter Tripping
18 Retry due to Voltage Decrease
19 Expansion Valve Opening Change Protection
Instantaneous Power
20 Operation Mode Changeover of Indoor Unit (NOTE 5)
16 Failure Occurrence
Times in Indoor Unit (NOTE 1) Explanation of Term,
Thermo-ON: A condition that an indoor unit is
requesting compressor to operate.
Thermo-OFF: A condition that an indoor unit is not
Transmission Error
requesting compressor to operate.
Occurrence Times (NOTE 2) Even if stoppage is caused by "Alarm", "02" is not
17 between Remote always indicated.
Control Switch and (NOTE 3) If transmission between the inverter printed circuit board
Indoor Unit and the control printed circuit board is not performed
during 30 seconds, the outdoor unit is stopped.
In this case, stoppage is d1-05 cause and the alarm
Abnormality code "04" may be indicated.
18 Occurrence Times (NOTE 4) If transmission between the indoor unit and the
on Inverter outdoor unit is not performed during 3 minutes,
indoor units are stopped.
In this case, stoppage is d1-06 cause and the alarm
code "03" may be indicated.
(NOTE 5) In the FSG and FS3 system "20" will be indicated
at the difference mode between indoor units.
Indication of Automatic Louver Condition
Countable up to 99.
Over 99 times, "99" is always indicated.
19 Louver Sensor (NOTE 1) If a transmitting error continues for 3 minutes, one
is added to the occurrence times.
(NOTE 2) The memorized data can be canceled by the
method indicated in 1.3.1 "Self-checking of PCBs
to next page using Remote Control Switch" in pages 1-103, 104.

1-81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Compressor Pressure/Frequency Indication

Discharge Pressure
20
(High) (x 0.1 MPa)

Suction Pressure
21
(Low) (x 0.01 MPa)

22 Control Information This is an indication for internal information for the remote
control switch. This does not have any specific meaning.

Operation
23 The total frequency is indicated when two compressors
Frequency (Hz)
are running.

Indoor Unit Capacity Indication

The capacity of the indoor unit is indicated as shown
in the table below.
24 Indoor Unit Capacity
Capacity Code of Indoor Unit
Indication Code Equivalent Capacity (HP)
06 0.8
08 1.0
10 1.3
25 Outdoor Unit Code
n 13 1.5
14 1.8
16 2.0
18 2.3
Refrigerant Cycle 20 2.5
26
Number 22 2.8
26 3.0
32 4.0
40 5.0
Refrigerant Cycle 64 8.0
27 80 10.0
Number
"n" indicates total number of indoor units;
n= ~ , , , , , , ,
Expansion Opening Indication (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

Indoor Unit
28 Expansion Valve J3: 01~16
Opening (%) (01: when shipment (DSW5), Decimal Indication)
J4: 00~0F
(00: when shipment (DSW5), Indication with 16 numbers)
Outdoor Unit
29 Expansion Valve
MV1 Opening (%)
In case of models without Expansion Valve (MV2),
the same figure is indicated.
Outdoor Unit
30 Expansion Valve
MV2 Opening (%)

Outdoor Unit
31 Expansion Valve FX Series Only
MVB Opening (%)

Estimated Electric Current Indication

Compressor
32 The total current is indicated when several
Running Current (A)
compressors are running.
In case of inverter compressor, the running current
Returns to Temperature Indication of primary side of inverter is indicated.
Temperature Indication

1-82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(2) Contents of Check Mode 2

The latest data of the first three indoor units only connected serially are indicated when more than three
indoor units are connected to one remote control switch.

>

>
By pressing the part of “TEMP” switch, the next display is indicated, If the part of “TEMP” switch is
pressed, the previous display is indicated.

Temperature Indication Indication of Category Code

Indication of Temperature, etc.

Indoor Unit Intake

1 Air Temp. at Normal ……Temperature Displayed
Thermistor (oC)
- - Thermistor Open-circuited
or or PCB Defected
Indoor Unit Abnormal 129 (Temp. for Top of Comp.: 129)
2 Discharge Air Temp.
at Thermistor (oC)
F F Thermistor Short-circuited
or or PCB Defected)
Indoor Unit Heat 255
Exchanger Liquid or
3
Pipe Temp. (Freeze 127 (Temp. for Top of Comp.: 127)
Protection) (oC)
See "1.3.1 Self-Checking of PCB's using
Remote Control Switch" in pages 1-103, 104.
Outdoor Air Temp.
4 (NOTE 1) During transient period such as starting time, etc.,
(oC)
"- -" may be indicated for a limited time.
(NOTE 2) All the data during the check mode 2 will be
changed to "00" if a power failure occurs during
Indoor Heat alarm indication.
5 Exchanger Gas
Pipe Temp. (oC)

Evaporating Temp.
6
at Heating (oC)

This is an indication for internal information for the

7 Control Information remote control switch.
This does not have any specific meaning.

Discharge Gas
8 Temp. at the Top of The average temperature is indicated when two
Comp. Chamber (oC) compressors are running.

to next page

1-83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Compressor Pressure/Frequency Indication

Discharge Pressure
9
(High) (x 0.1 MPa)

Suction Pressure
10
(Low) (x 0.01 MPa)

11 Control Information This is an indication for internal information for the remote
control switch. This does not have any specific meaning.

Operating
12 The total frequency is indicated when plural compressor
Frequency (Hz)
are running.

Expansion Opening Indication

Indoor Unit
13 Expansion Valve
Opening (%)

Outdoor Unit
14 Expansion Valve
MV1 Opening (%)

Estimated Electric Current Indication

Compressor
15 The total value is indicated when plural compressors
Running Current (A)
are running.
Returns to Temperature Indication
Temperature Indication

1-84

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.2.4 Troubleshooting by 7-Segment Display

(1) Checking Method by 7-Segment Display
By using the 7-segments and check switch (PSW) on the PCB1 in the outdoor unit, total quantity of
combined indoor units, 7-segments operation conditions and each part of refrigeration cycle, can be
checked.

PSW Check
To start checking, press the "PSW2" switch

Manual Ref. Cycle
Defrost Auto Check for more than 3 seconds.

To proceed checking, press the "PSW2" switch
for less than 2 seconds.
PSW3 PSW2
To proceed reversely, press the "PSW3" switch
PSW1 PSW2 PSW3 PSW4
for less than 2 seconds.

To cancel this checking, press the "PSW2"
7-Segment Backward Forward
switch for more than 3 seconds. The display
will be changed to the indication one step before.
Then, press the "PSW2" switch once again for
SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 more than 3 seconds.
Y20D Y52C4
Checking Item PSW3 PSW2 Y20A Y52C1
Checking Contents Y20B Y52C2
Output State of Outdoor Y20C
1 Y52C3
Micro-Computer PSW2 PSW3 YOH YRS
AC
Y211 Chopper
Y212 YFAN2

PSW3 PSW2
(Unit)
Total of Thermo-ON
2
Indoor Units Capacity PSW2 PSW3 1
~ (x
8
HP)

PSW3 PSW2

Running Frequency of
3
Inverter Compressor MC1 PSW2 PSW3
~ (Hz)

PSW3 PSW2

Number of Running
4
Compressor PSW2 PSW3
~
PSW3 PSW2

5 Air Flow Ratio

PSW2 PSW3
~
PSW3 PSW2

Outdoor Expansion Valve

6
MV1 Opening PSW2 PSW3
~ (%)

PSW3 PSW2

Outdoor Expansion Valve

7
MV2 Opening PSW2 PSW3
~ (%)
(For 16 to 30HP)

1-85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

from Previous Page

Checking Item PSW3 PSW2
Checking Contents
Outdoor Expansion Valve
8
MV3 Opening PSW2 PSW3
~ (%)
(For 24, 30HP)
PSW3 PSW2

Outdoor Expansion Valve

9
MVB Opening PSW2 PSW3
~ (%)
(For 24, 30HP)
PSW3 PSW2

Discharge Pressure
10
(High) PSW2 PSW3
~ (MPa)

PSW3 PSW2

Suction Pressure
11
(Low) PSW2 PSW3
~ (MPa)

PSW3 PSW2
Discharge Gas
12 Temperature on the Top of
PSW2 PSW3
Compressor MC1 (TD1) ~ (oC)

PSW3 PSW2 : Open-circuited

: Short-circuited
Discharge Gas
13 Temperature on the Top of
PSW2 PSW3
Compressor MC2 (TD2) ~ (oC)
(For 8 to 30HP)
PSW3 PSW2 : Open-circuited
: Short-circuited
Discharge Gas
14 Temperature on the Top of
PSW2 PSW3
Compressor MC3 (TD3) ~ (oC)
(For 16 to 30HP)
PSW3 PSW2 : Open-circuited
: Short-circuited
Discharge Gas
15 Temperature on the Top of
PSW2 PSW3
Compressor MC4 (TD4) ~ (oC)
(For 20 to 30HP)
PSW3 PSW2 : Open-circuited
: Short-circuited
Evaporating Temperature 1
16
at Heating PSW2 PSW3
~ (oC)

PSW3 PSW2 : Open-circuited

: Short-circuited
Evaporating Temperature 2
17
at Heating PSW2 PSW3
~ (oC)
(For 16 to 30HP)
PSW3 PSW2 : Open-circuited
: Short-circuited
Evaporating Temperature 3
18
at Heating PSW2 PSW3
~ (oC)
(For 24, 30HP)
: Open-circuited
: Short-circuited

1-86

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

from Previous Page

Checking Item PSW3 PSW2
Checking Contents
Ambient Air Temperature
19
(TO) PSW2 PSW3
~ (oC)

PSW3 PSW2 : Open-circuited

: Short-circuited
Estimated Running Current
20
of Compressor MC1 PSW2 PSW3
~ (A)

PSW3 PSW2 Indicates running current of

primary side of inverter.
Estimated Running Current
21
of Compressor MC2 PSW2 PSW3
~ (A)
(For 8 to 30HP)
PSW3 PSW2

Estimated Running Current

22
of Compressor MC3 PSW2 PSW3
~ (A)
(For 16 to 30HP)
PSW3 PSW2

Estimated Running Current

23
of Compressor MC4 PSW2 PSW3
~ (A)
(For 20 to 30P)
PSW3 PSW2

PSW2 PSW3 (No.0 Unit)

Indoor Unit
(No.0 Unit) ~ (%)
~

24 Expansion
Valve Opening PSW3 PSW2
(No.F Unit)
PSW2 PSW3 (No.F Unit)

(Indicates only the units number

~ (%)

connected) PSW3 PSW2

Indoor Unit PSW2 PSW3 (No.0 Unit)

Heat (No.0 Unit) (oC)
Exchanger ~
~

25 Liquid Pipe
Temperature PSW3 PSW2
(Freeze (No.F Unit)
Protection)
PSW2 PSW3 (No.F Unit)
~ (oC)
(Indicates only the units number
connected) PSW3 PSW2

PSW2 PSW3 (No.0 Unit)

Indoor Unit (No.0 Unit) (oC)
Heat ~
~

26 Exchanger
Gas Pipe PSW3 PSW2
Temperature (No.F Unit)
PSW2 PSW3 (No.F Unit)
~ (oC)
(Indicates only the units number
connected)

1-87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

from Previous Page

Checking Item PSW3 PSW2
Checking Contents
PSW2 PSW3 (No.0 Unit)
(No.0 Unit) (oC)
Indoor Unit ~

~
27 Intake Air
Temperature PSW3 PSW2
(No.F Unit)
PSW2 PSW3 (No.F Unit)
~ (oC)
(Indicates only the units number
connected) PSW3 PSW2

PSW2 PSW3 (No.0 Unit)

(No.0 Unit) (oC)
Indoor Unit ~
~

~
28 Discharge Air
Temperature PSW3 PSW2
(No.F Unit)
PSW2 PSW3 (No.F Unit)
~ (oC)
(Indicates only the units number
connected) PSW3 PSW2

PSW2 PSW3 (No.0 Unit) 1

(No.0 Unit) (x HP)
8
Indoor Unit
~

29 Capacity Refer to the "Capacity Code of Indoor Unit"

Setting PSW3 PSW2
table for the capacity code indication.
(No.F Unit)
PSW2 PSW3 (No.F Unit) 1
(x HP)
8
(Indicates only the units number
connected) PSW3 PSW2 Refer to the "Capacity Code of Indoor Unit"
table for the capacity code indication.

PSW2 PSW3 (No.0 Unit)

(No.0 Unit)
Indoor Unit Refer to page 1-81.
~

30 Cause of
Stoppage PSW3 PSW2
(No.F Unit)
PSW2 PSW3 (No.F Unit)

(Indicates only the units number Refer to page 1-81.

connected) PSW3 PSW2
Pressure Ratio Fall
31 Protection Degeneration 0: Degeneration Control is
PSW2 PSW3 in Operation
Control
1: Degeneration Control is not
in Operation
PSW3 PSW2
High-Pressure Rise
32 Protection Degeneration 0: Degeneration Control is
PSW2 PSW3 in Operation
Control
1: Degeneration Control is not
in Operation
PSW3 PSW2
Discharge Gas Temp.
33 Increase Protection 0: Degeneration Control is
PSW2 PSW3 in Operation
Degeneration Control
1: Degeneration Control is not
in Operation

1-88

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

from Previous Page

Checking Item PSW3 PSW2
Discharge Gas Temp. Checking Contents
34 Decrease Protection 0: Degeneration Control is
PSW2 PSW3 in Operation
Degeneration Control
1: Degeneration Control is not
in Operation
PSW3 PSW2

Current Protection
35 0: Degeneration Control is
Degeneration Control PSW2 PSW3 in Operation
1: Degeneration Control is not
in Operation
PSW3 PSW2

Total Accumulated hours

36
of Compressor MC1 PSW2 PSW3 ~
(x 10 times hours)
PSW3 PSW2 displayed in 4 digit number

Total Accumulated hours

37
of Compressor MC2 PSW2 PSW3 ~
(For 8 to 30HP) (x 10 times hours)
PSW3 PSW2 displayed in 4 digit number

Total Accumulated hours

38
of Compressor MC3 PSW2 PSW3 ~
(For 16 to 30HP) (x 10 times hours)
PSW3 PSW2 displayed in 4 digit number

Total Accumulated hours

39
of Compressor MC4 PSW2 PSW3 ~
(For 20 to 30HP) (x 10 times hours)
PSW3 PSW2 displayed in 4 digit number
The Latest Alarm Code
40 Cause of Stoppage at
PSW2 PSW3
Outdoor Unit

PSW3 PSW2 The latest alarm code of stoppage cause

is indicated.
Cause of Stoppage at
41
Inverter PSW2 PSW3
~
PSW3 PSW2

Total Capacity Setting

42
of Indoor Unit PSW2 PSW3 1
~ (x
8
HP)

PSW3 PSW2

Total Quantity of
43
Combined Indoor Unit PSW2 PSW3
~ (sets)

PSW3 PSW2

Address of Refrigerant
44
System PSW2 PSW3
~
Indicates setting address by DSW1
Returns to START " "

1-89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(2) Running Current of Compressor

Inverter Primary Current
The inverter primary current is estimated from the running current of the compressor MC1 indicated
on 7-segments, as chart below.

35
Upper Limit

Invent Primary Current (A)

30

25

20 Lower Limit

15

10

5 10 15 20 25 30
Running Current of Compressor MC1
Indicated on 7- segment

Indicated Running Current of Compressor MC2, MC3, MC4

The running current of the compressor MC2, MC3, MC4 is detected by current sensor. (CT2 to CT4)

Cause of Stoppage for Inverter (Content of Check Item " ")

Remark
Cause of Stoppage for
Code Cause Indication
Corresponding Unit
during Retry Alarm Code
Automatic Stoppage of Transistor Module
(IPM Error)
(Over Current, Decrease Voltage,
Increase Temperature)
Instantaneous Over Current

Abnormal Inverter Fin Thermistor

Electronic Thermal Activation

Inverter Voltage Decrease

Increase Voltage

Abnormal Current Sensor

Instantaneous Power Failure Detection

Reset of Micro-Computer for Inverter

Earth Fault Detection for Compressor
(Only Starting)
Abnormal Power Source Phase

1-90

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Protection Control Code on 7-Segment Display

(a) The protection control indication can be seen on 7-segments when a protection control is
activated.
(b) The 7-segment continues ON while function is working, and goes out when released.
(c) When several protection controls are activated, code number with higher priority will be indicated
(see below for the priority order).
• Higher priority is given to protection control related to frequency control than the other.
<Priority Order>
* Pressure Ratio Control
* High-Pressure Rise Protection
* Current Protection
* Discharge Gas Temperature Rise Protection
* Low-Pressure Fall Protection
* Reversing Valve Switching Control (For 16, 20HP and FX Series)
* High-Pressure Decrease Protection
* Oil Return Control
• In relation to retry control, the latest retrial will be indicated unless a protection control related to
frequency control is indicated.

Code Protection Control Code Protection Control

Running Current Limit Control
Pressure Ratio Control (*)
(For 24, 30HP)

High-Pressure Increase Pressure Ratio Decrease

Protection (*) Retry

Low-Pressure Increase
Current Protection (*)
Retry
Inverter Fin Temperature High-Pressure Increase
Increase Protection
(For 24, 30HP) Retry

Discharge Gas Temperature Over Current Retry of

Increase Protection (*) Constant Compressor

Low-Pressure Decrease Vacuum/Discharge Gas

Protection Temperature Increase Retry

4-Way Valve Switching Control Discharge Gas SUPERHEAT

(For 16, 20HP) Decrease Retry

Oil Return Control Inverter Trip Retry

High-Pressure Decrease Insufficient Voltage/

Protection Excessive Voltage Retry

In the case that degeneration control is

activated, c is indicated in stead of 0. (*mark)

• Retry indication continues for 30 minutes unless a protection control is indicated.

• Retry indication disappears if the stop signal comes from all indoor units.

NOTE:
The protection control code being indicated on 7-segment display is changed to an alarm code when the
abnormal operation occurs. Also, the same alarm code is indicated on the remote control switch.

1-91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Activating Condition of Protection Control Code

For following the conditions as the temperature change, etc., the control of frequency, etc. is performed to
prevent the abnormal conditions by the protection control.
The activating conditions of protection control are shown in the table below.
Code Protection Control Activating Condition Remarks
Pressure Ratio Compression Ratio>9 => Frequency Decrease Ps: Suction Pressure of
P01
Control (Pd/(Ps+1.3))<2.2 => Frequency Increase Compressor
High-Pressure Pd: Discharge Pressure of
P02 Pd>2.4MPa => Frequency Decrease
Increase Protection Compressor
Inverter Output Current>25A (220V),
P03 Current Protection -
14A (380, 415V) => Frequency Decrease
P04
Inverter Fin Temperature Inverter Fin Temperature>94oC -
Increase Protection => Frequency Decrease
Temperature at the top of compressor is high
Discharge Gas
=> Frequency Increase
P05 Temperature Increase -
(Maximum temperature is different
Protection
depending on the frequency.)
Low-Pressure is Excessively Low
Low-Pressure => Frequency Increase
P06 -
Decrease Protection (Minimum pressure is different
depending on the ambient temperature.)
When Switching
For ∆P<0.5MPa => Frequency Increase
16, 20HP
4-Way Valve ∆P>1.3MPa => Frequency Decrease
P07 Switching ∆P = Pd - Ps
Control When Switching
For ∆P<1.0MPa => Frequency Increase
24, 30HP
∆P>2.1MPa => Frequency Decrease
For Frequency less than 40Hz is maintained for
5 to 20HP more than 1 hour. => Frequency>40Hz
P08 Oil Return Frequency less than 120Hz at cooling -
Control For (150Hz at heating) is maintained for more
24, 30HP than 1 hour => Frequency>120Hz at cooling
(150Hz at heating)
Pd<0.69MPa => Frequency Increase
High-Pressure (When Cooling Operation) Pd: Discharge Pressure of
P09
Decrease Protection Pd<1.57MPa => Frequency Increase Compressor
(When Heating Operation)
Setting Value:
Running Current Limit Upper limit of total running
Running Current for Comp.>Setting Value
P0A Control current is set 80%, 70% and
=> Frequency Decrease
(For 24, 30HP) 60% at normal operation
using input on PCB.
Pressure Ratio When activating 3 times in an
P11 Compression Ratio (Pd/(Ps+1.3)<1.8)
Decrease Retry hour, "43" alarm is indicated.
Low-Pressure When activating 3 times in an
P12 Ps>0.9MPa
Increase Retry hour, "44" alarm is indicated.
For Ps>2.7MPa
High-Pressure 5 to 20HP (In case of 20 to 30Hz: Pd>2.5MPa)
P13 When activating 3 times in an
Increase
For hour, "45" alarm is indicated.
Retry Ps>2.7MPa
24, 30HP
Overcurrent Retry of Current>Maximum Value(*1), When activating 3 times in an
P14
Constant Compressor or Current<0.9A hour, "39" alarm is indicated.
In Case of
Ps>0.02MPa over 12 minutes, When activating 3 times in
Vacuum/Discharge Gas
Discharge Gas Temperature>132oC over 30 minutes, "47"(Ps) or "08"
P15 Temperature
10 minutes (Discharge Gas) alarm is
Increase Retry
or Discharge Gas Temperature>140oC over indicated.
5 seconds
Discharge For Discharge Gas SUPERHEAT less than
Gas 5 to 20HP 10 deg. is maintained for an hour. When activating 2 times in
P16 SUPERHEAT 2 hours (90min. For 24, 30HP),
Decrease For Discharge Gas SUPERHEAT less than "07" alarm is indicated.
Retry 24, 30HP 10 deg. is maintained for 30 minutes.
Automatic Stoppage of Transistor Module, When activating 3 times in
P17 Inverter Trip Retry Activation of Electronic Thermal 30 minutes, "51", "52" and
or Abnormal Current Sensor "53" alarm is indicated.
Insufficient Voltage When activating 3 times in
P18 Insufficient/Excessive Voltage at Inverter
/Excessive Voltage 30 minutes, "06" alarm is
Circuit or CB Connector Part
Retry indicated.

1-92

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

NOTES:
1. During protection control (except during alarm stoppage), the protection control code is indicated.
2. The protection control code is indicated during protection control and turns off when canceling the
protection control.
3. After retry control, the condition of monitoring is continued for 30 minutes.
4. The maximum value (*1) is as follows.

380-415V 50Hz 380V 60Hz 220V 60Hz

8HP 12.1A 12.6A 23.9A
10HP 15.0A 15.8A 30.5A
16HP 17.8A 18.8A 36.2A
20HP 17.8A 18.8A 36.2A

380-415V 50Hz 380V 60Hz 220V 60Hz

Comp.2 Comp.3, 4 Comp.2 Comp.3, 4 Comp.2 Comp.3, 4
24HP 17.8A 21.6A 18.8A 22.8A 36.2A 43.9A
30HP 17.8A 31.7A 18.8A 33.4A 36.2A 64.5A

1-93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.2.5 Function of RSW, DSWs and LEDs

(1) Printed Circuit Board in Indoor Unit
( * Following figure shows a separated-board type PCB.)

1 2
Before Alteration After Alteration
a RCI - a-2
b RPI (0.8 to 5.0HP) b-1 b-2
c RCD c-1 c-2
d RPC d-1 d-2
e RPK e-1 e-2
f RPF, RPFI f-1 -
g RPI (8, 10HP) g-1 -
h KPI - h-2

(a-2)
1 12

PCN1 CN11 CN7 CN8 CN17 CN25 CN6 CN3 CN1

3
PCN4
PCN7 RSW 5
LED4
CN14 HA JP5
DSW3
PCN6
LED1
DSW5
JP1 JP2
PCN5 EF2 IC11
JP3 JP4
EF1 DSW7
CN2 TP CN19 THM5 THM4 THM3 THM2 THM1
LED3

7 11 9

(b-1) (c-1) (b-2) (c-2) (d-2) (h-2)

7 13 1 3 6 5
7 1 3 6

PCN2

CN2 THM1 THM2 THM3 THM4 THM5 CN1925

PCN3
DSW3
EF2 CN3 CN4 HA CN14 EF1
CN12 DSW6
SV1 PCN5
CN13 IP
DSW7
RSV YH2
LED1
LED3 DSW5

JP1 LED4 CN9

PCN6
HIC1

EFR1
ICI2 ICI1
DM2
EFS1

CN8 CN11 PCN7

PCN1 PCN4
CN7 CN17 CN1

11 9 10 12 2 5 9 11 12

(d-1) (f-1) (g-1)

4 7 9 10 12

2 5 6 3 1 11

1-94

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(e-1) (e-2)
2 1 5 2 9 10 11 12 5 1 3 2 7 9 10 12

2 2

■ Dip Switch and LED Functions on Indoor Unit Printed Circuit Board (Dip Switch/
: With, : Without)
Dip Switch
b-2
Part d-1
Contents of Functions b-1 c-2 Remarks
Name a-2 f-1 e-1 e-2
c-1 d-2
g-1
h-2
1 RSW Setting of Indoor Unit Number





-
2 DSW2 Setting of Optional Functions A. a-2, b-1, b-2, c-1, c-2, d-2:
A. Self-Diagnosis No Function
B. Remote ON/OFF Control B. a-2, b-1, b-2, c-1, c-2, d-2:
C. Automatic Restart after Short Power Failure Dip Switch Setting is Not
D. Control by Field-Supplied Room Thermostat Required. (The Setting of
Remote Control Switch is
  


Required.)
C. a-2, b-1, b-2, c-1, c-2, d-2:
Same as B
D. a-2, b-1, b-2, c-1, c-2, d-2:
Same as B
h-2:
No Function
3 DSW3 Setting of Indoor Unit Capacity Code





-
4 DSW4 Setting of Capacity Adjustment   
  -
5 DSW5 Setting of Refrigerant Cycle No. Setting h-2:







For Option Setting
6 DSW6 Setting of Unit Code h-2:



  For Refrigerant Cycle Setting
(In Case of Using H-LINK)
7 DSW7 Setting of Fuse Recover





-
9 LED1 This LED1 indicates the transmission state
(Red) between the indoor unit and remote control switch.






-
Normal Condition: Flickering
Abnormal Condition: Activated or Deactivated
10 LED2 This LED2 indicates the transmission state
(Green) between the indoor unit and central station.
(When Disconnected: Deactivated) 


 -
Normal Condition: Flickering
Abnormal Condition: Activated or Deactivated
11 LED3 This LED3 indicates the transmission state
(Yellow) between the indoor unit and outdoor unit.
Normal Condition: Flickering one time/
some seconds






-
Abnormal Condition: Activated or Deactivated
more than 30 seconds
or Flickering
(30 times/1 second)
12 LED4 This LED4 indicates the power supply (5V)
(Red) for micro-computer.






-
Normal Condition: Activated
Abnormal Condition: Deactivated
13 SW1 Setting of Transmission  
   -

1-95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(2) Printed Circuit Board in Outdoor Unit

Arrangement
Inside of Main Electrical Box (380-415V/50Hz, 380V/60Hz)
RAS-5FSG, RAS-5FS3
Before Manufacturing # U4MV0196

After Manufacturing # U4MV0197

RAS-8~20FSG, RAS-8~20FS3, RAS-8 and 10FXG, RAS-8 and 10FX3

Before Manufacturing # U4NG1001 (FSG/FS3 Series)

EF7, EF8, CT3, CMC3, NF11: Only for RAS-16FSG, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FSG and RAS-20FS3

After Manufacturing # U4NG1002 (FSG/FS3 Series) / From First Production (FXG/ FX3 Series)

EF7, EF8, CT3, CMC3, NF11: Only for RAS-16FSG, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FSG and RAS-20FS3

1-96

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5, RAS- 30FSG1 and RAS-30FS5

Electrical Control Box of Outdoor Unit

Front Side (For Inverter) Front Side (For Control)

EF1
DCL CMC1
NF1 NF2 NF4
C1 NF3
Z CMC3 CMC4 TB4
EF2
PCB2 ISPM TF1
TB5
CB1 CB2 EF9 PCB1 TB3
CA2
NF7
R1 R2 CMC2 TB1
NF10
TF2
TB2

The Interior of
the Electrical Control Box

EF3
NF2 NF4
EF4 NF3 TB4
CMC3 CMC4
EF5
EF6
EF7
NF5 TB3
EF8

CMC2 TB1
NF10

TB2
CA1 CA3 C2 C3 C4 C5

Inside of Main Electrical Box (220V/60Hz)

RAS-5FSG, RAS-5FS3

RAS-8~20FSG, RAS-8~20FS3

1-97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5, RAS- 30FSG1 and RAS-30FS5

Electrical Control Box of Outdoor Unit

Front Side Front Side

EF1
DCL NF1
EF2
TB4
EF11 EF8
ISPM2 ISPM1 TB5 CMC3 CMC4 EF7
TB3
CMC1 NF10 EF12
CB EF6
EF5
CA1 TB1
EF4
CMC2 EF3 CA3 TB2

The Interior of
the Electrical Control Box

TB4

CMC3 CMC4
PCB1 TB3
TF1

CMC2 TB1
TF2
TB2

Purpose
Symbol PCB Purpose
PCB1 for Control 1. Transmitting between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit
2. Processing for Sensor Input
3. Processing for Dip Switch Input
4. Operation Control for Above Items 1 to 3.
Compressor Operation Control, Bypass Valve Control, Fan Control
and Overcurrent Control
5. 7-Segment Indication
6. Processing of Safety Device Input
7. Processing of Relay Output
8. Reverse Phase Detection for Power Source
PCB2 for Fan Fan Speed Control
PCB3 for Inverter 1. Inverter power part is driven by instruction of PCB1 and compressor
is driven.
2. Overcurrent Control
3. Protection Control for Inverter Part
PCB5 for "SNUBBER" 1. Restraining of Surge Voltage added to Transistor Module (IPM)
2. Absorbing for Switching Noise of Transistor Module (IPM)

1-98

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

a. Control Printed Circuit Board: PCB1

G 5HP to 20HP

2 3 4 5

14

11
1
12
6 13

10

15

16 8 18 9 18

G 24HP and 30HP

2 3 4 5

14

11
1
12
6 13

10

15

16 8 18 9 18

1-99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Dip Switches and LED Functions on Outdoor Unit Printed Circuit Boards
Name of Internal
Part Name Contents of Functions
Circuit Board
Controlling Board: 1 DSW1 Setting of Outdoor Unit Number
PCB1 2 DSW2 Setting of Capacity Code
Outdoor unit capacity is set according to nominal capacity (HP).
3 DSW3 Setting of Height Difference
The height difference between outdoor and indoor units is set.
4 DSW4 A. Test Running for Cooling or Heating
An outdoor unit can be run for testing. When testing has been
finished, reset the function.
B. Forced Stoppage of Compressor
When performing test running or inspection, compressors
can be forcedly stopped to ensure safety.
5 DSW5 A. Changeover of Defrosting Condition
(Optional The defrosting operation for normal areas or cold areas
Function) can be changed over.
B. #7 of Pin: 380V OFF, 415V ON
#8 of Pin: 220V ON
6 DSW6 Setting of Piping Length
The total piping length between the outdoor unit and indoor unit
is set.
7 DSW7 Setting of Emergency Operation
8 DSW8 Test Operation and Service Setting II
No setting is required.
9 DSW9 Optional Function 2
10 DSW10 Transmitting Setting
11 PSW1 Manual Defrosting Switch
The defrosting operation is manually available under the forced
defrosting area.
12 PSW2 Check Switches
13 PSW3 When checking units, checking items can be selected by these
switches.
14 LED1 Power Source for PCB1
(Red) Normal Condition: Activated
Abnormal Condition: Deactivated
15 LED2 This LED2 indicates the transmission state between the PCB1
(Green) and PCB3.
Normal Condition: Flickering
Abnormal Condition: Activated or Deactivated
16 LED3 This LED3 indicates the transmission state between the
(Yellow) indoor unit and outdoor unit.
Normal Condition: Flickering
Abnormal Condition: Activated or Deactivated
18 SGE1 These indicate the following: "alarm", "protective safety device
SGE2 has tripped" or "checking items".

1-100

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

b. Inverter Printed Circuit Board: PCB3

LED2

DSW1

LED1

• Dip Switch and LED Functions on Outdoor Unit Inverter Printed Circuit Board
Switch Name
Function
DSW1
Normal: No.1 and No.2 of DSW1 are OFF.
Emergency Operation or Troubleshooting:
ON
No.1 of DSW1 is ON.
OFF
No.2 of DSW1 is OFF.
The above setting aims not to trip even if the CT detects 0A.

Name of Printed
Function
Circuit Board
LED1 (Red) This indicates the state of transmission.
Flickering: Normal Transmission
Activated or Deactivated: Abnormality in Transmission Circuit
* LED2 (Red) This indicates the voltage between both terminal of capacitor
CB1 and CB2 for inverter part.
Activated: The voltage between both terminals of capacitor,
CB is 50V +20V or greater.
Deactivated: The voltage between both terminals of capacitor,
CB is 50V +20V or smaller.
*: Applied to the following products;
1) RAS-8 to 20FSG/FS3
380-415V, 50Hz Model and 380V, 60Hz Model (After Manufacturing # U4NG1002)
220V, 60Hz Model (From The First Production)
2) RAS-5FSG/FS3
380-415V, 50Hz Model and 380V, 60Hz Model (After Manufacturing # U4MV0197)
3) RAS-8, 10FXG/FX3
From First Production

1-101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

c. “SNUBBER” Board: PCB5

This PCB is applied to the following products only;
1) RAS-5FSG/FS3
380-415V, 50Hz Model and 380V, 60Hz Model (Before Manufacturing # U4MV0196)
2) RAS-8 to 20FSG/FS3
380-415V, 50Hz Model and 380V, 60Hz Model (Before Manufacturing # U4NG1001)

LED3

• LED Function on Outdoor Unit Printed Circuit Board

Name of Printed
Function
Circuit Board
LED3 (Red) This indicates the voltage between both terminal of capacitor
CB1 and CB2 for inverter part.
Activated: The voltage between both terminals of capacitor,
CB is 50V +20V or greater.
Deactivated: The voltage between both terminals of capacitor,
CB is 50V +20V or smaller.

1-102

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.3 Procedure of Checking Each Main Parts

1.3.1 Self-Checking of PCBs using Remote Control Switch
The following troubleshooting procedure is utilized for function test of PCBs in the indoor unit and outdoor
unit.
RUN/STOP

Press
Stop Operation FAN HIGH SWING
LOUVER ON/OFF TIMER SET TEMP.
COOL MED
ADDS RN HR
HEAT LOW NO FUNCTION UNIT
DEFROST
DRY A/C SERVICE
ABNML FILTER
+ CENTRAL
AUTO VENT H.STRG T. RUN CHECK

RUN / STOP
Simultaneously depress TEMP.
TEMP two switches for 3 seconds.

PCB Check Mode CHECK MODE FAN SPEED ON/OFF TIMER RESET

VENTI LOUVER CHECK

TIME

(ex.) Indication of Unit No. "0"

Indication of ADDS. RN

Unit Number
Indi-
Contents
After cation
7 Seconds Normal

Abnormality (Open-circuit, Short-circuit, etc.) in circuit for

Operating Automatic Intake Air Temp. Thermistor

PCB Check Discharge Air Temp. Thermistor

Liquid Pipe Temp. Thermistor

After Approx. 5 sec. (Max. 30 sec. in
Result Remote Thermistor Abnormality
case of transmission failure between
indoor unit and outdoor unit) Gas Pipe Temp. Thermistor
Indoor
Max. 3 Types of Abnormalities indicated. Remote Sensor Unit
PCB
Transmission of Central Station

Abnormality (1) EEPROM

Zero Cross Input Failure

After Transmission of Indoor Unit during

1 Seconds This Checking Operation

Transmission of Outdoor Unit

Abnormality (2) ITO Input Failure

PSH Input Failure

After Protection Signal Detection Circuit
1 Seconds
Phase Detection
Outdoor
Transmission of Inverter Unit
Abnormality (3) PCB
High Pressure Sensor

Comp. Discharge Gas Temp. Thermistor

After Low Pressure Sensor
Contents
1 Seconds
Heat Exchanger Evaporation Temp. Thermistor
to next page Ambient Air Temp. Thermistor

For performing the above checking in the case that the wireless remote control switch is used with the
bulit-in receiver part of the RPK type indoor unit, perform the following procedures;
(1) Turn OFF the power supply.
(2) Disconnect the connector (CN25) on PCB(M).
(3) Connect PC-P1H to the Connectors CN12 or CN13.
(4) Turn ON the power supply.
After completion of checking, turn OFF the power supply again and make connectors as before checking.

1-103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

from previous page

CHECK In case that there is a second unit. TEMP

<Self-checking Indication of the Next Unit>

Press

(ex.)
Repetition of Self-checking of Unit No. "0". Indication of ADDS. RN

Unit No. "1"

After
7 Seconds

Result
After 1 to 5 Seconds

After 1 Second

Repetition

RESET

Release PCB
Check Mode

Press

NOTES:

(1) If this indication is continued and “J1” is not shown, this

ADDS. RN indicates that each one of indoor units is not connected to
the remote control switch. Check the wiring between the
remote control switch and indoor unit.
(2) In this troubleshooting procedure, checking of the following part of the PCB’s is not available.
PCB in Indoor Unit: Relay Circuit, Dip Switch, Option Circuit, Fan Circuit, Protection Circuit
PCB in Outdoor Unit: Relay Circuit, Dip Switch, Option Circuit
(3) In the case that this troubleshooting is performed in the system using the central station, indication
of the central station may change during this procedure. However, this is not abnormal.
(4) After this troubleshooting, the memory of abnormality occurrence times described on page 1-81 will
be deleted.

1-104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.3.2 Self-Checking of Remote Control Switch

Cases where CHECK switch is utilized.
1. If the remote control switch readouts malfunction.
2. For regular maintenance check.

Changing of LCD Indication

1 Turn ON the power source. Only for Indicating
No. LCD Indication Period
cancellation (sec.)
of EEPROM,
depress the HIGH TEMP.
Simultaneously depress the following COOL
For
following 3 switches. (During 3 switches 1 1 second
operation, they can be depressed.) simultaneously
DRY
+
SERVICE
ABNML

2
TEMP MODE during changing
LCD indication.
MED
TEMP 2 HEAT For
A/C
DEFROST
FILTER
1 second
CENTRAL

The LCD indication changes as

3 TEMP
shown in the right figure.
3 LOW
ADDS RN HR
NO FUNCTION UNIT
For
SERVICE
1 second
MODE H.STRG
After the LCD indication changes
as shown in the right figure, the FAN SWING
LOUVER ON/OFF TIMER SET
RUN indicator flickers twice.
For
4 4
1 second
To 11 AUTO VENT T. RUN CHECK

SWING
FAN HIGH LOUVER ON/OFF TIMER SET TEMP.
COOL MED
5 HEAT LOW
ADDS RN HR
NO FUNCTION UNIT
For
DRY A/C
DEFROST
SERVICE
ABNML FILTER
3 seconds
+ CENTRAL
The LCD indication changes as AUTO VENT H.STRG T. RUN CHECK

shown below.
Depress all the switches
(13 switches) -one by one.
Every time the switch is depressed,
the number of the indication of (A)
part in the figure below increases
one by one.
A

NOTES:
1. Any order of depressing Unless all the switches are depressed,
switches is available. the checking do not proceed to the next item.
2. Depressing 2 or more switches
simultaneously is invalid and
not counted.

The LCD indication changes as

shown below.
The remote control switch
automatically starts to check the In case that the transmission circuit is abnormal,
6 transmission circuit. the LCD indication remains as the left figure and
the checking do not proceed to the next item.

To the next page

1-105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

The LCD indication changes as

shown below.
The detected temperature of remote
control thermostat is indicated at
the part (A) in the figure below.
If the number "- -" or "FF" is indicated at the (A)
7 A part, the remote control thermostat is abnormal.

The LCD indication changes as In case of depressing the RESET switch or

shown below. leaving the switches for 15 seconds, the data
of EEPROM (storage cell inside of the remote
8 control switch) is cleared.
At this time, the number is indicated at the (A)
part shown in the figure below. When the
number "99" is indicated, EEPROM is abnormal.
In case that EEPROM is not canceled,
depress the CHECK switch.
A

The number indicated at the (A) part is "99",

the checking do not proceed to the next item.

Cancellation of EEPROM
The LCD indication changes as
shown below. 3

9
The LCD indication changes as
After several seconds are passed, shown below and the EEPROM is
the remote control switch is automatically canceled by the
automatically activated again. remote control switch.
11

When the remote control switch is

activated again, the RUN indicator
is ON and the operation is started.
Therefore, depress switch and
stop operation. The LCD indication changes as
RUN/STOP shown below.

12
NOTES: After several seconds are passed,
10 1. In case that the operation is not the remote control switch is
automatically started when the automatically activated again.
remote control switch is In this case, the operation is not
activated again, the detection started automatically.
circuit for momentary stoppage
may be abnormal.
However, it would not interfere
the normal operation.
2. There is a case that the
operation is automatically
stopped after the automatic
operation when the remote
control switch is activated again.

1-106

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.3.3 Self-Checking of Indoor Unit PCB

(Except for: RCI, RCD, RPI (0.8 to 5.0HP), RPC (After Alteration) and KPI)
(1) Self-Checking by Relays on Indoor Unit PCB
• To Check Abnormality on Indoor Unit PCB due to Malfunction
• To check Abnormality on Indoor Unit PCB Based on Results of Checking by CHECK switch on the
remote control switch and Self-Checking Function

■ Procedure
Refer to pages 1-94, 95 for location and function of DSW and LED.

a) Turn OFF the main power switch.

b) Disconnect connectors CN5 and CN8, and set dip switch DSW2 as shown below.
Set #1 at ON side and #2 at OFF side.

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Dip Switch DSW2

NOTE: Before turning ON the power, see checking procedure mentioned in next page.

c) Turn ON the main power switch.

Check Mode starts. (See next page.)
* Analog Test
* Relay Test

d) After completion of self-checking, turn OFF the power and reset the dip switch as before.

1-107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(2) Self-Checking Procedures in Check Mode

* for RPC (Before Alteration), RPF(I) and RPC (8, 10HP)

Check Item State of Mode Confirmation Method
(A) Initialize Exp. Valve Exp. Valve fully open => fully close
and Auto Louver Auto Louver is horizontally stopped.
(B) Analog Test If each thermistor for intake air, discharge air and If FAN operation is
freeze protection is normal, proceed to the next step. available, it is normal.

(C) Each Relay Test Check ON/OFF sound

of relays and LED
lamp.
YFAN

YH2

Y52H1, 2, 3

FAN Hi Me

(CN21)

Repeatedly RUN (CN6)

Perform
ALARM (CN7)

COOL (CN5-3#)
COOL Thermo-ON
(CN5-2#)

HEAT (CN8-2#)

HEAT Thermo-ON
(CN8-3#)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(sec)

Termination Turn OFF and reset all dip switches as they were.

* for RPK
Check Item State of Mode Confirmation Method
(A) Initialize Exp. Valve Exp. Valve fully open => fully close
and Auto Louver Auto Louver is horizontally stopped.
(B) Analog Test If each thermistor for intake air, discharge air and
freeze protection is normal, proceed to the next step.

(C) Each Relay Test Check ON/OFF sound

of relays.
52H1, 2, 3

Fan (Low)

Repeatedly Wireless Receiver

Part (Red)
Perform Wireless Receiver
Part (Green)
Wireless Receiver
Part (Yellow)

Termination Turn OFF and reset all dip switches as they were.

1-108

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.3.4 Self-Checking of 7-Day Timer (PSC-3T)

This procedure is utilized for regular maintenance check, and if the 7-day timer is malfunction.

1 Turn ON the main power switch.

2 Checking of LCD and Indicating Circuit:

Simultaneously depress the following 4 switches, [HOUR] of "PRESENT TIME"
[PRESENT DAY] of "DAY OF WEEK" [ON TIME] [OFF TIME] of "MONITOR".
During operation, they can be depressed.

All the LCD indications activated, for 5 seconds.

All the LCD indications deactivated, for 1 second.

NORMAL:
All the LCD indications activated, for 5 seconds.

All the LCD indications deactivated, for 1 second.

3 Checking of Touch Type Switch Function: By depressing a particular touch type switch,
Depress all the touch type switches one by one. the corresponding segment is activated.
Any one of the switches can be depressed. Indication
MINUTE
(PRESENT TIME) SET/RESET
NORMAL: HOUR RETURN PRESENT
(ON/OFF TIME)
OFF TIME DRY

MINUTE SET
(ON/OFF TIME) SET/
After 15 Seconds CANCEL MONITOR

HOUR ON TIME
(PRESENT TIME) SELECT

4 Completion of self-checking, "77" is indicated, for 3 seconds.

5 Return to the indication before the self-checking.

1-109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.3.5 Self-Checking of Central Station (PSC-3S1)

This procedure is utilized for regular maintenance check, and if the central station is malfunction.

1 Turn ON the main power switch.

2 Checking of LCD and Indicating Circuit:

Simultaneously depress the following 4 switches, [FAN] [COOL] and [ ][ ] of "UNIT".
During operation, they can be depressed.

All the LCD indications activated, for 5 seconds.

All the LCD indications deactivated, for 1 second.

NORMAL:
All the LCD indications activated, for 5 seconds.

All the LCD indications deactivated, for 1 second.

3 Checking of Touch Type Switch Function: By depressing a particular touch type switch,
Depress all the touch type switches one by one. the corresponding segment is activated.
Any one of the switches can be depressed. Temp. Indication Part
(UNIT) [blank]
NORMAL:
(UNIT) MNTR
DRY RUN/STOP

(TEMP.) RMT HEAT COOL

After 15 Seconds
(TEMP.) FAN
INDVL PRGM TIMER

4 Checking of Transmission Circuit: NORMAL ABNORMAL

Automatically checked, and the result will be
indicated as figure right, for 3 seconds.

5 Return to the indication before the self-checking.

1-110

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.3.6 Procedure of Checking Other Main Parts

(1) High Voltage Discharge Work for Replacing Parts
<Perform this high voltage discharge work to avoid an electric shock.>
Procedure
(a) Turn OFF the main switches and wait for three minutes. Check to ensure that no high voltage
exists. If LED3 (5 to 20HP) or LED201 (24 and 30HP) is ON after start-up and LED3 (5 to 20HP)
or LED201 (24 and 30HP) is OFF after turning OFF power source, the voltage will decrease lower
than DC50V.
(b) Connect connecting wires to an electrical brazer.
(c) Connect the wires to terminals, P and N on transistor module (5 to 20HP) or ISPM (24 and 30HP).
=> Discharging is started, resulting in hot brazer. Pay attention not to short-circuit between
terminal P and N .
In Case of 5 to 20HP

Power Supply Manufacturing # "A" Case

Before U4NG1001 (FSG/FS3) LED3 on PCB5 1
380-415V/50Hz
After U4NG1002 (FSG/FS3)
380V/60Hz LED2 on PCB3 2
From the First Production (FXG/FX3)
220V/60Hz From the First Production (FSG/FS3) LED2 on PCB3 3

<Case 1>
Connecting
Wires
P
Plug B
N U
V W

Brazer

Transistor
<Case 2 and 3> Module

In Case of 24 and 30HP

ISPM
PC208 PC207
CN8

Connecting CN9

CN207 CN206

N
C

Wires RB
TB2
LED201
R201
N
R200

Plug P ZN20
LED201

P1
ZN202

Brazer P TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

(d) Wait for 2 or 3 minutes and measure the voltage once again. Check to ensure that no voltage is
charged.

1-111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(2) Checking Procedures Transistor Module (In Case of 5 to 20HP)

Outer Appearance and Internal Circuit of Transistor Module
[Case 1]

W
U

N
P

B
B P
N

Th
Out
S1

GND

Out
S1

GND

Out
S1

GND

Out
S1

GND

Out
S1

GND

Out
S1

GND

Out
S1

GND
V

TEMP
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc
Fo

Fo

Fo

Fo

Fo

Fo

Fo
In

In

In

In

In

In

In
W

VWPC
VUPC

VVPC

VWP
WFo

VNC
VUP

VVP

VN1
UFo

VFo

WN

WN
WP

UN
UP

VP

Fo
Br
[Case 2 and 3]

N
U
P

BNC
N P B
1

U
4

Protection Circuit
7

Over Heating
V
Pre-Driver

Pre-Driver

Pre-Driver

Pre-Driver

Pre-Driver

Pre-Driver
10

W
16

Vz

Vz

Vz
Vz

Vz

Vz

1.5kΩ
NC
11

13

10

14

15

12

16
3

4
9

7
GNDW
GNDU

GNDV
VccW
VccU

VinW
VccV

GND
VinU

VinV

VinX

VinY

VinZ

ALM
Vcc

Remove all the terminals of the transistor module before check.

If items (a) to (e) are performed and the results are satisfactory, the transistor module is normal.
Measure it under 1 kΩ range of a tester. Do not use a digital tester.
(a) By touching the + side of the tester to the P terminal
P
of transistor module and the - side of tester to U, V B
and W of transistor module, measure the resistance. N U
V W
If all the resistances are from 1 to 5 kΩ, it is normal.

(b) By touching the - side of the tester to the P terminal

of transistor module and the + side of tester to U, V B
P

and W of transistor module, measure the resistance. N U

V W
If all the resistances are greater than 100 kΩ, it is
normal.

1-112

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(c) By touching the - side of the tester to the N terminal P

of transistor module and the + side of tester to U, V B
U
N V
and W of transistor module, measure the resistance. W

If all the resistances are from 1 to 5 kΩ, it is normal.

(d) By touching the + side of the tester to the N terminal

of transistor module and the - side of tester to U, V
P
and W of transistor module, measure the resistance. B
U
If all the resistances are greater than 100 kΩ, it is N V W
normal.

(3) Checking Procedures on Diode Module (In Case of 5 to 20HP)

Outer Appearance and Internal Circuit of Diode Module
[Case 1] +

[Case 2 and 3]

If items (a) to (d) are performed and the results are satisfactory, the diode module is normal.
Measure it under 1 kΩ range of a tester. Do not use a digital tester.

(a) By touching the + side of the tester to the + terminal

of the diode module and the - side of tester to the
~ terminals (3 NOs.) of the diode module, measure
the resistance. If all the resistances are from 5 to
50 kΩ, it is normal.

(b) By touching the - side of the tester to the + terminal

of the diode module and the + side of tester to the
~ terminals (3 Nos.) of the diode module, measure
the resistance. If all the resistances are greater than
500 kΩ, it is normal.

1-113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(c) By touching the - side of the tester to the - terminal of

the diode module and the + side of tester to the
~ terminals (3 Nos.) of the diode module, measure
the resistance. If all the resistances are from 5 to
50 kΩ, it is normal.

(d) By touching the + side of the tester to the - terminal

of the diode module and the - side of tester to the
~ terminals (3 Nos.) of the diode module, measure
the resistance. If all the resistances are greater than
500 kΩ, it is normal.

(4) Checking Procedures ISPM (In Case of 24 and 30HP)

Internal Circuit of ISPM
P1

Remove all the terminals of the ISPM before check.

R If items (a) to (h) are performed and the results are
S
T
satisfactory, ISPM is normal. Measure it under
1 kΩ range of a tester. Do not use a digital tester.

(a) By touching the + side of the tester to the P1 terminal CN8

CN9
PC208 PC207

of ISPM and the - side of tester to R, S and T of C

TB2
CN207 CN206

ISPM, measure the resistance. If all the resistances RB

R201
N
are more than 100 kΩ, it is normal. P1 P
R200

ZN20
LED201

+
P1
- ZN202

TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

R, S, T

(b) By touching the - side of the tester to the P1 terminal

of ISPM and the + side of tester to R, S and T of CN8
PC208 PC207

ISPM, measure the resistance. If all the resistances C

CN9

CN207 CN206

are more than 1 kΩ, it is normal. RB

TB2

R201
N
R200

P1 P ZN20
LED201

+
P1
- ZN202

TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

R, S, T

1-114

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(c) By touching the - side of the tester to the N terminal

PC208 PC207

of ISPM and the + side of tester to R, S and T of

CN8

CN9

CN207 CN206

ISPM, measure the resistance. If all the resistances C

TB2

N
are more than 100 kΩ, it is normal. RB

N
R201

R200

P ZN20
LED201

+
P1
- ZN202

TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

R, S, T

(d) By touching the + side of the tester to the N terminal CN8

PC208 PC207

of ISPM and the - side of tester to R, S and T of C

CN9

CN207 CN206

ISPM, measure the resistance. If all the resistances

TB2

N RB

are more than 1 kW, it is normal.

R201
N
R200

P ZN20
LED201

+
P1
- ZN202

TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

R, S, T

U
V
W

(e) By touching the + side of the tester to the P terminal CN8

CN9
PC208 PC207

of ISPM and the - side of tester to U, V and W of C

TB2
CN207 CN206

ISPM, measure the resistance. If all the resistances RB

R201
N
are more than 100 kΩ, it is normal. P
R200

ZN20
LED201

+
P1
- ZN202

P TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

U, V, W

(f) By touching the - side of the tester to the P terminal CN8

PC208 PC207

CN9

of ISPM and the + side of tester to U, V and W of C

TB2
CN207 CN206

ISPM, measure the resistance. If all the resistances RB

R201

are more than 1 kΩ, it is normal. N

P
R200

ZN20
LED201

+
P1
- ZN202

P TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

U, V, W

1-115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(g) By touching the - side of the tester to the N terminal

of ISPM and the + side of tester to U, V and W of CN8
PC208 PC207

CN9

ISPM, measure the resistance. If all the resistances C

TB2
CN207 CN206

are more than 100 kΩ, it is normal. RB

R201
N
R200

P ZN20
LED201

+
N P1
- ZN202

TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

U, V, W

(h) By touching the + side of the tester to the N terminal CN8

PC208 PC207

of ISPM and the - side of tester to U, V and W of CN9

CN207 CN206

ISPM, measure the resistance. If all the resistances

C

TB2

RB

are more than 1 kΩ, it is normal. N

R201

R200

P ZN20
LED201

+
N P1
- ZN202

TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

U, V, W

P1 PB
N
P If item (i) to (m) are performed and the results are
satisfactory, ISPM is normal.
Measure it under 1 kΩ range of a tester.
N
Do not use a digital tester.

(i) Perform the item (a) to (h).

(j) By touching the + side of the tester to the RB terminal CN8

PC208 PC207

CN9

of ISPM and the - side of tester to P terminal of ISPM. C

CN207 CN206

TB2

If the resistance is more than 1 kΩ, it is normal. RB RB

R201
N
R200

P P ZN20
LED201

+
P1
- ZN202

TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

(k) By touching the - side of the tester to the RB terminal CN8

PC208 PC207

of ISPM and the + side of tester to P terminal of ISPM.

CN9

CN207 CN206

TB2

If the resistance is more than 100 kΩ, it is normal. RB RB

R201
N
R200

P P ZN20
LED201

+
P1
- ZN202

TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

1-116

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(l) By touching the + side of the tester to the RB terminal

of ISPM and the - side of tester to N terminal of ISPM. CN8

CN9
PC208 PC207

If the resistance is more than 90 kΩ, it is normal.

CN207 CN206

RB TB2

RB

R201
N
R200

P
+ N ZN20
LED201

P1
- ZN202

TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

(m) By touching the - side of the tester to the RB terminal

of ISPM and the + side of tester to N terminal of ISPM.
PC208 PC207
CN8

CN9

If the resistance is more than 90 kΩ, it is normal.

CN207 CN206

RB TB2

RB

R201
N
R200

P ZN20
LED201

+
N P1
- ZN202

TB3
R216
R215

RB PD P N
R S T U V W

(5) Checking Method of Electronic Expansion Valve

Indoor Unit Electronic Expansion Valve Outdoor Unit Electronic Expansion Valve
Locked Check for the liquid pipe temperature It is abnormal if the liquid pipe pressure
with during heating operation. does not increase during cooling
Fully Closed It is abnormal if the temperature does operation.
not increase.

Locked It is abnormal under the following It is abnormal if the liquid pipe pressure
with conditions; The temperature of freeze does not increase and the outlet
Slightly Open protection thermistor becomes lower temperature of the expansion valve
than the suction air temperature when decreases after the cooling operation
the unit under checking is stopped and is started.
other units are under cooling operation.
Locked It is abnormal under the following
with Electronic Expansion Valve conditions; After heating operation for
Fully Open Freeze Protection more than 30 min., the discharge gas
Thermistor
temperature of compressor is not 10oC
higher than the condensing temperature
and there is no other faults such as
excessive charge of refrigerant, etc.

Unit Other
Under Units
Checking

1-117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(6) Checking of Electrical Coil Parts

Resistance
Name of Parts Model Electrical Wiring Diagram Wiring No.
(Ω)
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 21.1+10%
SF-200-60-4U R "3" - "5" W 32.2+10%
at 20oC
60W
for RPI-0.8FSG1, 1.0FSG1,
1.5FSG1
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R
SF-200-75-4U R "3" - "5" W
1
75W
for RPI-2.0FSG1, 2.5FSG1
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 5.06+10%
SF-200-290-4RC R "3" - "5" W 6.61+10%
3 5
at 20oC
290W
for RPI-3.0FSG1, 4.0FSG1
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R
SF-200-290-4RB R "3" - "5" W

290W
for RPI-5.0FSG1
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit
SIC-72FV-D856
- -
56W
for RCI-1.0 to 3.0FSG2 DC Motor
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit
SIC-81F-D8108
- -
108W
for RCI-4.0FSG2, 5.0FSG2
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 159.0+10%
CCC6719AH R "3" - "5" W 92.0+10%
P
at 20oC
35W
for RCD-1.0 to 2.0FSG1
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 70.9+10%
CCC6720AH 3 5 1 R "3" - "5" W 51.7+10%
at 20oC
55W
for RCD-2.5FSG1, 3.0FSG1
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "2" R 159.0+10%
CCC6719BH R "2" - "3" W 92.0+10%
CCC6719CH P at 20oC
35W x 2
for RCD-4.0FSG1
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "2" R 70.9+10%
CCC6720BH 2 3 1 R "2" - "3" W 51.7+10%
CCC6720CH at 20oC
55W x 2
for RCD-5.0FSG1

1-118

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Resistance
Name of Parts Model Electrical Wiring Diagram Wiring No.
(Ω)
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit
EHOCM2P4P30
DC Motor - -
for RPK-1.0FSGM,1.5FSGM 30W
2.0FSGM, 2.3FSGM
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 127.9
TNO-KPPA 3 R "3" - "5" W 102.7
at 20oC
for RPF-1.0FSG, 75W
RPFI-1.0FSG
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit 1 BL "1" - "3" R 127.9
TNO-KPPA R "3" - "5" W 102.7
5
at 20oC
for RPF-1.5FSG, 35W
RPFI-1.5FSG
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 112+10%
TNO-KPPA R "3" - "5" W 77+10%
for RPC-2.0FSG1 35W at 20oC
(Before Alteration)
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 113+10%
TNO-KPPA R "3" - "5" W 91+10%
for RPC-2.5FSG1, 3.0FSG1 50W at 20oC
(Before Alteration)
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 40+10%
TNO-KPPA R "3" - "5" W 54+10%
for RPC-4.0FSG1 95W at 20oC
(Before Alteration) 3
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 25+10%
TNO-KPPA R "3" - "5" W 40+10%
for RPC-5.0FSG1 135W at 20oC
(Before Alteration) 1
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 81.4+10%
SF-200-35-4T 5 R "3" - "5" W 99.0+10%
for RPC-2.0FSG1 35W at 20oC
(After Alteration)
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 93.7+10%
SF-200-50-4W R "3" - "5" W 89.9+10%
for RPC-2.5FSG1, 3.0FSG1 50W at 20oC
(After Alteration)
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 20.9+10%
SF-200-95-4A R "3" - "5" W 31.6+10%
for RPC-4.0FSG1 95W at 20oC
(After Alteration)
Fan Motor for Indoor Unit BL "1" - "3" R 23.2+10%
SF-200-135-4C R "3" - "5" W 27.1+10%
for RPC-5.0FSG1 135W at 20oC
(After Alteration)

1-119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Resistance
Name of Parts Model Electrical Wiring Diagram Wiring No.
(Ω)
Fan Motor for Outdoor Unit "4" - "1" 8.17
NF4501 "1" - "3" 7.97

160W
for RAS-5FSG, RAS-5FS3
Fan Motor for Outdoor Unit "4" - "1" 5.28/6.50
"1" - "3" 4.85/6.91
1 3

for RAS-8FSG, RAS-8FS3,

RAS-10FSG, RAS-10FS3, NF7001/
RAS-8FXG, RAS-8FX3, NF7001K
RAS-10FXG, RAS-10FX3
4
for Right Side of 275W
RAS-16FSG, RAS-16FS3,
RAS-20FSG, RAS-20FS3
for Center of
RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5,
RAS-30FSG1, RAS-30FS5
(380-415/380V, 50/60Hz)
Fan Motor for Outdoor Unit "4" - "1" 6.74
"1" - "3" 5.91
1 3
NF7011
for Left Side of
RAS-16FSG, RAS-16FS3, 275W
RAS-20FSG, RAS-20FS3
for Right and Left Side of
4
RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5,
RAS-30FSG1, RAS-30FS5
Fan Motor for Outdoor Unit "1" - "2" 5.37
1 "2" - "3" 5.37
KNF5501 "3" - "1" 5.37

for Center of 380W

RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5,
RAS-30FSG1, RAS-30FS5 2 3
(220V, 60Hz)

1-120

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Resistance
Name of Parts Model
(Ω)
Drain-up Motor
256
ADP-1403
for RCI-1.0FSG2, 1.5FSG2, 2.0FSG2, at 20 oC
2.5FSG2, 3.0FSG2, 4.0FSG2, 5.0FSG2
Drain-up Motor
347
KJV-1004
for RCD-1.0FSG1, 1.5FSG1, 2.0FSG1, at 20 oC
2.5FSG1, 3.0FSG1, 4.0FSG1, 5.0FSG1
Drain-up Motor
447
PJD-05230HS
at 20 oC
for RPI-0.8FSG1, 1.0FSG1, 1.5FSG1
Solenoid Valve for Gas Bypass
2,018/1,245
ST10PA at 20 oC
for RAS-5FSG, 8FSG, 10FSG, 8FXG, 10FXG
(50/60Hz)
RAS-5FS3, 8FS3, 10FS3, 8FX3, 10FX3
Solenoid Valve for Gas Bypass
2,018/1,245
ST10PA at 20 oC
(50/60Hz)
for RAS-16FSG, 20FSG, 16FS3, 20FS3
4-Way Valve CHV-0407
RAS-5FSG 1,435
+
RAS-5FS3 at 20oC
CHV-01AJ503C1
RAS-8FSG, 8FXG
RAS-8FS3, 8FX3 CHV-0717 1,435
+
for RAS-5FSG, 8FSG, 10FSG, 8FXG, 10FXG RAS-10FSG, 10FXG CHV-01AJ503H1 at 20 oC
RAS-5FS3, 8FS3, 10FS3, 8FX3, 10FX3 RAS-10FS3, 10FX3
4-Way Valve
CHV-0717 1,435
+ at 20 oC
CHV-01AJ503H1
for RAS-16FSG, 20FSG, 16FS3, 20FS3
Compressor Motor
*1.436/1.436/0.395
401DHV
at 20 oC
for RAS-5FS3
Compressor Motor
*1.436/1.436/0.395
401DHVM
for RAS-8FS3, 10FS3, 16FS3, 20FS3 at 20 oC
8FX3, 10FX3
Compressor Motor
*3.29/2.68/0.74
400DHM
at 20 oC
for RAS-8FS3, 8FX3
Compressor Motor
*2.73/2.22/0.572
500DHM
at 20 oC
for RAS-10FS3, 10FX3
Compressor Motor
*2.28/1.68/0.507
600DHM
at 20 oC
for RAS-16FS3, 20FS3

1-121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Resistance
Name of Parts Model
(Ω)
Compressor Motor
*1.436/1.436/0.395
G402DHV
at 20 oC
for RAS-5FSG
Compressor Motor
*1.436/1.436/0.395
G402DHVM
for RAS-8FSG, 10FSG, 16FSG, 20FSG, at 20 oC
8FXG, 10FXG
Compressor Motor
*3.29/2.68/0.74
G401DHM
at 20 oC
for RAS-8FSG, 8FXG
Compressor Motor
*2.73/2.22/0.572
G501DHM
at 20 oC
for RAS-10FSG, 10FXG
Compressor Motor
*2.28/1.68/0.507
G601DHM
at 20 oC
for RAS-16FSG, 20FSG
Contactor for Compressor Motor A25: 501/401
FC-1S: 656/460
A25/FC-1S
for RAS-5FSG, 8FSG, 10FSG, 8FXG, 10FXG at 20 oC
RAS-5FS3, 8FS3, 10FS3, 8FX3, 10FX3 (50/60Hz)
Contactor for Compressor Motor A35: 501/401
FC-1S: 656/460
A35/FC-1S
for RAS-16FSG, 20FSG, at 20 oC
RAS-16FS3, 20FS3 (50/60Hz)
Compressor Motor
*0.944/0.944/0.211
404DHD
at 20 oC
for RAS-24FS5, 30FS5
Compressor Motor
*2.48/2.06/0.53
603DH
at 20 oC
for RAS-24FS5, 30FS5
Compressor Motor
*1.47/1.32/0.35
750EH
at 20 oC
for RAS-24FS5
Compressor Motor
*1.07/0.90/0.25
1200EH
at 20 oC
for RAS-30FS5
Compressor Motor
*0.944/0.944/0.211
G404DHD
at 20 oC
for RAS-24FSG1, 30FSG1
Compressor Motor
*2.48/2.06/0.53
G603DH
at 20 oC
for RAS-24FSG1, 30FSG1
Compressor Motor
*1.47/1.32/0.35
G750EH
at 20 oC
for RAS-24FSG1
Compressor Motor
*1.07/0.90/0.25
G1200EH
at 20 oC
for RAS-30FSG1
*: 380-415V, 50Hz / 380V, 60Hz / 220V, 60Hz

1-122

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(7) Checking of Compressor

CHECK LIST ON COMPRESSOR

CLIENT: MODEL: DATE:
Serial No.: Production Date: Checker:

No. Check Item Check Method Result Remarks

1 Are THM8, THM9, THM12 and THM13 (1) Are wires of each thermistor correctly
correctly connected? connected by viewing?
THM8, THM9, THM12, THM13: (2) Check to ensure that 7-segment
Discharge Gas Thermistor indication of Td1 is higher than Td2, Td3,
Td4 when No.1 comp. is operating.
Td1: Temperature of THM8
Td2: Temperature of THM9
Td3: Temperature of THM12
Td4: Temperature of THM13
2 Are thermistor, THM8, THM9, THM12 (1) Check to ensure that thermistor on the
and THM13 disconnected? top of comp. is correctly mounted by
viewing?
(2) Check to ensure that actually measured
temp. are greatly different from the
indication (Td1, Td2, Td3, Td4) during
check mode.
3 Are connectors for current sensor (1) Check to ensure that indication A1, A2,
correctly connected? A3 and A4 are 0 during compressor
stopping.
4 Is current sensor faulty? (2) Check to ensure that indication A1, A2,
A3 and A4 are not 0 during compressor
running. (However, A2, A3 and A4 are
5 Is current sensing part on PCB3 faulty? 0 during stopping of No.2, No.3 and
No.4 comp.)
6 Is the direction of current sensor Check the direction => by viewing.
(CTU, CTV) reverse?
7 Are power source wires, U and V Check to ensure that wires are correctly
inserted correctly into current sensor? inserted.
8 Are ex. valves (MV1, MV2 and MVB) Check to ensure that MV1 to CN10 and
correctly connected? MV2 to CN11 are correctly connected.
9 Are ex. valve coils (MV1, MV2 and MVB) Check to ensure that each coil is correctly
correctly mounted? mounted on the valve.
10 Are the refrigeration cycle and electrical Check to ensure that refrigerant is flowing
wiring system incorrectly connected? into indoor units by operating one
refrigerating cycle only from the outdoor unit.
11 Is opening of ex. valve completely Check the following by the check mode
closed (locked)? of outdoor units.
(1) Liquid Pipe Temp. (TL) < Air Intake
Temp. (Ti) during Cooling Operation
(2) Liquid Pipe Temp. (TL) > Air Intake
Temp. (Ti) during Heating Operation
12 Is opening of ex. valve fully opened Check to ensure that liquid pipe temp. is
(locked)? lower than air intake temp. of stopping
indoor unit when other indoor units are
operating under cooling operation.
13 Are the contacts for comp. magnetic Check the surface of each contact (L1, L2
switch CMC faulty? and L3) by viewing.
14 Is there any voltage abnormality among Check to ensure that voltage imbalance is
L1-L2, L2-L3 and L3-L1? smaller than 3%.
Please note that power source voltage must
be within 380V or 415V+10%, 220V+10%.
15 Is the comp. oil acidified during Check to ensure that the oil color is not
compressor motor burning? black.

1-123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

Additional Information for “CHECK LIST ON COMPRESSOR”

Check Additional Information (Mechanism of Compressor Failure)

Item
1&2 The liquid refrigerant return volume to the compressor is controlled by the discharge gas
temperature Td1 when only No.1 compressor is operating. If Td1 and Td2 are reversely
connected, the liquid refrigerant return volume will become small by detecting the temperatures
even if the actual discharge gas temperature is high. Therefore, this abnormal overheating
operation will result in insulation failure of the motor winding.
3, 4 & 5 Overcurrent control (operating frequency control) is performed by detecting current by the
current sensor.
In this case, winding insulation failure will occur, since control is not available in spite of actually
high current.
6&7 The current sensor checks phase and adjusts output electrical wave in addition to the above
mentioned items. If fault occurs, the output electrical wave becomes unstable giving stress to
the motor winding, resulting in winding insulation failure.
8&9 During a cooling operation, Pd is controlled by fan revolution of outdoor unit, and Td and SH
are controlled by MV of each indoor units or MVB for FX series.
During a heating operation, Td and SH are controlled by MV1 and MV2.
If expansion valves are incorrectly connected, correct control is not available, resulting in
compressor seizure depending on liquid refrigerant returning conditions or motor winding
insulation failure depending on overheating conditions.
10 If the refrigeration cycle and electrical system are incorrectly connected, abnormally low
suction pressure operation is maintained or abnormally high discharge pressure operation is
maintained, resulting in giving stress to the compressor, since their correct control is not
available.
11 ditto
12 The compressor may be locked due to the liquid return operation during the cooling operation.
13 In the case that the contacting resistance becomes big, voltage imbalance among each phase
will cause abnormal overcurrent.
14 In this case, overcurrent will occur, efficiency will decrease or the motor winding will be
excessively heated.
15 In the case, it will result in motor burning or compressor seizure.

1-124

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.4 Test Run

1.4.1 Test Run Mode by Remote Control Switch
(1) Turn ON the power source of the indoor and outdoor units. Counting Number of
(2) Set the TEST RUN mode by the remote control switch. Connected Units HIGH SET TEMP.
COOL
UNIT

Depress the "MODE" and the "CHECK" switches A/C

CHECK

simultaneously for more than 3 second. RUN / STOP TEMP.

Operation Lump
If "TEST RUN" and the counting number of the
connected units to the remote control switch MODE FAN SPEED ON/OFF TIMER RESET

(for example "01") are indicated on the remote MODE

VENTI LOUVER CHECK

control switch, the connection of remote control CHECK TIME

cable is correct.

If no indication or "00" appears or the number Remote Control Switch

of the units indicated is smaller than the actual
number of the units, some abnormalities exist.

(3)
Remote
Control Switch Fault Inspection Points after the Power Source OFF
Indication
No Indication * The power source is not turned ON. 1. Connection between the connector and the wires:
* The connection of the remote control Red Wire - No.1, Black Wire - No.2, White Wire - No.3
cable is incorrect. 2. Connecting Points of Remote Control Cable
3. Contact of Connectors of Remote Control Cable
* The connecting wires of power supply 4. Connection Order of each Terminal Boards
line are incorrect or loosened. 5. Screw Fastening of each Terminal Boards
Counting * The setting of unit number is incorrect. 6. Dip Switch Setting on Printed Circuit Board
number of * The connection of control cables between 7. Wire Connecting Order of Bridge Cable
connected units each indoor units are incorrect. 8. Connecting Points of Bridge Cable
is incorrect. (When one remote control switch controls 9. Contact of Connectors of Bridge Cable
multiple units.)
Back to (1) after checking
(4) Select TEST RUN MODE by depressing MODE switch. (COOL or HEAT)
(5) Depress RUN/STOP switch.

The "TEST RUN" operation will be started. (The "TEST RUN" operation will be finished after 2 hours
unit operation or by depressing the RUN/STOP switch again.)

If the units do not start or the operation lamp on the remote control switch is flickered, some
abnormalities exist.

(6)
Remote Control Inspection Points after the
Unit Condition Fault
Switch Indication Power Source OFF
The operation lamp The unit does not The connecting wires of operating 1. Connecting Order of each Terminal Boards.
flickers. (1 time/1 sec.) start. line are incorrect or loosened. The fuse on the PCB may be blown out
And the Unit No. and due to miswiring. (Can be recovered only
Alarm Code "03" flicker. once by the DSW on the PCB)
Procedures for Recovery When Transmitting
Circuit Fuse is Blown Out
1. Correct the wiring for the terminal board.
2. Setting position of the model code are shown below.
Indoor PCB DSW7
RPC (Before Alteration) ON Outdoor PCB
RPF, RPFI, RPI-8,10, OFF DSW10
RPK 1 2
ON
RCI-FSG2, RCD, ON OFF
RPI-0.8 to 5.0 OFF 1 2
RPC (After Alteration) 1 2

2. Screw Fastening of each Terminal Boards.

3. Connecting Order of Power Line Between
Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit.

The operation lamp The unit does not The connection of remote control This is the same as item (3)-1, 2 and 3.
flickers. (1 time/2 sec.) start. cable is incorrect.
Indication of Flicker The unit does not The connection of the thermistors Check by the alarm code table in the service
different to above. start, or starts once or other connectors are incorrect. manual. (Do it by service people.)
and then stops. Tripping of protector exists, or else.
Normal The outdoor fans The connecting order of power Connecting Order of the Terminal Board:
rotate reversely. supply line is incorrect. TB1 in the Outdoor Unit
Normal The outdoor fans Some wires of power supply line Connecting Point of Power Supply Line.
do not start. is disconnected. Contact Outdoor Fan Motor Connector.

Back to (1) after checking

1-125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.4.2 Test Run Mode by Outdoor Unit

The procedure of test run from the outdoor unit side is indicated below. Setting of this dip switch is
available with the power source ON.
Setting of Dip Switch (Before Shipment) Outdoor Unit Printed Circuit Board
(PWB1)
DSW4
Switch for Setting of Service Operation and Function
1. Test Run
ON 2. COOL/HEAT Setting
(ON: Heating Operation) For Service
1 2 3 4 5 6
3. OFF (Fixed)
4. Manual Compressor OFF DSW4
5. OFF (Fixed)
OFF
6. OFF (Fixed)
(In Case of 5 to 20HP)
Except No.1 Compressor
(In Case of 24 and 30HP)

Do not touch any other electrical parts when operating switches on the PCB.

Do not attach or detach service cover when the power source for the outdoor unit is ON and
the outdoor unit is operated.

Turn all the dip switches of DSW4 OFF when the test run operation is completed.

Dip Switch Setting Operation Remarks

1. Setting of Operation Mode 1. The indoor unit automatically start  Take care that the indoor units operate
Cooling: Set DSW4-2 OFF. to operate when the test run of in accordance with the test run operation
the outdoor unit is set. of the outdoor unit.
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON 2. The ON/OFF operation can be  The test run is started from the outdoor
OFF performed from the remote unit and stopped from the remote
control switch or DSW4-1 of control switch, the test run function of
Heating: Set DSW4-2 ON. the outdoor unit. the remote control switch is cancelled.
3. Continuous operation during However, the test run function of the
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 hours is performed without outdoor unit is not cancelled.
OFF Thermo-OFF.  In case that the plural indoor units are
Test Run connected with one remote control
2. Starting Test Run switch, all the units start test run
Set DSW4-1 ON and the operation at the same time, therefore,
operation is started after a turn the power source OFF for the
few~20 seconds. indoor units not to operate test run.
When heating operation, In this case, the "TEST RUN" indication
leave DSW4-2 at ON. of the remote control switch may flicker,
and this is not abnormal.
1 2 3 4 5 6  The setting of DSW4 is not required
ON
for the test run from the remote control
OFF switch.

1. Setting 1. When DSW4-4 is ON during  Do not repeat compressor ON/OFF

* Compressor Manual compressor operation, the frequently.
OFF: Set DSW4-4 ON. compressor stops to operate
immediately and the indoor unit
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6
is under the condition of
Manual OFF OFF Thermo-OFF.
of 2. When DSW4-4 is OFF, the
Compressor * Compressor ON: compressor starts to operate
Set DSW4-4 OFF. after the cancellation of 3-minutes
1 2 3 4 5 6
guard.
ON
OFF

1. Manual Defrost Operation 1. Defrost operation is available  Do not repeat defrost operation
Starts Press PSW1 for more regardless of frosting condition frequently.
than 3 seconds during heating and total time of heating operation.  When manual defrost operation is
operation, the defrost operation 2. Defrost operation in not performed accepted by PSW1, the time left before
is started after 2 minutes. when the temperature of outdoor starting defrost operation is indicated
Manual This function is not available heat exchanger is higher than at the 7-segment indicator on the PCB.
Defrost within 5 minutes after starting 10oC, high pressure is higher
heating operation. than 2.0MPa (20 kgf/cm2G) or
2. Manual Defrost Operation Thermo-OFF.
Finishes Defrost operation is Time left (every 4 seconds)
automatically ended and the
heating operation is started.

1-126

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

1.4.3 Checking List (FSG and FS3 Series)

CHECK LIST ON TEST OPERATION

CLIENT: INSTALLER: DATE:
O.U. MODEL: O.U. Serial No.: Checker:

I.U.
Model
I.U.
Serial No.
I.U. Indoor Unit, O.U.: Outdoor Unit
Piping Length: m Additional Refrigerant Charge: kg

(1) General

No. Check Item Result

1 Was the dip switch, DSW6 for piping length in O.U. set?
2 Was the dip switch, DSW3 for piping lift in O.U. set?
3 Is the transmitting wire contacting to power lines?
4 Was an earth wire connected?
5 Is there any short circuit?
6 Is there any voltage abnormality among each phase (L1-L2, L2-L3,
L3-L1, L1-N)?

(2) Refrigerant Cycle

a. Operation (Cooling/Heating)

No. Check Item Result

1 Operate all the indoor units ("TEST RUN" mode).
2 Operate all the indoor units at "HIGH" speed.
3 In case that the constant compressor is turned ON and OFF repeatedly,
stop one indoor unit (small capacity one).

b. Sampling Data
No. Check Item Result
1 After the operation for more than 20 min.
2 Check Pd and Td. Is Td-SH 20 to 40 deg.?
(In Case of 24 and 30HP, Td-SH is 25 to 50 deg.)
3 Is Ps 0.2 to 0.5?
(In Case of 24 and 30HP, Ps is 0.2 to 0.6)
4 Is Pd 1.2 to 2.2? (If the outdoor temperature is high, Pd becomes high.)

1-127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

(3) Check Item after Sampling Data

a. Cooling Operation (It is applicable when outdoor temperature is higher than 15°C.)

No. Check Item Standard Causes Result

1 Is H1 (Compressor Frequency) + Running Horse- * Low: Insufficient
(CC (Numbers of Running Compressor) -1) power of Indoor Refrigerant
X (*) abnormally low or high? Units X 15Hz * High: Excessive
(It is applicable when Intake Air Temp. Refrigerant
is 3 deg. higher than Setting Temp.) * DSW for I.U.
Capacity; Incorrect
Setting
2 Is fan actually running at "HIGH" speed when - * Fan Motor; Failure
Fo (Air Flow Rate of Fan) is "15" (5 to 20HP) * PCB; Failure
or "16" (24 and 30HP)? * Condenser; Failure
3 Is Td1 higher than Td2 when only No. 1 - * Td Thermistor;
compressor is running (when CC (Numbers Incorrect Connection
of Running Compressor) is "1")? or Incorrect
Mounting
4 Is the total of iE (Indoor Ex. Valves Opening) Total of iE: * Low: Excessive
abnormally low or high? Horsepower of Refrigerant
Outdoor Unit X * High: Insufficient
(5 to 30) Refrigerant,
5 Is TL (Liquid Pipe Temp. of I.U. Heat It is normal * TL Thermistor;
Exchanger) lower than Ti (Intake Air Temp. when TL-Ti<-5. Failure
of I.U.)? * Ex. Valve; Fully
Closed
* Short-Circuit
6 Is TG (Gas Pipe Temp. of I.U. Heat It is normal * TG Thermistor;
Exchanger) lower than Ti (Intake Air Temp. when TG-Ti<-5. Failure
of I.U.)? * Ex. Valve; Fully
Closed or Slightly
* Open
Short-Circuit
7 Is there any excessive difference among I.U. It is normal if the * TL/TG Thermistor;
at SHTG-TL of I.U. heat exchanger? (It is difference Failure
applicable when Intake Air Temp. is 3deg. among units is * Ex. Valve; Fully
higher than Setting Temp.) within 7 deg. Open, Slightly Open
or Fully Closed
8 Is there any I.U. with the I.U. heat exchanger It is normal if SH * Ex. Valve; Locked
SHTG-TL excessively different from other is within 3 deg. with Fully Open
units' value and is iE lower than "7"? (It is lower than other * Mismatched between
applicable when Intake Air Temp. is 3 deg. units. Wiring and Piping
higher than Setting Temp.)
9 Is there any I.U. with SH excessively lower It is normal if SH * Ex. Valve; Locked
than other units' value, under the condition of is within 3 deg. with Slightly Open
iE (I.U. Ex. Value) "100"? higher than other or Closed
units. * Mismatched between
Wiring and Piping
10 Is the difference between Discharge Air Temp. - -
And Intake Air Temp. more than 7 deg.?

1-128

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TROUBLESHOOTING

b. Heating Operation (It is applicable when outdoor temperature is higher than 0°C.)

No. Check Item Standard Causes Result

1 Is oE1 (O.U. Ex. Valves Opening) abnormally oE1 = 30 to 70% * Low: Insufficient
low or high when Td - SH is 15 to 30 deg.? Refrigerant
* High: Excessive
Refrigerant
2 Is Pd "1.6" to "2.2"? - * Low: Solenoid
(Pd is high when the indoor temperature is Valve SVA Leakage
high.) * High: Excessive
Gas Pipe Resistance
3 Is H1 (Compressor Frequency) + - * Low: Excessive
(CC (Numbers of Running Compressor) - 1) Refrigerant
x () abnormally low or high? (The lower is * High: Insufficient
the room temp. and outdoor temp., the higher Refrigerant,
is the above value.) Excessive Pipe
Resistance
4 Is Pd "0.2" to "0.5"? - * Low: O.U.
(Only under the condition that electrical Short-circuit
expansion valve SVA is OFF.) * Low/High: O.U. Fan
Thyristor Failure or
Outdoor Air Sensor;
Failure
5 Is the temperature difference between I.U.* - * Failure such as
more than 15 deg. when iE (I.U. Ex. Valve) P.C.B., Wiring,
is 100? Coil, Valve
* The temperature difference between I.U. * Excessive Pipe
means the following; Resistance
b3 (Discharge Gas Temp.) - b2 (Intake Air * Thermistor Failure
Temp.) indicated on the remote control for Discharge Air
switch by check mode. However, this is
applicable only when b2 (Intake Air Temp.)
- b1 (Setting Temp.) is higher than 3 deg.

NOTES:
1. The symbol with an underline indicates checking item and the mark “ ” indicates checking data.
2. Regarding (✴), the following value should be applied.
Mark ()
Power Supply
8HP 10HP 16, 20HP
380-415V/50Hz 50 62 70
380V/60Hz 60 75 84
220V/60Hz

1-129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)
2. SERVICING
2.1 Outdoor Unit

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.1 Removing Air Intake Grille

(1) Remove screws for the air intake grille at the rear side of the unit.
(2) Remove the air intake grille by pulling and
unhooking each hook. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Insert Insert

Screw Screw
Insert Screw
Insert
RAS-5FSG to RAS-10FSG, Insert
RAS-5FS3 to RAS-10FS3,
RAS-8FXG, RAS-10FXG, RAS-16FSG, RAS-20FSG,
RAS-8FX3, RAS-10FX3 RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FS3

Insert

Insert
Insert
Insert
Insert

RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1,
RAS-24FS5, RAS-30FS5

2-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.2 Removing Front Service Panel

Remove five (5) screws per each panel.
Slightly lift the panels upward and remove them.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

NOTE:
When removing screws for front service panel, remove the screw at the lower part of panel firstly.

Screw Screw

Remove this first. Remove this first.

RAS-5FSG to RAS-10FSG,
RAS-5FS3 to RAS-10FS3, RAS-16FSG, RAS-20FSG,
RAS-8FXG, RAS-10FXG, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FS3
RAS-8FX3, RAS-10FX3

Screw

Remove this first.

RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1,
RAS-24FS5, RAS-30FS5

2-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.3 Removing Fan Guard Nets

Remove four (4) screws per each fan guard net
and remove the one.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screw Fan Guard Net Screw Fan Guard Net

Remove this first.

RAS-5FSG to RAS-10FSG,
RAS-5FS3 to RAS-10FS3, RAS-16FSG, RAS-20FSG,
RAS-8FXG, RAS-10FXG, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FS3
RAS-8FX3, RAS-10FX3

Fan Guard Net

Screw

RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1,
RAS-24FS5, RAS-30FS5

2-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.4 Removing Outdoor Fan

(1) Remove the fan guard nets according to the item 2.1.3 “Removing Fan Guard Nets”.
(2) Remove the fans by removing the cap nuts and flat washers fixing the propeller fans onto the
motor shafts. If it is difficult to remove the fan,
use a puller. Tool Spanner, Adjustable Wrench or Puller

Electrical Box Electrical Box Electrical Box

RAS-5FSG to RAS-10FSG, RAS-16FSG, RAS-20FSG, RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1,

RAS-5FS3 to RAS-10FS3, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FS3 RAS-24FS5, RAS-30FS5
RAS-8FXG, RAS-10FXG,
RAS-8FX3, RAS-10FX3

Propeller Fan
Nut
Flat Washer

Motor Shaft

2-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(3) Removing Wires

(a) Remove two (2) screws fixing the electrical box cover and remove the electrical box cover.
(b) Disconnect the connectors for the motors in the electrical box.
(c) Remove the motors by removing four (4) fixing bolts for the motors.

Phillips Screwdriver, Adjustable

Tool Wrench, Spanner, Cutter, Stick

Bolt
Motor Shaft
Motor

Motor Clamp

Electrical Box

Connector

NOTES:
1. Make the cord outlet of the motor directing downward when mounting the motor.
2. Firmly fix the motor wires onto the motor clamp with the plastic tie, not to touch the propeller fans.
3. Mounting Propeller Fan
Put and push the propeller fan by identifying the mark with the cut part of the motor shaft.
Firmly fix the propeller fan twice with a tightening torque from 14.55 N m to 15.0 N m after the head of

the fan shaft comes up.

4. Connect the motor wires to the electrical connecting part at the upper part of the electrical box.

2-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.5 Removing Compressor (RAS-5FSG and RAS-5FS3)

Do not expose the inner refrigeration cycle to the atmosphere for a long period of time when
replacing a compressor to protect the cycle from mixing water or foreign particles.
If exposed for a long time, seal pipe ends using caps or tape certainly.

Remove the caps for the compressor just before replacing the compressor.

Check to ensure each terminal No. when connecting compressor power wires.
If incorrectly connected, the compressor will fail due to reverse rotation.

Before starting this work, collect refrigerant into a cylinder from the cycle.
(1) Remove front service panel according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front Service Panel”.
(2) Release the lace for top cap of the compressor and remove the top cap.
(3) Remove the Td thermistor on the top of the compressor.
NOTE:
The thermostat fixer, holder, thermostat holder are used again when reassembling.
Keep them in a box so that the parts are stored correctly.

Phillips Screwdriver, Charge-Hose,

Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

Water-proof Cover
Cap

Lace

Thermostat
Holder
Holder

Td
Thermistor Thermostat
Fixer

2-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(4) Release the lace for the water-proof cover, open the water-proof cover from the front side.
NOTE:
Remove the water-proof cover in the arrow mark direction as shown by paying attention to the cut
part of the water-proof cover in order to avoid any damages.
(5) Remove the terminal cover for the compressor and disconnect the wiring to the compressor
terminals. Check to ensure that the terminals Nos. are indicated. If the terminal Nos. are not
identified, at reassembling, the compressor will fail due to reverse rotation.
NOTES:
1. Check to ensure that the faston terminals for the compressor are normal. When a pulling force of
20N or more is required, it is normal. If abnormal, replace the faston terminals with new ones.
2. Check to ensure that wires are firmly fixed.
3. It is recommended that the faston terminals be clamped to increase a contacting force after
replacing the compressor.

Direction to remove the cover

Water-proof Cover

Heater Cover Oil Heater

Indication of
Terminal Number

V
U
W
Mark Band

Compressor
Wires
Terminal Box
Pull upper part of the cover.

2-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(6) Remove the heater cover and the spring for the oil heater, and release the oil heater.

Remove the spring

by expanding
the spring as shown.
Spring

Heater Cover Oil Heater

(7) Disconnect the discharge pipe of the compressor.

Use two spanners when disassembling the flare-nuts.

Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

Discharge Pipe

Two Spanners

2-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(8) Disconnect the suction pipe of the compressor.

NOTES:
1. Completely wipe off the oil if the oil is spread to the other parts such as the compressor cover,
wiring, bottom base, etc. If not, this will cause many problems to the unit.
2. If the oil is spilt, charge new oil equivalent to the spilt oil.
3. Check to ensure that the oil is not foul.
If foul, replace it with new one. Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

Suction Pipe

(9) Remove three nuts fixing the compressor and remove the compressor.
NOTE:
When lifting the compressor, hold the discharge pipe vertically and turn it to the right, and pull the
compressor towards the front side by paying attention to the compressor leg not to touch the suction
pipe.
(10) Regarding remounting the compressor work, Adjustable Wrench or Spanner,
Tool Phillips Screwdriver
perform the above work in the reverse processes.

Discharge Pipe Lift and move towards right.

Suction Pipe

Pay attention to Pull towards front side.

this part not to touch
the compressor leg. Oil Heater
Special Nut
Vibration-proof Rubber

Front
Pull out the compressor toward the front side, Side
and remove the vibration-proof rubbers.

2-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.6 Removing Compressors (RAS-8FSG, RAS-10FSG, RAS-16FSG, RAS-20FSG, RAS-8FS3,

RAS-10FS3, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FS3, RAS-8FXG, RAS-10FXG, RAS-8FX3 and RAS-10FX3)

Do not expose the inner refrigeration cycle to the atmosphere for a long period of time when
replacing a compressor to protect the cycle from mixing water or foreign particles.
If exposed for a long time, seal pipe ends using caps or tape certainly.

Remove the caps for the compressor just before replacing the compressor.

Check to ensure each terminal No. when connecting compressor power wires.
If incorrectly connected, the compressor will fail due to reverse rotation.

Before starting this work, collect refrigerant into a cylinder from the cycle.
(1) Remove front service panel according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front Service Panel”.
(2) Release the lace for top cap of the compressor and remove the top cap.
(3) Remove the Td thermistor on the top of the compressor.
NOTE:
The thermostat fixer, holder, thermostat holder are used again when reassembling.
Keep them in a box so that the parts are stored correctly.

Phillips Screwdriver, Charge-Hose,

Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

Water-proof Cover
Cap

Lace

Thermostat
Holder
Holder

Td
Thermistor Thermostat
Fixer

2-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(4) Release the lace for the water-proof cover, open the water-proof cover from the front side.
NOTE:
Remove the water-proof cover in the arrow mark direction as shown by paying attention to the cut
part of the water-proof cover in order to avoid any damages.
(5) Remove the terminal cover for the compressor and disconnect the wiring to the compressor
terminals. Check to ensure that the terminals Nos. are indicated. If the terminal Nos. are not
identified, at reassembling, the compressor will fail due to reverse rotation.
NOTES:
1. Check to ensure that the faston terminals for the compressor are normal. When a pulling force of
20N or more is required, it is normal. If abnormal, replace the faston terminals with new ones.
2. Check to ensure that wires are firmly fixed.
3. It is recommended that the faston terminals be clamped to increase a contacting force after
replacing the compressor.

Direction to remove the cover

Water-proof Cover

Heater Cover Oil Heater

Indication of Indication of
Terminal Number Terminal Number

V V
U U
W W
Mark Band

Compressor Compressor
Wires Wires
Terminal Box Terminal Box
Pull upper part of the cover. Pull upper part of the cover.

For Constant Compressor of 16 and 20HP

2-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(6) Remove the heater cover and the spring for the oil heater, and release the oil heater.

Remove the spring

by expanding
the spring as shown.
Spring

Heater Cover Oil Heater

(7) Disconnect the discharge pipe of the compressor.

Use two spanners when disassembling the flare-nuts.
Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

Discharge Pipe

Two Spanners

2-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(8) Remove the flare-nut at the compressor side, and disconnect the feeding oil pipe.
There is a possibility that the oil may flow from the inside of the feeding oil pipe.
Therefore, prepare an oil pan, etc. to collect the oil.
NOTES:
1. Completely wipe off the oil if the oil is spread to the other parts such as the compressor cover,
wiring, bottom base, etc. If not, this will cause many problems to the unit.
2. If the oil is spilt, charge new oil equivalent to the spilt oil.
3. Check to ensure that the oil is not foul.
If foul, replace it with new one. Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

Feeding Oil Pipe

Oil Separator

Oil Pan

(9) Remove the suction pipe of the compressor.

Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

Suction Pipe

2-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(10) Remove three nuts fixing the compressor and remove the compressor.
There is no nut at the left rear side.
NOTES:
1. Pull out the compressor without removing the oil heater.
Remove the oil heater after the compressor is put outside the unit. (Constant Comp. Only)
2. When lifting the compressor, hold the discharge pipe vertically and turn it to the left and pull the
compressor towards the front side by paying attention to the compressor leg not to touch the
suction pipe.
(11) Regarding remounting the compressor work, perform the above work in the reverse processes.

Adjustable Wrench or Spanner,

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Suction Pipe
Pull out towards
Pay attention to front side.
this part not to touch
the compressor leg.
Special Nut

Vibration-proof Rubber

Lift and move

towards left

Front Side

2-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.7 Removing Compressors for MC1 and MC2

(RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1, RAS-24FS5 and RAS-30FS5)

Do not expose the inner refrigeration cycle to the atmosphere for a long period of time when
replacing a compressor to protect the cycle from mixing water or foreign particles.
If exposed for a long time, seal pipe ends using caps or tape certainly.

Remove the caps for the compressor just before replacing the compressor.

Check to ensure each terminal No. when connecting compressor power wires.
If incorrectly connected, the compressor will fail due to reverse rotation.

Before starting this work, collect refrigerant into a cylinder from the cycle.
(1) Remove front service panel according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front Service Panel”.
(2) Release the lace for top cap of the compressor and remove the top cap.
(3) Remove the holder for Td thermistor on the compressor.
(4) Remove the Td thermistor on the top of the compressor.
NOTE:
The thermostat fixer, holder, thermostat holder and holder for Td thermistor are used again when
reassembling.
Keep them in a box so that the parts are
stored correctly. Phillips Screwdriver, Charge-Hose,
Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

MC1 MC2
MC3 MC4

Thermostat
Holder
Holder

Holder for Td Thermistor

Water-proof Cover Cap Td
Thermistor Thermostat Td Thermistor
Fixer
Lace Water-proof Cover

Wires for Compressor

Terminal Box Cover

2-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(5) Release the lace for the water-proof cover, open the water-proof cover from the front side.
NOTE:
Remove the water-proof cover in the arrow mark direction as shown by paying attention to the cut
part of the water-proof cover in order to avoid any damages.
(6) Remove the spring for the oil heater.

Oil Heater
(MC1 Only)

Direction to Remove

Remove the spring.

Water-proof Cover

Oil Heater

(7) Remove the terminal cover for the compressor and disconnect the wiring to the compressor
terminals. Check to ensure that the terminals Nos. are indicated. If the terminal Nos. are not
identified, at reassembling, the compressor will fail due to reverse rotation.
NOTES:
1. Check to ensure that the faston terminals for the compressor are normal. When a pulling force of
20N or more is required, it is normal. If abnormal, replace the faston terminals with new ones.
2. Check to ensure that wires are firmly fixed.
3. It is recommended that the faston terminals be clamped to increase a contacting force after
replacing the compressor.
Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

Indication of Indication of
Terminal Number Terminal Number

V V
U U
W W

Compressor Compressor
Wires Wires
Terminal Box Terminal Box
Pull upper part of the cover. Pull upper part of the cover.

In case of MC1. In case of MC2.

2-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(8) Disconnect the discharge pipe of the compressor.

Use two spanners when disassembling the flare-nuts.
Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

Discharge Pipe

Double Spanners

(9) Remove the flare-nut at the compressor side, and disconnect the evacuating oil pipe.
There is a possibility that the oil may flow from the inside of the evacuating oil pipe.
Therefore, prepare an oil pan, etc. to collect the oil.
NOTES:
1. Completely wipe off the oil if the oil is spread to the other parts such as the compressor cover,
wiring, bottom base, etc. If not, this will cause many problems to the unit.
2. If the oil is spilt, charge new oil equivalent to the spilt oil.
3. Check to ensure that the oil is not foul.
If foul, replace it with new one. Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

Evacuating Oil Pipe

Oil Pan

2-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(10) Remove the suction pipe of the compressor. Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

Suction Pipe

(11) Remove three nuts fixing the compressor and remove the compressor.
There is no nut at the left rear side.
NOTES:
1. Pull out the compressor without removing the oil heater.
Remove the oil heater after the compressor is put outside the unit. (Constant Comp. Only)
2. When lifting the compressor, hold the discharge pipe vertically and turn it to the left and pull the
compressor towards the front side by paying attention to the compressor leg not to touch the
suction pipe.
(12) Regarding remounting the compressor work, Adjustable Wrench or Spanner,
Tool Phillips Screwdriver
perform the above work in the reverse processes.

Suction Pipe
Pull out towards
Pay attention to front side.
this part not to touch
the compressor leg.
Special Nut

Vibration-proof Rubber

Lift and move

towards left

Front Side

2-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.8 Removing Compressors for MC3 and MC4

(RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1, RAS-24FS5 and RAS-30FS5)

Do not expose the inner refrigeration cycle to the atmosphere for a long period of time when
replacing a compressor to protect the cycle from mixing water or foreign particles.
If exposed for a long time, seal pipe ends using caps or tape certainly.

Remove the caps for the compressor just before replacing the compressor.

Check to ensure each terminal No. when connecting compressor power wires.
If incorrectly connected, the compressor will fail due to reverse rotation.

Before starting this work, collect refrigerant into a cylinder from the cycle.
(1) Remove front service panel according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front Service Panel”.
(2) Release the lace for top cap of the compressor and remove the top cap.

Phillips Screwdriver, Charge-Hose,

Tool Adjustable Wrench or Spanner

In Case of More than 6HP Compressor

MC1 MC2
MC3 MC4 Cap
Lace

Water-proof Cover

2-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(3) Remove the electrical box cover according to the item 2.1.15 “Removing Electrical Components”.
(4) Disconnect the connectors (CN57 and CN58) of oil heaters.
(5) Remove the terminal box cover of the compressor and disconnect the compressor wires.
NOTE:
Check the terminal No. and mark band at disconnecting work.
If wired wrong when reassembling, the compressor will be damaged due to reverse rotation.

Terminal Box Cover

Compressor Wires

(6) Remove the suction pipe (connecting flange with four bolts)
and discharge pipe (connecting with flare nut).
Adjustable Wrench or Spanner,
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Suction Pipe

Discharge Pipe

2-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(7) Remove Td thermistor on the top of compressor.

Td thermistor is inside of the compressor cover.
NOTE:
The thermostat fixer, holder, thermostat holder and holder for Td thermistor are used again when
reassembling.
Keep them in a box so that the parts are Adjustable Wrench or Spanner,
Tool Phillips Screwdriver
stored correctly.

Thermostat
Holder
Holder

Td
Thermistor Thermostat
Fixer

(8) Remove the 2 screws fixing the compressor base.

(The compressor base is fixed by 2 screws at front of the unit.)

Adjustable Wrench or Spanner,

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Remove fixing screws for

the compressor base.

2-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(9) Draw the compressor and remove it.

Check to ensure that the compressor dose not come off the fixing base at this work.
NOTE:
Do not remove the water-proof cover, oil heater
and slide base from the compressor when Adjustable Wrench or Spanner,
Tool Phillips Screwdriver
drawing work.

Pull towards front side.

(10) Remove the 4 special nuts, 4 vibration proof rubbers, water-proof cover, oil heater and slide bases
from the compressor.
NOTE:
The special nuts, vibration proof rubbers, slide bases, oil heater and water-proof cover are used
again when reassembling.
Keep them in a box so that the parts are Adjustable Wrench or Spanner,
Tool Phillips Screwdriver
stored correctly.

Special Nut

Vibration-proof Rubber

Oil Heater

2-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.9 Removing High Pressure Switch, High Pressure Sensor and Low Pressure Sensor
(1) Remove the front service panel according to item 2.1.2 “Removing Front Service Panel”.
(2) Collect all refrigerant from the low pressure side check joint when the high pressure switch is
removed. Use two spanners when removing
the pressure sensor. Adjustable Wrench or Spanner
Tool and Charge-Hose

RAS-5FSG and RAS-5FS3 RAS-8FSG, RAS-10FSG, RAS-8FS3

and RAS-10FS3
Check Joint for
Check Joint for High Pressure Sensor
High Pressure Sensor
High Pressure Switch
High Pressure Switch High Pressure Low Pressure
Check Joint Check Joint

Check Joint for

Low Pressure Sensor
Check Joint for
Low Pressure Sensor
Low Pressure
Check Joint High Pressure
Oil Separator Check Joint

RAS-16FSG, RAS-20FSG, RAS-16FS3 RAS-8FXG, RAS-10FXG, RAS-8FX3

and RAS-20FS3 and RAS-10FX3
High Pressure Switch High Pressure Switch

Check Joint for

High Pressure Sensor Check Joint for
High Pressure Sensor
Check Joint for High Pressure Check Joint
Low Pressure Sensor Check Joint for
Low Pressure Sensor
Low Pressure
High Pressure Check Joint Low Pressure
Oil Separator Check Joint
Check Joint Oil Separator

RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1, RAS-24FS5

and RAS-30FS5 Check Joint for Check Joint for
High Pressure Sensor Low Pressure Sensor

High Pressure High Pressure

Switch Check Joint

High Pressure
Low Pressure Sensor
Sensor Low Pressure
Check Joint
Union

2-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

A-1. Removing High Pressure Switch (RAS-5FSG, RAS-8FSG, RAS-10FSG, RAS-5FS3, RAS-8FS3,
RAS-10FS3, RAS-8FXG, RAS-10FXG, RAS-8FX3 and RAS-10FX3)
(1) Disconnect the faston terminals.
(2) Remove the high pressure switch from the brazing part of the discharge pipe by a burner.
NOTE:
Do not expose the refrigeration cycle to the atmosphere for a long period to avoid mixing of water
and foreign particles into the refrigeration cycle.
If exposed for a long period, seal the hole. Adjustable Wrench or Spanner,
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

High Pressure Switch

Faston Terminal Brazing Part

A-2. Removing High Pressure Switch (RAS-16FSG, RAS-20FSG, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FS3,

RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1, RAS-24FS5 and RAS-30FS5)
(1) Disconnect the high pressure switch from the union.
NOTE:
Do not expose the refrigeration cycle to the atmosphere for a long period to avoid mixing of water
and foreign particles into the refrigeration cycle.
If exposed for a long period, seal the hole. Adjustable Wrench or Spanner,
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

High Pressure
Switch

Union

2-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

B. Removing High Pressure Sensor and Low Pressure Sensor

(1) Remove the water-proof caps.
NOTE:
The water-proof caps are used after replacing pressure sensors.
(2) Remove the pipe of the high pressure sensor or low pressure sensor using two spanners. Firstly,
remove the check joint at the main pipe side as shown figure in 2.1.9.
(3) Remove the connector for the pressure sensors.
(4) Remove the high pressure sensor or low pressure sensor after removing each two (2) fixing screws
for the pressure sensors.
NOTE:
Put the water-proof caps on the pressure Adjustable Wrench or Spanner,
sensors again after replacing pressure sensors. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Position of Position of
Pressure Sensors Pressure Sensors

8 and 10HP
Only
20HP Only
RAS-5FSG, 5FS3 RAS-16FSG, 16FS3
8FSG, 8FS3 20FSG, 20FS3
10FSG, 10FS3
Electrical Box Water-proof
RAS-8FXG, 8FX3 Cap
10FXG, 10FX3 Low Pressure Sensor High Pressure Sensor

Mounting Plate for

Pressure Sensors

Screw

Screw Two Spanners

Firstly remove the check joint

Position of at the main pipe.
Pressure Sensors If the sensor side is removed,
refrigerant will be discharged.
RAS-24FSG1, 24FS5
30FSG1, 30FS5

2-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.10 Removing Coil for Reversing Valve Coil

Do not touch the electrical parts when the LED3 (Red) on the SNUBBER PCB (PCB5) or
the LED2 (Red) on the Inverter PCB (PCB3) is lit, since the voltage is higher than 50V.

(1) Remove the front service panel according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front Service Panel”.
(2) Remove the coil for the reversing valve as shown below.

Adjustable Wrench, Spanner,

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

RVR1 or 211

RVR2 or 212 RVR2 or 212 RVR1

RVR2
8 and 10HP
Only 20HP Only
RAS-5FSG, 5FS3 RAS-16FSG, 16FS3 RAS-8FXG, 8FX3
8FSG, 8FS3 20FSG, 20FS3 10FXG, 10FX3
10FSG, 10FS3

The arrow mark ( ) indicates the

position of the reversing valve coil.
The figure is the front view one.

Reversing Valve Coil

RVR2

RAS-24FSG1, 24FS5
30FSG1, 30FS5

2-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.11 Removing Coil for Solenoid Valve Coil

Do not touch the electrical parts when the LED3 (Red) on the SNUBBER PCB (PCB5) or
the LED2 (Red) on the Inverter PCB (PCB3) is lit, since the voltage is higher than 50V.

(1) Remove the front service panel according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front Service Panel”.
(2) Remove the fixing screw (1 piece) for solenoid valve coil.
(3) Remove the solenoid valve coil after removing Adjustable Wrench, Spanner,
the fixing screw (1 piece) for the solenoid valve. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

RAS-5FSG, 5FS3, 8FSG, 8FS3, 10FSG, 10FS3, 16FSG, 16FS3, 20FSG and 20FS3
RAS-8FXG, 8FX3, 10FXG, 10FX3
SVA or 20A SVA
SVA or 20A
SVB
SVC

RAS-5FSG, 5FS3 RAS-16FSG, 16FS3 RAS-8FXG, 8FX3

8FSG, 8FS3 20FSG, 20FS3 10FXG, 10FX3
10FSG, 10FS3

Solenoid Valve Coil for

Gas Bypass SVA or 20A

SVB: Solenoid Valve Coil for Liquid Bypass (Only for FX Series)
SVC: Solenoid Valve Coil for Liquid Bypass (Only for FX Series)

RAS-24FSG1, 30FSG1, 24FS5 and 30FS5

*The solenoid valve 20D2 is located at

SVD1 behind the electrical box.
C
SVA4 C
SVD2
SVA1 SVA2

SVA3 SVF1

B B
A
B SVF2
SVE2

SVE1

Details of A Details of B Details of C

Solenoid
Valve Coil

Solenoid Solenoid
Valve Coil Valve Coil

SVF1, SVF2...for Oil Return SVA1 to SVA4...for Gas Bypass SVD1, SVD2...for Heat Exchanger Change
SVE1, SVE2...for Heat Exchanger

2-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.12 Removing Thermistor for Liquid Pipe

Do not touch the electrical parts when the LED3 (Red) on the SNUBBER PCB (PCB5) or
the LED2 (Red) on the Inverter PCB (PCB3) is lit, since the voltage is higher than 50V.

(1) Remove the front service panel according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front Service Panel”.
(2) Remove two (2) screws fixing the electrical box cover and remove the electrical box cover.
(3) Pull out the fixing plate for the thermistor from the pipe after detaching the CORK TAPE, and remove
the thermistor for the liquid pipe.

THM11
THM10

THM10 THM11 THM10

RAS-5FSG, 5FS3 RAS-16FSG, 16FS3 RAS-8FXG, 8FX3

8FSG, 8FS3 20FSG, 20FS3 10FXG, 10FX3
10FSG, 10FS3

Thermistor
Thermistor
Holder

THM11
THM10 THM5 Seal completely
by cork tape.

RAS-24FSG1, 24FS5
30FSG1, 30FS5

2-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.13 Removing Reversing Valve

(RAS-5FSG, RAS-8FSG, RAS-10FSG, RAS-16FSG, RAS-20FSG, RAS-5FS3, RAS-8FS3,
RAS-10FS3, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FS3, RAS-8FXG, RAS-10FXG, RAS-8FX3 and RAS-10FX3)
Before starting this work, collect refrigerant into a cylinder from the cycle and turn off all power source
switches.
(1) Remove the front service panel according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front Service Panel”.
(2) Remove the electrical box cover according to the item 2.1.15 “Removing Electrical Components”.
(3) Remove all the field wiring at the terminal board for control between the indoor and outdoor units,
and power source terminal board. Phillips Screwdriver, Spanner,
(4) Disconnect the wiring connections and check Tool Hexagon Wrench, Wet Cloth,
to ensure that all stop valves are open. Burner, Pliers

Power Source
Terminal Board for Terminal Board
Control Circuit

Stop Valve

(5) Disconnect the following to remove the reversing valve.

(a) Brazing Portion between Reversing Valve and Discharge Pipe.
(b) Brazing Portion of the Right and the Left Pipes of Three Pipes from the Reversing Valve.
(c) Brazing Portion of the Center Pipe of Three Pipes from the Reversing Valve
NOTE: Phillips Screwdriver, Spanner,
Cover the reversing valve with wet cloth to protect Tool Hexagon Wrench, Wet Cloth,
it from excessively high temperature by a burner. Burner, Pliers

Brazing
RVR1 or 211

RVR2 or 212 RVR2 or 212

8 and 10HP
Only 20HP Only
RAS-5FSG, 5FS3 RAS-16FSG, 16FS3
8FSG, 8FS3 20FSG, 20FS3
10FSG, 10FS3
Brazing

RVR1
Brazing RVR2
8 and 10HP
Only

RAS-8FXG, 8FX3
10FXG, 10FX3

2-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.14 Removing Reversing Valve (RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1, RAS-24FS5 and RAS-30FS5)

Before starting this work, collect refrigerant into a cylinder from the cycle and turn off all power source
switches.
(1) Remove the front service panel according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front Service Panel”.
(2) Remove the electrical box cover according to the item 2.1.15 “Removing Electrical Components”.
(3) Remove all the field wiring at the terminal board for control between the indoor and outdoor units,
and power source terminal board.
Phillips Screwdriver, Spanner,
(4) Disconnect the wiring connections and check Tool Hexagon Wrench, Wet Cloth,
to ensure that two stop valves are open. Burner, Pliers

Power Source
Terminal Board for Terminal Board
Control Circuit

Stop Valve

R407
R407

(5) Disconnect the following to remove the reversing valve.

(a) Brazing Portion between Reversing Valve and Discharge Pipe.
(b) Brazing Portion of the Right and the Left Pipes of Three Pipes from the Reversing Valve.
(c) Brazing Portion of the Center Pipe of Three Pipes from the Reversing Valve
NOTE:
Phillips Screwdriver, Spanner,
Cover the reversing valve with wet cloth to protect
Tool Hexagon Wrench, Wet Cloth,
it from excessively high temperature by a burner.
Burner, Pliers

Brazing

RVR2

Brazing

Brazing
RAS-24FSG1, 24FS5
30FSG1, 30FS5

2-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.15 Removing Electrical Components

(RAS-5FSG, RAS-8FSG, RAS-10FSG, RAS-16FSG, RAS-20FSG, RAS-5FS3, RAS-8FS3,
RAS-10FS3, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FS3, RAS-8FXG, RAS-10FXG, RAS-8FX3 and RAS-10FX3)

Do not touch the electrical parts when the LED3 (Red) on the SNUBBER PCB (PCB5) or
the LED2 (Red) on the Inverter PCB (PCB3) is lit, since the voltage is higher than 50V.

1. When replacing transistor module (IPM) and diode module (DM) on heat radiation fins, spread silicone
grease (made by Shinetsu Chemical Co., G746) lightly over the surface touching fins.
2. Identify terminals Nos. with the mark band Nos. when reassembling. If incorrectly connected,
malfunctions or damages of electric components will occur.
3. Correctly insert two wires of U and V phases for the power cable of Inv. Comp. into the current sensor,
CTU and CTV on PCB3. Connect the U phase of the power cable and U phase of the current sensor as
a combination, and the V phase of the power cable and V phase of the current sensor as a combination
respectively. If incorrectly connected, malfunction or damages will occur.
4. Do not clamp electrical wires between a mounting electric component and plates or electric parts when a
PCB is remounted.
5. Screws, bushes and collars are used to fix the inverter PCB. Check to ensure that the bushes and
collars are used when fixing the inverter PCB again. If not used, it may cause malfunction.
6. In the case that the control PCB is replaced, set all the dip switch at the same position as the original
ones were. If not set, malfunction may occur.
7. Do not apply a strong force to electric components and PCBs to avoid damages.

(1) Removing PCBs

(a) Remove two (2) screws fixing the electrical box cover and remove the electrical box cover.
(b) Disconnect the connector connected to the PCB and clamp the middle portion of the holder by
pinchers and pull it out. Pull the PCB by applying a force by finger to the portion near the holder of
the PCB from the rear side.
(c) Replacing Inverter PCB (PCB3)
After removing four (4) M3 screws and remove bushes and collars from the PCB.
When remounting, firmly mount the bushes
and collars. Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Pincher

Middle Part of Holder

PCB

Screw Collar

PCB
Screw Bush

2-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(2) Others
Other parts located at the rear side of PCB mounting plate and AC chopper mounting plate should be
replaced as follows.
(a) Remove two (2) screws fixing the mounting plate for the PCB and turn the plate towards the front
side.
(b) Remove two (2) screws fixing the mounting plate for the AC chopper and turn the plate
towards the front side.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Mounting Plate Mounting Plate

for AC Chopper for PCB

(3) Removing Magnetic Contactor for Inverter Compressor

(a) Remove two (2) screws fixing the mounting plate for the PCB and turn the plate towards the front
side.
(b) Remove two (2) screws fixing the magnetic contactor for inverter compressor.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Mounting Plate Mounting Plate Mounting Contactor for

for PCB for PCB Inverter Compressor

2-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.1.16 Removing Electrical Components (RAS-24FSG1, RAS-30FSG1, RAS-24FS5 and RAS-30FS5)

Do not touch the electrical parts when the LED201 (Red) on the ISPM(1) is lit, since the
voltage is higher than 50V.

1. When replacing inverter system power module (ISPM for 380-415/380V 50/60Hz, ISPM1 and ISPM2 for
220V 60Hz) on heat radiation fins, spread silicone grease (made by Shinetsu Chemical Co., G746)
lightly over the surface touching fins.
2. Identify terminals Nos. with the mark band Nos. when reassembling. If incorrectly connected,
malfunctions or damages of electric components will occur.
3. Connect the cables of the inverter compressor correctly to ISPM(1). If incorrectly connected,
malfunction or damages will occur.
4. Do not clamp electrical wires between a mounting electric component and plates or electric parts when a
ISPM(1) is remounted.
5. In the case that the control PCB is replaced, set all the dip switch at the same position as the original
ones were. If not set, malfunction may occur.
6. Do not apply a strong force to electric components and PCBs to avoid damages.

(1) Removing Electrical Box

Before this work, remove the service panel according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front Service
Panel”.
(a) Loosen two (2) screws fixing the electrical box cover and remove it.
NOTE:
Do not remove screws for the electrical box cover so that it does not fall off.
(b) Loosen clamps for the electrical wiring.
(c) Disconnect the connectors connected to the PCB.
(d) Remove the compressor cables, power source cables and operation wires from electrical box.
(e) Disconnect the connectors for fan motor.
(f) Lift up the electrical box and unhook it from the side cover. Draw the electrical box forwards.
(Check to ensure that the cables does
not pull with a great force.) Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Pincher

Electrical Box of Control Section

Electrical Box of Inverter Section

2-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(2) Removing PCB (Electrical Box for Control)

Before this work, remove the right side front cover according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front
Service Panel”.
(a) Disconnect the connectors connected to the PCB and clamp the middle portion of the holder by
pinchers and pull it out.
NOTES:
1. Do not touch the electrical part of the PCB.
2. Do not apply a great force to the PCB. Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Pincher, Nippers

Magnetic Contactor for

Constant Speed Compressor Electrical Box

C12
C10
R S T
Middle Part of Holder
+

IC2 IC9
M63826P

M63826P

+ +

N
L3

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2
DSW1 DSW2 DSW3 PSW1 PSW2 PSW3
L2

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DSW4 DSW5
L1

1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4
DSW6 DSW7 DSW8 DSW9

PC1 PC2

D122
R144 PCB
R S T MP
L1 L2 L3 N

Details of A

PCB
PCB Mounting Plate Screw
for PCB Mounting Plate

(3) Removing Other Electrical Parts (Electrical Box for Control)

Before this work, remove the right side front cover according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front
Service Panel”.
(a) Disconnect the cables connected to each electrical part.
(b) Remove screws for the electrical parts mounting.
(c) When replace the electrical box behind the PCB mounting plate, remove two (2) screws
for the PCB mounting plate and turn the plate
towards the front side. Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Pincher, Nippers

Fuse for Power Source

32A

32A

(a)
R S T
(a)

(a)

(a)
N
L3
L2
L1

R S T MP
L1 L2 L3 N

Capacitor Noise
Filter

2-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(4) Removing Other

Before this work, remove the center front panel cover according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front
Service Panel”.
(a) Disconnect the cables connected to each electrical part.
(b) Remove screws for the electrical parts mounting.
NOTES:
1. Do not touch the electrical part of the PCB.
2. Do not apply a great force to the PCB. Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Nippers

This example figure is 380-415V 50Hz Fuse for Fan Motor (MOF2) Fuse for Inverter
and 380V 60Hz. Reactor Magnetic Contactor Noise Filter Compressor (MC1)

CN201 R1 S1

PD P1 P N RB
RSTUVW

L1 L2 L3 N
10A

COM2
MAIN1 SUB1 COM1

Resistor
ISPM Capacitor
for Fan Motor
AC Chopper Smoothing Capacitor (MOF2) Terminal Board
for Inverter for Power Source

(5) Removing ISPM(1)

Before this work, remove the service panel according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front Service
Panel”. Check to ensure that LED201 (Red) of the ISPM(1) is off.
(a) Loosen two (2) screws fixing the inverter electrical box cover and remove it.
NOTE:
Do not remove screws for the inverter electrical box cover so that it does not fall off.
(b) Disconnect the connectors and cables connected to the ISPM(1).
(c) Remove four (4) screws fixing the ISPM(1) and remove it.
NOTE:
Do not apply a great force to the PCB
Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Pincher
otherwise the ISPM(1) will be damaged.
ISPM1
P1
P

RB
TB3
R

CN207
S

CN206
T
for Compressor
Power Cable

LED201
U
V

Control Cable
W

for PCB

Control Cable
for ISPM2
Fixing Screw for ISPM1

Do not touch the any electrical parts during LED201 (Red) on ISPM(1) is ON.
If touched, electric shock will occur.

2-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.1 Outdoor Unit)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(6) Removing ISPM2 (In the case of 220V/60Hz)

Before this work, remove the service cover panel according to the item 2.1.2 “Removing Front
Service Panel”.
(a) Loosen two (2) screws fixing the inverter electrical box cover and remove it.
NOTE:
Do not remove screws for the inverter electrical box cover so that it does not fall off.
(b) Disconnect the connectors and cables to the ISPM2.
(c) Remove two (2) screws fixing the ISPM2 and remove it.
NOTE:
Do not apply a great force to the PCB
otherwise the ISPM2 will be damaged. Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Pincher

Control Cable
Control
for Fan Motor
Cable

PD
W
V
for Fan Motor
Power Cable

P
U
N

Fixing Screw for ISPM2

Do not touch the any electrical parts during LED201 (Red) on ISPM(1) is ON.
If touched, electric shock will occur.

2-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)
2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type (RPI-0.8FSG1 to RPI-5.0FSG1)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.2.1 Removing Long Life Filter

The air intake grilles are field-supplied. Therefore, there is a case that the replacement of the long life
filter is not easily performed depending on the installation manners.
Check it carefully.

2.2.2 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB)

(1) Loosen two (2) M4 screws fixing the electrical box cover and remove the electrical box cover by
lifting it upwards.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Electrical Box Cover

Screws

2-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(2) There are three (3) PCBs. The control PCB is fixed with four (4) PCB holders. Clamp the center of
the PCB holders by a long-nose plier and pull out the PCB.
(3) Remove three (3) M4 screws and remove the
AC chopper module PCB. Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Long-nose Pliers

G RPI-0.8FSG1 to RPI-2.5FSG1

Before Minor Change After Minor Change

Connector for Connector for
Thermistor Thermistor
PCB2
(AC Chopper
Connector for Module) Connector for
Float Switch Float Switch
PCB2
(AC Chopper Connector for Connector for
Module) Expansion Valve Expansion Valve

PCB1 PCB1

TB TB

G RPI-3.0FSG1 to RPI-5.0FSG1

Before Minor Change After Minor Change

Connector for Thermistor Connector for Thermistor
PCB1 PCB1
Connector for Connector for
Float Switch Float Switch
Connector for Connector for
PCB2 Expansion Valve Expansion Valve
(AC Chopper
Module PCB)
PCB2
TB (AC Chopper
Module PCB)
TB

ATTENTION:
Do not touch any components on the PCB.
Do not apply excessive forces to the PCB or it will cause a malfunction.

2-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.2.3 Removing Indoor Fan and Fan Motor

The indoor fan and the fan motor for RPI-0.8 to 2.5FSG1 can be removed only from the bottom side.
The indoor fan and the fan motor for RPI-3.0 to 5.0FSG1 can be removed from the side (electrical box
side) and the bottom side.

(1) Remove the electrical box cover according to the item 2.2.2 “Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB)”.
(2) Free the cables inside of the electrical box.
Disconnect the connector for the float switch electrical wiring. Disconnect the connectors for the
electronic expansion valve, the gas pipe thermistor, liquid pipe thermistor, discharge gas thermistor
and the fan motor from the PCB.
(There are two (2) connectors for the fan motor. One is located on the AC chopper module PCB, and
remove it.)

< Removing Indoor Fan and Fan Motor from Side (Electrical Box Side) of Unit
(Only for RPI-3.0 to 5.0FSG1>
Q’ty of Casing and Runner: Each 2 / Q’ty of Fan Motor: 1
Removing them according to the following items (3) to (10).
(3) Remove seven (7) screws fixing the
electrical box and remove the electrical box. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screws
(M4x7)

Electrical Box

2-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(4) Remove the electrical box and the fan motor assembly can be seen.
Remove the wires fixed by the wire clamp on the fan motor fixing plate.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Wire

Wire Clamp

(5) Remove four (4) M4 screws fixing the casing at the side of the casing and remove the ring of the
casing.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Ring

Runner

Runner Fixing Screw

(6) Loosen the screw fixing the fan runner onto the fan motor shaft by the adjustable wrench and pull out
the fan runner.

2-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(7) Remove four (4) screws fixing the casing onto the motor fixing plate and pull out the casing.
When pulling out the casing, turn the casing by an angle of 180°.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

M4 Screws
M4 Screws

Rotate the casing by 180o

Pull out the casing at this position

(8) Remove two (2) M4 screws fixing the flange in front of the fan motor and remove the flange.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Flange

M4 Screws

2-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(9) Remove two (2) lower M6 screws fixing the motor base and loosen the upper two (2) M6 screws.
(10) Remove four (4) M4 screws fixing the ring of the casing at the rear side of the fan motor and remove
the motor base, the ring and the runner at the
same time. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

M6 Screws

Runner

Motor Base
Motor Base

Ring

M4 Screws
Fan Motor

(11) Loosen the screw fixing the runner onto the fan motor by the adjustable wrench and pull out the
runner.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Adjustable Wrench

Runner Fixing Screw

ATTENTION:
The total weight of the motor base, the fan motor, the ring and the runner is approximately 15kg.
Carefully perform the above removing work.

2-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

< Removing Indoor Fan and Fan Motor from Bottom Side (For All Models)>
Disconnect the connector for the fan motor wires according to the procedures (1) and (2) in page 2-39.
(3) Remove the lower M4 screws (Q’ty: A) fixing the suction flange.
Q’ty of Screws (A): 2 (For RPI-0.8 to 1.5FSG1)
3 (For RPI-2.0 to 4.0FSG1)
4 (For RPI-5.0FSG1) Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Suction Flange
Screws (M4x A )

(4) Remove the lower M4 screws (Q’ty: B) fixing the lower cover at the indoor fan side and remove the
lower cover.
Q’ty of Screws (B): 11 (For RPI-0.8 to 1.5FSG1)
12 (For RPI-2.0 to 5.0FSG1) Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screws (M4x B )

Lower Cover

2-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(5) Remove the lower cover and the fan assembly can be seen.
Remove the wires for the motor fixed by the cord clamp of the fan motor fixing plate.

G For RPI-3.0FSG1 to RPI-5.0FSG1

(6) Remove eight (8) M4 screws fixing the casing onto the fan fixing plate and move the casing slightly.
(7) Remove two (2) M4 screws fixing the motor fixing band to the motor base and remove the motor, the
casing and the runner at the same time.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Motor Fixing Band Screws (M4x2)

Screws (M4x8)

ATTENTION:
The total weight of the motor base, the fan motor, the ring and the runner is approximately 15kg.
Carefully perform the above removing work.

2-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

G For RPI-0.8FSG1 to RPI-2.5FSG1

(6) Remove the lower M4 screws (Q’ty: C) fixing the casing onto the fan fixing plate, push the hooks at
both sides of the casing and remove the lower part of the casing.
Q’ty of Screws (C): 2 (For RPI-0.8 to 1.5FSG1)
4 (For RPI-2.0 to 2.5FSG1) Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Hook
Casing

(7) Remove two (2) screws fixing the motor fixing band to the motor base and remove the runner with
the motor shaft.
(8) Loosen the screws fixing the fan motor and the runner by the hexagonal wrench (for M6 screw)
and pull out remove the runner.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Hexagonal Wrench

Hexagonal Wrench
Motor Fixing Band
Motor Shaft

Screw

Runner

ATTENTION:
The total weight of the motor base, the fan motor, the ring and the runner is approximately 15kg.
Carefully perform the above removing work.

2-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.2.4 Removing Thermistor for Liquid Piping and Gas Piping

(1) Remove eight (8) M4 screws fixing the service cover and remove the service cover.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screws (M4 x 8)

Service Cover

(2) Remove the cork tape, pipe insulations and the thermistor holder, the thermistors for pipes can be
removed.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Expansion Valve

Thermistor for
Gas Piping
Thermistor for
Liquid Piping

2-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.2.5 Removing Electronic Expansion Valve Coil

(1) Remove the service cover according to the item 2.2.4 “Removing Thermistor for Liquid Piping and
Gas Piping”.
(2) The following procedures are the same
with other models. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

2.2.6 Removing Float Switch

(1) Remove the service cover according to the item 2.2.4 “Removing Thermistor for Liquid Piping and
Gas Piping”.
(2) The float switch is fixed on the heat exchanger fixing plate.
Remove the float switch by using two spanners.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Spanner

Float Switch

ATTENTION:
When reassembling, handle the float switch carefully.
(Tightening Torque: Approx. 0.3N-m)
If the float switch is dropped, malfunction will occur.

2-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.2.7 Removing Drain Pump

In case of the units with the drain pump (RPI-0.8 to 1.5FSG1), the drain pump is fixed on the service
cover.
Remove the fixing screws and remove the drain pump.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Spanner

A
Drain Connection

Indoor Unit Service Cover

Drain Pan
View from A
Drain Pump

2-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.2.8 Removing Drain Pan

(1) Remove the lower M4 screws (Q’ty: A) fixing the suction flange.
* Q’ty of Screws (A): 2 (For RPI-0.8 to 1.5FSG1)
3 (For RPI-2.0 to 4.0FSG1)
4 (For RPI-5.0FSG1) Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Suction Flange
Screws (M4x A )

(2) Remove the lower M4 screws (Q’ty: B) fixing the lower cover at the indoor fan side and remove the
lower cover.
* Q’ty of Screws (B): 11 (For RPI-0.8 to 1.5FSG1)
12 (For RPI-2.0 to 5.0FSG1) Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screws (M4x B )

Lower Cover

2-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.2 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(3) Remove the lower M4 screws (Q’ty: D) fixing the discharge flange.
* Q’ty of Screws (D): 2 (For RPI-0.8 to 1.5FSG1)
3 (For RPI-2.0 to 4.0FSG1)
4 (For RPI-5.0FSG1) Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Discharge Flange

Screws (M4xD)

(4) Remove eight (8) M4 screws fixing the lower cover at the indoor heat exchanger side and remove the
lower cover.
(5) Remove M4 screws (eight (8) for each side) fixing the side frames at both sides and remove the side
frames.
(6) Pull the drain pan downward. Phillips Screwdriver,
Tool Bucket (approx. 5 liters content)

Screws (M4x8)
(Both Sides)

Drain Pan

Side Frame Side Frame

Screws (M4x8)

Lower Cover

2-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.3 In-the-Ceiling Type)
2.3 In-the-Ceiling Type (RPI-8FSG1 and RPI-10FSG1)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.3.1 Removing Long Life Filter

The air intake grilles are field-supplied. Therefore, there is a case that the replacement of the long life
filter is not easily performed depending on the installation manners.
Check it carefully.
2.3.2 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB)
(1) Loosen four (4) screws fixing the electrical box cover and remove the electrical box cover by lifting it
upwards.
(2) The PCB is fixed with four (4) PCB holders. Clamp the center of the PCB holders by a long-nose
plier and pull out the PCB.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Long-nose Pliers

Electrical Box Cover

Screws

PCB

Expanded Part
of Holder

PCB

PCB Holders

ATTENTION:
Do not touch any parts on the PCB.
Do not apply a strong force to the PCB, or it will cause malfunction of the PCB.

2-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.3 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.3.3 Removing Indoor Fan and Fan Motor

(1) Remove the electrical box cover according to the item 2.3.2 “Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB)”.
(2) Remove four (4) screws fixing the electrical box plate and remove the electrical box plate.
(3) Disconnect the connector for the fan motor.
(4) Remove three (3) screws fixing the electrical box and
remove the electrical box on the unit as shown.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Electrical Box Cover Electrical Box Plate

Electrical Box
Runner Fixing Screw

Ring Fixing Screws

(5) Remove three (3) screws fixing the ring and remove the ring.
(6) Loosen the screw fixing the fan runner onto the fan motor shaft and remove the near side fan runner.
(7) Remove the screw fixing the fan casing and
pull out the near side fan casing. Phillips Screwdriver,
Tool Hexagonal Wrench (M8)

Fan Casing
Fixing Screws

2-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.3 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(8) Remove three (3) screws fixing the ring onto the
rear side fan casing and remove the ring. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Fan Casing

Ring

Ring Fixing Screws

(9) Remove four (4) screws fixing the motor base.

(10) Pull out the fan motor with motor base.
Do not pull out the rear side fan casing. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Motor

Motor Base

2-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.3 In-the-Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.3.4 Removing Electronic Expansion Valve and Thermistors

(1) Remove three (3) screws fixing the heat exchanger cover and remove the heat exchanger cover.
(2) Remove four (4) screws fixing the maintenance
cover and remove the maintenance cover. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screws

Maintenance Cover

Heat Exchanger Cover Screws

(3) Remove the electronic expansion valve by using two (2) spanners.
(4) Remove the thermistors attaching the pipe of
heat exchanger. Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Spanner

Expansion Valve Thermistor

2-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.4 4-Way Cassette Type)
2.4 4-Way Cassette Type

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.4.1 Removing Long Life Filter

(1) The long life filter is located inside of the air intake grille. Detach the filter after opening the air intake
grille. By pushing the knob in the arrow mark direction, the air intake grille can be opened.
(2) The filter can be removed from the air intake grille by supporting the lower side of the air intake grille
and filter, and unhooking it from the extrusion part.

Knob

Air Intake Grille

2.4.2 Removing Air Intake Grille

By lifting the air intake grille at an angle of approximately 30° and releasing its chain, the air intake grille
can be removed by holding it upwards and then towards you. If the chain is released and the angle is 90°,
the air intake grille can not be removed.

Upper Part of Filter

Hook

Air Intake Grille

Long Life Filter Chain Hook

Lower Part of Filter

2-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.4 4-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.4.3 Removing Electrical Box Cover

By opening the air intake grille, the electrical box can be seen.
Remove two (2) screws fixing the electrical box cover and remove the cover.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Electrical
Box Cover

Screws

2.4.4 Removing Optional Air Panel

(1) Remove the electrical box cover according to the item 2.4.3 “Removing Electrical Box Cover”.
Disconnect the connector CN17 for louver motor on the indoor PCB.

Electrical
Box

Connector for
Louver Motor

CN17

PCB

2-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.4 4-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(2) Remove the air intake grille from the optional air panel.
(3) Remove the four (4) corner pockets as below.
Insert slotted screwdriver or coin into the slot of corner pocket and unhook the hook of corner pocket
in number order of 1 to 4.
(4) Remove four (4) screws of the optional air panel and hook it by using the hinge to the hook of the
drain pan as shown in the figure.
Remove the optional air panel from the unit. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

4
Hinge
Coin or
1 Slotted Screwdriver

2
3

Lifting
Corner Position

Hook

Fixing Screw

2.4.5 Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor

(1) Remove the air intake grille according to the item 2.4.2 “Removing Air Intake Grille”.
(2) Drawing Electrical box
(a) Disconnect the thermistors, drain motor connector (PCN6) and float switch connector from the
PCB.
(b) Loosen screw of the wire clamp and remove the wire clamp.
(c) Remove three (3) screws fixing the electrical
box and hang the electrical box. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Fixing Screw for Electrical Box Electrical Box

Fixing Plate
for Electrical
Wiring

Screw for
Drain Pump Fixing Plate
Motor Connector
Float Switch Discharge Thermistor
(PCN6)
Connector (CN14) Connector (THM2)

2-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.4 4-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.4.6 Removing Bell-Mouth

(1) Remove three (3) screws fixing the bell-mouth onto the drain pan and remove the bell-mouth.
(2) Remove nut and washer fixing the runner and remove the runner.
(3) Remove the earth wire for the fan motor. (Only for 4 and 5HP)
(4) Disconnect the fan motor connector.
(5) Remove three (3) nuts fixing the fan motor and remove the fan motor. (When reassembling the fan
motor, tightening torque of the nut for
the fan motor is approximately 8N-m.) Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Motor
Nut (3 pcs.)

Runner

Flat Washer
Cap Nut

Bell-Mouth

Screw (3 pcs.)

2-58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.4 4-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.4.7 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB)

(1) Remove the air intake grille according to the item 2.4.2 “Removing Air Intake Grille”.
(2) Remove the electrical box cover according to the item 2.4.3 “Removing Electrical Box Cover”.
(3) Disconnect the all wiring connectors of the PCBs.
(4) Remove the PCBs by holding the expanded part of the holders using long-nose pliers.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Long-nose Plier

NOTE:
Do not touch electrical components on the PCBs.
If great force is applied to the PCB, it will be faulty.

PCB for Power

Electrical Box Source

Holder

PCB

Plier
PCB

2-59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.4 4-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.4.8 Removing Drain Pan

(1) Remove the optional air panel according to the item 2.4.4 “Removing Optional Air Panel”.
(2) Remove the electrical box cover according to the item 2.4.3 “Removing Electrical Box Cover”.
Disconnect the connectors of the air outlet thermistor, piping thermistors (2), electronic expansion
valve, drain pump, float switch and fan motor.
(3) Remove the fan runner and fan motor according to the item 2.4.5 “Removing Fan Runner and Fan
Motor”.
(4) Drain the drain water by pulling the rubber plug.
Check clogging at the drain hole.
(Do not use a cutter when removing the rubber plug. If used, the rubber plug will be damaged.)
(5) Remove four (4) bolts for fixing the drain pan and remove the drain pan.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Rubber Plug

Drain Pan

Bolt for
Fixing Drain Pan

2-60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.4 4-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.4.9 Removing Drain-Up Mechanism

(1) Remove the drain pan according to the item 2.4.8 “Removing Drain Pan”.
(2) Remove the hose band and remove the drain hose.
(3) Remove screw of earth wiring.
(4) Hold the drain-up mechanism and remove three (3) screws of the fixing plate for the drain-up
mechanism.
(5) Remove the drain-up mechanism with the
fixing plate. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screw for Earth Wiring

Fixing Plate

Drain Hose

Screws
Drain-Up Hose Band
Mechanism

2.4.10 Removing Float Switch

(1) Remove the drain pan according to the item 2.4.8 “Removing Drain Pan”.
(2) Loosen the resin nut for fixing the float switch and remove the float switch.
Remove two (2) screws of fixing base for fixing the drain-up mechanism when removing the drain-up
mechanism.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screw for Screw for

Fixing Plate Fixing Plate

Fixing Base
Nut

Float Switch Drain-Up Mechanism

NOTE:
Carefully handle the float switch.
Do not drop it on the floor. If dropped, malfunction may occur.
When mounting, attach the float switch to the fixing plate by hand.
(Do not use a motor-driven screwdriver.)

2-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.4 4-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.4.11 Removing Thermistors for Liquid Pipe and Gas Pipe

(1) Remove the optional air panel according to the item 2.4.4 “Removing Optional Air Panel”.
(2) Remove the bell-mouth according to No.3 of the item 2.4.5 “Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor”.
(3) Remove the drain pan according to the item 2.4.8 “Removing Drain Pan”.
(4) Remove the butyl sheet, pull out the fixing plate for the thermistor from the gas pipe, where the
thermistor is located, and then pull out the thermistor.
(5) Remove the butyl sheet, pull out the fixing plate for the thermistor from the liquid pipe, where
the thermistor is located, and then pull out
the thermistor. Phillips Screwdriver,
Tool Bucket (approx. 5 liters content)

Fixing Plate Thermistor for

of Thermistor Gas Piping

Butyl Sheet

Thermistor for
Fixing Plate Liquid Piping
of Thermistor

Butyl Sheet

Up-Close View of Thermistor Installation

Fixing Plate
of Thermistor

Thermistor

2-62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.4 4-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.4.12 Removing Electronic Expansion Valve Coil

(1) Remove the optional air panel according to the item 2.4.4 “Removing Optional Air Panel”.
(2) Remove the bell-mouth according to No.3 of item 2.4.5 “Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor”.
(3) Remove the drain pan according to the item 2.4.8 “Removing Drain Pan”.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Expansion Valve

(4) Remove the butyl sheet at the electronic expansion valve.

(5) Prepare two (2) spanners. Hold the part of the valve body with one spanner and loosen the lock nut
with another spanner by turning the lock nut counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Do not hold the motor part when loosening the lock nut by spanner. The base of the drive part may
turn idle and be broken.
(6) Turn the lock nut by a few turn, and the drive part is separated from the screw and can be removed.
(7) Prepare the new drive part for replacement (service part) with the position of the driver (drive screw)
already adjusted.
NOTE:
During replacement work, pay attention to the separation part and prevent the dust, foreign particle,
etc. from entering into the separation part. (The exposed part by separation is the mechanical part of
the valve.)
Do not hurt the junction part of the valve with the tools.
(8) Put the drive part onto the valve body, hold them with their axes matching and attach the lock nut to
the screw part of the valve body.

2-63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.4 4-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(9) Tighten the lock nut with spanner after tightening lightly by hand.
The tightening torque shall be within the range of 12Nm (120kg-cm) to 15Nm (150kg-cm).
NOTE:
Do not apply the strong forces such as the rotating torque and the bending load to the motor by
holding the motor by hand when tightening the lock nut.
The direction of the eccentric part of the motor is assembled as the eccentric part of although the
motor is directed toward the counter direction of the fittings for piping at the valve body, the alteration
of this direction do not affect the open/close function of the valve. Therefore, the adjustment of the
direction of the motor part is not required if the position of the motor is moved toward the rotating
direction after replacement as shown below.
However, pay attention to the direction of the motor for the coil of the electronic expansion valve not
to touch other pipings and the side plate of the electrical box.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Pulse Motor

Drive Part
Gear

Output Shaft

Lock Nut
Bellows Adjustment of direction is not required.

Valve
Valve
Valve Part
Valve Body Sheet

Fig. 1 Expansion Valve Fig. 2 Direction of Drive Part

(10) After completion of the replacement, attach the electronic expansion valve in the reverse procedures
for removing.

2-64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.4 4-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.4.13 Removing Automatic Louver Motor

(1) Remove the optional air panel according to the item 2.4.4 “Removing Optional Air Panel”.
(2) Remove the motor cover after removing one (1) screw fixing the motor cover for the automatic louver
motor.
(3) Draw out the louver shaft from the automatic louver motor and remove the automatic louver motor
with fixing plate.
(4) Disconnect all the connectors connected to the motor.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screw

Corner Cover

Optional
Air Panel

Louver Shaft
Optional
Air Panel

Screw

Automatic Connector
Louver Motor

2-65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)
2.5 2-Way Cassette Type

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.5.1 Removing Long Life Filter and Air Intake Grille

(1) The long life filter is located inside of the air intake grille. The air intake grille can be opened by
pushing the knob as shown below.
(2) Detach the filter after opening the air intake grille. The filter can be removed from the air intake panel
by supporting the louver side of the air intake grille and filter, and unhooking it from the extrusion
part.
(3) The air intake grille can be removed by releasing its chain, lifting it upwards and then drawing it
towards you.

Upper Part of Filter

Hinges

Air Intake Grille

Long Life Filter Hinges

Lower Part of Filter

Knob

Air Intake Grille

2.5.2 Removing Electrical Box Cover

By opening the air intake grille, the electrical box can be seen. Loosen one (1) screw fixing the electrical
box cover and remove the cover.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screw

Electrical Box

2-66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.5.3 Removing Optional Air Panel

(1) Remove the electrical box cover by opening the air intake grille.
Disconnect the connector (CN17) for the auto-louver on the indoor PCB.
(2) Remove the air intake grille from the optional air panel.
Remove four (4) screws fixing the optional air panel.
(3) Remove the optional air panel after unhooking the hinge onto the hooks at the two positions near the
drain pan.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

(Before Alteration) (After Alteration)

Connector for Louver Motor Connector for Louver Motor

PCB2 PCB2
PCN4 TB (AC Chopper Model)

CN7

CN4

PCB PCB

Optional Air Panel

Hinge

Hook

Screws

Screw x 2
(M6x30, Only for P-G46)

2-67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.5.4 Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor

(1) Remove the optional air panel according to the item 2.5.3 “Removing Optional Air Panel”.
(2) Removing Electrical Box
(a) Disconnect the connectors for each wire.
(b) Remove two (2) screws fixing the electrical box and turn the electrical box downwards by
approximately 90. (The electrical box is hung by the hinge. Do not remove the fixing screws for
the hinge.)
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screws

Screw Hinge Hinge

Electrical
Box

(3) Removing Bell-Mouth

Remove the fixing plate after removing one (1) screw fixing the fixing plate on the support plate of the
indoor unit. (For 4.0 and 5.0HP)
Remove the bell-mouth by removing two (2) screws fixing the bell-mouth onto the fixing plate for the
drain pan of the indoor unit.
* Q’ty of Bell-Mouth: 1 (RCD-1.0 to 3.0FSG1)
2 (RCD-4.0 to 5.0FSG1) Tool Phillips Screwdriver

RCD-1.0FSG1 to RCD-3.0FSG1
RCD-4.0FSG1 and RCD-5.0FSG1

Fixing Plate for Drain Pan

Fixing Plate for Drain Pan
Fixing Plate
Supporting Plate

Bell-Mouth Bell-Mouth

Bell-Mouth Bell-Mouth
Fixing Screw Fixing Screw
Bell-Mouth

2-68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(4) Remove the fan runner and the fan motor.

Remove the fan runner after removing the cap nut and the washer fixing the fan runner.
(a) Disconnect the earth wire for the fan motor.
(b) Remove four (4) nuts fixing the fan motor and remove the fan motor.
(When reassembling, the required tightening torque for the cap nut is approximately
8N-m (80kg-cm).
* Q’ty of Fan Runner and Fan Motor: Each 1 (RCD-1.0 to 3.0FSG1)
Each 2 (RCD-4.0 to 5.0FSG1)

Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Spanner

Nut
Fan Motor

Earth

Runner
Flat Washer

Cap Nut

2-69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.5.5 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB)

(1) Remove the air intake grille according to the item 2.5.1 “Removing Long Life Filter and Air Intake
Grille”.
(2) Remove the electrical box cover according to the item 2.5.2 “Removing Electrical Box Cover”.
(3) Pull out the PCB by pinching the expanded part of the PCB holders (holding PCB at four (4)
positions) by long-nose plier.
(4) Remove three (3) fixing screws for the AC chopper.
(Pay attention to squeezing when reassembling, since the sealed earth wire and the transformer
earth wire are commonly squeezed by one (1) screw.)

Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Long-nose Plier

NOTE:
Do not touch electrical components on the PCBs.
If great force is applied to the PCB, it will be faulty.

Holder Holder

AC Chopper
PCB
Module PCB

PCB

Expanded Part
Electrical Box Cover
of Holder

2-70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.5.6 Removing Float Switch

(1) Remove the air intake grille according to the item 2.5.1 “Removing Long Life Filter and Air Intake
Grille”.
(2) Remove the bell-mouth according to the item 2.5.4 “Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor”.
(3) Remove the cover after removing two (2) fixing screws for the cover of the service access hole near
the pipes inside the unit.
(4) Removing Float Switch
Disconnect the connectors and remove the float switch after removing two (2) screw fixing the fixing
plate for float switch onto the fixing plate for the drain-up mechanism.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screws
Service Access
Cover Fixing Plate for
Connector Fixing Screws Float Switch

Fixing Plate for

Drain-Up Mechanism
Float Switch

2-71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.5.7 Removing Drain-Up Mechanism

(1) Remove the air intake grille according to the item 2.5.1 “Removing Long Life Filter and Air Intake
Grille”.
(2) Remove the bell-mouth according to the item 2.5.4 “Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor”.
(3) Remove the drain pan according to the item 2.5.8 “Removing Drain Pan”.
(4) After disconnecting the wire connector, remove two (2) fixing screws for the fixing plate for the drain-
up mechanism. Firstly support the drain-up mechanism by hand so as not to drop, remove the hose
band from the drain hose, disconnect the drain hose and then remove the drain-up mechanism.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Fixing Plate
Connector

Drain Hose

Hose Band Fixing Screws

Drain-Up Mechanism

2-72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.5.8 Removing Drain Pan

(1) Remove the air intake grille according to the item 2.5.1 “Removing Long Life Filter and Air Intake
Grille”.
(2) Open the electrical box cover according to the item 2.5.2 “Removing Electrical Box Cover”.
Disconnect the connecting wire between indoor unit and outdoor unit, electrical wiring for the
electrical box and the connectors inside of the electrical box.
(3) Remove the bell-mouth according to the item 2.5.4 “Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor”.
(4) Discharge the drain water on the drain pan by removing the rubber plug. The sealing agent is used
around the rubber plug. However, the rubber plug can be removed by pulling it out. Do not scratch
the rubber plug by a cutter, etc. Check to ensure that the water hole is not clogged by pricking with a
pencil.
(5) Removing Drain Pan
(a) Remove two (2) screws fixing the enforced plate onto the fixing plate for the drain pan.
Remove two (2) screws fixing the support plate onto the fixing plate for the drain pan and remove
the support plate. (For RCD-4.0 and 5.0FSG1)
(b) Remove two (2) fixing plate for the drain pan.
Phillips Screwdriver,
(c) Remove the drain pan. Tool Bucket (approx. 5 liters content)

RCD-1.0FSG1 to RCD-3.0FSG1
RCD-4.0FSG1 and RCD-5.0FSG1

Enforced Plate

Drain Pan

Drain Pan
Fixing Plate for Drain Pan
Fixing Plate for Drain Pan

Fixing Plate for

Rubber Plug
Drain Pan
Rubber Plug

Support Plate

2-73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.5.9 Removing Thermistors for Liquid and Gas Pipes

(1) Remove the optional air panel according to the item 2.5.3 “Removing Optional Air Panel”.
(2) Remove the bell-mouth according to the item 2.5.4 “Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor”.
(3) Remove the drain pan according to the item 2.5.8 “Removing Drain Pan”.
(4) Remove the insulation for the pipe, remove the thermistor holder from the gas piping and remove the
thermistor for the gas pipe.
(5) Remove the butyl sheet, remove the thermistor holder from the liquid piping and remove the
thermistor for the liquid pipe.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Liquid Side Thermistor for

Gas Pipe
Holder

Insulation
Gas Side

Thermistor Holder
Butyl Sheet

Holder Thermistor for Liquid Pipe

2-74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.5.10 Removing Electronic Expansion Valve Coil

(1) Remove the optional air panel according to the item 2.5.3 “Removing Optional Air Panel”.
(2) Remove the fan assembly according to the item 2.5.4 “Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor”.
(3) Remove the drain pan according to the item 2.5.8 “Removing Drain Pan”.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Expansion Valve

(4) Remove the butyl sheet at the electronic expansion valve.

(5) Prepare two (2) spanners (#19 and #14). Hold the part of the valve body with one spanner and
loosen the lock nut with another spanner by turning the lock nut counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Do not hold the motor part when loosening the lock nut by spanner. The base of the drive part may
turn idle and be broken.
(6) Turn the lock nut by a few turn, and the drive part is separated from the screw and can be removed.
(7) Prepare the new drive part for replacement (service part) with the position of the driver (drive screw)
already adjusted.
NOTE:
During replacement work, pay attention to the separation part and prevent the dust, foreign particle,
etc. from entering into the separation part. (The exposed part by separation is the mechanical part of
the valve.)
Do not hurt the junction part of the valve with the tools.
(8) Put the drive part onto the valve body, hold them with their axes matching and attach the lock nut to
the screw part of the valve body.

2-75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(9) Tighten the lock nut with spanner after tightening lightly by hand.
The tightening torque shall be within the range of 12Nm (120kg-cm) to 15Nm (150kg-cm).
NOTE:
Do not apply the strong forces such as the rotating torque and the bending load to the motor by
holding the motor by hand when tightening the lock nut.
The direction of the eccentric part of the motor is assembled as the eccentric part of although the
motor is directed toward the counter direction of the fittings for piping at the valve body, the alteration
of this direction do not affect the open/close function of the valve. Therefore, the adjustment of the
direction of the motor part is not required if the position of the motor is moved toward the rotating
direction after replacement as shown below.
However, pay attention to the direction of the motor for the coil of the electronic expansion valve not
to touch other pipings and the side plate of the electrical box.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Pulse Motor

Drive Part
Gear

Output Shaft

Lock Nut
Bellows Adjustment of direction is not required.

Valve
Valve
Valve Part
Valve Body Sheet

Fig. 1 Expansion Valve Fig. 2 Direction of Drive Part

(10) After completion of the replacement, attach the electronic expansion valve in the reverse procedures
for removing.

2-76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.5.11 Removing Automatic Louver Motor

(1) Remove the optional air panel according to the item 2.5.3 “Removing Optional Air Panel”.
(2) Remove the insulation mounted with adhesive at the both sides of the C cover assembly.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Insulation

C Cover
Assembly

Optional
Air Panel

Insulation

(3) Remove two (2) screws fixing the C cover assembly and remove the C cover assembly from the
optional air panel.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screws

C Cover
Assembly

Motor
Assembly

Optional
Air Panel

2-77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.5 2-Way Cassette Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(4) Remove two (2) screws fixing the motor assembly and remove two (2) stoppers by lifting the motor
assembly upwards (to the arrow direction) by hand.
The stopper can be removed by pulling. The motor assembly can be removed by removing the
connector at the same time.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screws
Connector

Motor Assembly

Stopper

(5) Remove one (1) screw fixing the crank and cut the plastic tie fixing the motor cord.
Remove the motor after removing two fixing screws.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Plastic Tie

Motor Assembly Motor

Motor Screw
Screws
Crank

2-78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)
2.6 Wall Type

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.6.1 Removing Air Filter

(1) Press 2 portions (right and left) of the air intake grille as shown below.

(2) Slowly pull the lower side of the air intake grille toward the front side.

Air Intake Grille

(3) Lift up the air filter, detach the hooks and draw the air filter downward.

Air Filter

2-79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.6.2 Removing Front Panel

(1) Press the “PUSH” marks at both ends of the front panel and open the suction grille by pulling toward
the front side.
(2) Remove one (1) screws at the center of the front panel. After removing the screw, close the front
panel once.
(3) Remove three (3) bushes at the louver part of
the air outlet and remove three screws. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Bush Screw Front Panel

Screws

(4) Hold both sides of the front panel, pull the front panel toward the front side slowly and lift up the front
panel with paying attention not to touch the louver at the air outlet.
(5) Lift up the front panel slightly, the three (3) catches at the upper part of the front panel are detached
from the holes of the unit body and the front panel can be removed toward the front side.
NOTE:
Do NOT hit the front panel when removing the front panel. It may break the unit body.

Front Panel

Front Panel
Extrusion

Square Hole

Unit Body

(6) For attaching the front panel, attach the front panel at the air outlet side firstly, and attach three (3)
catches at the upper part of the front panel.
(7) Open the front panel as the procedure (1), and fix the screw (1 piece) at the center of the front panel.

2-80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(8) There are three (3) catches at the inner side of the front panel. Press the catch part from the front
side and check to ensure that there is no gap between the front panel and the unit body.
NOTE:
If the gap exists between the front panel and the air outlet, it may cause air leakage and dewing may
occur at the front panel and the dew may drop.
(9) After attaching the front panel, tighten three (3) screws at the lower part of the air outlet and cover
them with the bushes.

Stoppers

No Gap

2-81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.6.3 Removing Motor for Automatic Louver

(1) Remove the front panel according to the item 2.6.2 “Removing Front Panel”.
(2) Remove the electrical box according to the item 2.6.5 “Removing Electrical Box Cover”.
(3) Remove four screws fixing the AS motor.
(4) Draw out the AS motor horizontally, the AS motor is separated from the louver shaft.
(5) For attaching the AS motor, insert the shaft of the AS motor into the D-cut hole of the louver, and
perform the reverse procedures for removing AS motor.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Connector (white)
Connector (black)

Screws

AS Motor
AS Motor

Connector (black)

Connector (white)

Louver (gray)

Louver (white)

2-82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.6.4 Removing Thermistors for Liquid Pipe, Gas Pipe, Discharge Air and Suction Air
(1) Remove the front panel according to the item 2.6.2 “Removing Front Panel”.
(2) Remove the electrical box according to the item 2.6.5 “Removing Electrical Box Cover”.
(3) Removing Thermistor for Liquid Pipe
Remove the butyl sheet protecting the thermistor for liquid pipe and remove the thermistor from the
holder.

Heat Exchanger

Expansion Valve

Thermistor for Liquid Pipe

Thermistor Holder
Lead Wire of Thermistor
Butyl Sheet

(4) Removing Thermistor for Gas Pipe

Remove the piping insulation protecting the thermistor for gas pipe, by cutting the plastic tie and
surrounding tapes and remove the thermistor from the holder.

Expansion Valve Plastic Tie

Gas Pipe Thermistor for Gas Pipe

Piping Insulation

Thermistor Holder

Lead wire of Thermistor

2-83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(5) Removing Thermistor for Discharge Air

Remove the thermistor for discharge air from the holder of the vertical louver and the hook at the
right side of the air outlet.

Vertical Louver
Vertical Louver

Holder

Thermistor for
Discharge Air

Hook
Thermistor for
Discharge Air 120mm
Holder

(6) Removing Thermistor for Suction Air

Remove the thermistor for suction air by cutting the plastic tie fixing the thermistor onto the right side
of the electrical box.

20mm

Thermistor for Suction Air

Plastic Tie

2-84

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.6.5 Removing Electrical Box Cover

(1) Remove the front panel according to the item 2.6.2 “Removing Front Panel”.
(2) Remove one (1) screw for the electrical box cover.
(3) Remove the power source wiring and wiring connection between indoor unit and outdoor unit.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Connector for Remote

Control Switch
Earth Screws Screw Connector for
Expansion Valve

Connector for
AS Motor

Terminal Block

Screws Electrical Box

Cover
Connector for
Fan Motor

(4) Remove lead wires for expansion valve, fan motor, thermistor for liquid pipe and gas pipe, AS motor
(✕2) and remote control switch from the connectors. And also remove earth wires (✕2) of the heat
exchanger.
(5) Remove the thermistor for discharge air from the holder fixed at the vertical louver of the air outlet.
(6) Draw out the electrical box toward the front side after removing two (2) screws fixing the electrical
box.
(7) For attaching the electrical box, set the electrical box, connect the connectors and perform the
reverse procedures for removing the electrical box.

2-85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.6.6 Removing Indoor PCB

(1) Remove the front panel according to the item 2.6.2 “Removing Front Panel”.
(2) Remove one (1) screw for the electrical box cover.
(3) Remove the connectors (CN17, CN22 and CN11) from the low voltage PCB.
(4) Detach two (2) catches of the PCB base 1 fixing the low voltage PCB, lift the low voltage PCB and
remove other connectors still connected.
(5) Remove the earth wire from the heat exchanger, detach one (1) catch of the PCB base 2 fixing the
high voltage PCB, lift the high voltage PCB and remove other connectors still connected.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

PCB Base 2
Electrical Box Cover
Earth Wire
Catch
High Voltage
PCB
Catch
Low Voltage
PCB
CN17

Catch
PCB Base 1
CN11

Screw
Terminal Board

PCB Base Z
Electrical Box
PCBI (P)

Module (black)

Pull and lift up Silicon Seat (pink)

PCB Base to release. (only after minor
1, 2 chage model)

Electrical Box

Details of PCB

(6) After the completion of replacement of PCB, connect the connectors to the PCB in the reverse
procedures of removing. And firstly set the high voltage PCB to the electrical box and then set the
low voltage PCB to the electrical box.

2-86

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.6.7 Removing Drain Pan

(1) Remove the front panel according to the item 2.6.2 “Removing Front Panel”.
(2) Remove the electrical box according to the item 2.6.5 “Removing Electrical Box Cover”.
(3) Remove the drain pan from the unit by releasing the catches (A) and (B) from the left side of the
drain pan, and releasing the catch (C) by pulling the right side of the air panel toward the front side.
(4) For attaching the drain pan, perform the reverse procedures for removing drain pan.
NOTE:
Check to ensure that the catches (A), (B) and (C) are snapped.

Phillips Screwdriver,
Tool Bucket (approx. 5 liters content)

Heat Exchanger
Heat Exchanger

Drain Pan
Release Catch (B)

Release Catch (A) Release Catch (C)

Draw the pan forwards

2-87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.6.8 Removing Heat Exchanger

(1) Remove the front panel according to the item 2.6.2 “Removing Front Panel”.
(2) Remove the electrical box according to the item 2.6.5 “Removing Electrical Box Cover”.
(3) Remove the drain pan according to the item 2.6.7 “Removing Drain Pan”.
(4) Remove the piping stay at the rear side of the indoor unit.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Heat Exchanger

Rear Piping of Heat Exchanger

Screws
Piping Stay
Rear Side of Indoor Unit

(5) Release the catch holding the left side of the heat exchanger and remove one screw fixing the heat
exchanger.

Screw

Release Catch

2-88

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(6) Remove one screw fixing the heat exchanger and release the catch holding the right side of the heat
exchanger.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Release Catch

Screw

(7) Lift up the heat exchanger, draw out the rear piping of the heat exchanger from the square hole by
pulling the upper part of the heat exchanger forward and remove the heat exchanger.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Unit body
Square Hole

Heat Exchanger

Pull the upper part of the heat

exchanger forward.

(8) For attaching the heat exchanger, perform the reverse procedures for removing.
NOTE:
After attaching the heat exchanger, check to ensure that the hooks and the screws at the right and
the left sides of the heat exchanger are correctly attached.

2-89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.6.9 Removing Fan and Fan Motor

(1) Remove the heat exchanger according to the item 2.6.5 “Removing Heat Exchanger”.
(2) Remove the supporting plate for the bearing by pushing the knobs at both sides of the supporting
plate toward the inside and releasing the catches.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Lever

Supporting Plate Catch

Bearing (inside)
Push levers on both sides to release catches.

(3) Remove the motor holders 1 and 2 fixing the fan motor.
For removing the motor holder, insert the screwdriver at the catch part and screw it.
(4) After removing the motor holder 1, loosen one (1) screw fixing the motor shaft and the fan.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Motor Holder 2
Fan Motor
Motor Holder 1

Screwdriver

Catch
Motor Holder 1,2

2-90

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(5) Draw the fan leftward with lifting up the bearing side of the fan slightly, the fan and the fan motor are
removed.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Lift up the fan and draw it leftward.

Fan Motor

Loosen Screw

(6) For attaching the fan motor and the fan, perform the reverse procedures for removing.
(7) Fix the fan at the position with 8mm clearance between the left end (bearing side) of the fan and the
partition plate.
(8) Fix the fan motor with the outlet of the lead wire at the position as shown below.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

8mm
Fan Fan Motor Fan Motor

Lead Wire of Motor

Bearing 60o
Partition Plate

2-91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.6.10 Removing Electronic Expansion Valve Coil

(1) Remove the front panel according to the item 2.6.2 “Removing Front Panel”.
(2) Remove the electrical box according to the item 2.6.5 “Removing Electrical Box Cover”.
(3) The butyl sheet is adhered around the piping of the heat exchanger, electronic expansion valve and
the inlet and outlet piping of the electronic expansion valve.

Tool Spanners (#19 and #14)

Expansion Valve Coil

Heat Exchanger

Remove Butyl Sheet

Lead Wire of Expansion Valve

(4) Remove the butyl sheet of the surface of the piping, the coil part of the expansion valve and the part
of the valve body.
(5) Prepare two (2) spanners. Hold the part of the valve body with one spanner and loosen the lock nut
with another spanner by turning the lock nut counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Do not hold the motor part when loosening the lock nut by spanner. The base of the drive part may
turn idle and be broken.
(6) Turn the lock nut by a few turn, and the drive part is separated from the screw and can be removed.
(7) Prepare the new drive part for replacement (service part) with the position of the driver (drive screw)
already adjusted.
NOTE:
During replacement work, pay attention to the separation part and prevent the dust, foreign particle,
etc. from entering into the separation part. (The exposed part by separation is the mechanical part of
the valve.)
Do not hurt the junction part of the valve with the tools.
(8) Put the drive part onto the valve body, hold them with their axes matching and attach the lock nut to
the screw part of the valve body.

2-92

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.6 Wall Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(9) Tighten the lock nut with spanner after tightening lightly by hand.
The tightening torque shall be within the range of 12Nm (120kg-cm) to 15Nm (150kg-cm).
NOTE:
Do not apply the strong forces such as the rotating torque and the bending load to the motor by
holding the motor by hand when tightening the lock nut.
The direction of the eccentric part of the motor is assembled as the eccentric part of although the
motor is directed toward the counter direction of the fittings for piping at the valve body, the alteration
of this direction do not affect the open/close function of the valve. Therefore, the adjustment of the
direction of the motor part is not required if the position of the motor is moved toward the rotating
direction after replacement as shown below.
However, pay attention to the direction of the motor for the coil of the electronic expansion valve not
to touch other pipings and the side plate of the electrical box.

Tool Spanners (#19 and #14)

Pulse Motor

Drive Part
Gear

Output Shaft

Lock Nut
Bellows Adjustment of direction is not required.

Valve
Valve
Valve Part
Valve Body Sheet

Fig. 1 Expansion Valve Fig. 2 Direction of Drive Part

(10) Attach the removed butyl sheet to the electronic expansion valve again.
(11) After completion of the replacement, attach the electronic expansion valve in the reverse procedures
for removing.

2-93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.7 Floor Type)
2.7 Floor Type

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.7.1 Removing Air Intake Grille

(1) Loosen the screws for fixing plate at the right side of each air intake grille, and move the fixing plates.
(2) By pushing the knob at both sides of the air intake grille towards the arrow mark direction, the grille
can be opened with an angle 30°.
(3) Remove it from the hinged part.

Knob

2.7.2 Removing Air Filter

(1) The air filter is located at the inner side of the air intake grille. Remove all the air intake grilles.
(2) Remove the air filter by pulling the knob of the air filter.

2-94

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.7 Floor Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.7.3 Removing Discharge Air Grille

(1) The discharge air grilles are mounted on the top by using a guide-rail.
(2) By opening the top cover and sliding the discharge air grilles, the grilles can be removed.

Fixing Plate

Top Cover

Discharge Air Grille

2.7.4 Removing Front Cover

(1) Remove the air filter according to the item 2.7.2 “Removing Air Filter”.
(2) Remove the front cover from the slit after removing four fixing screws at the lower part and pulling it
out downwards.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Front Cover

Screws

2-95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.7 Floor Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.7.5 Removing Fan Motor

(1) Remove the air intake grille according to the item 2.7.1 “Removing Air Intake Grille”.
(2) Remove the air filter according to the item 2.7.2 “Removing Air filter”.
(3) Remove the front cover according to the item 2.7.4 “Removing Front Cover”.
(4) Remove the mounting plate for the fan motor after removing four fixing screws.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screws

(5) Disconnect the wiring connector for the fan motor. Remove the wiring assembly and connector.

Connector

Wiring Assembly

2-96

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.7 Floor Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(6) Remove the casing “1” by pushing the catch part

at four positions towards the inner side. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

"1"

Catch
Casing

(7) Loosen the screw by a hexagon wrench.

Tool Hexagon Wrench

Motor

Hexagonal Wrench

To Loosen

(8) Remove the fan motor by sliding it backwards after removing the fixing plate.
Pay attention not to drop it.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Band

Fixing Screw

2-97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.7 Floor Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.7.6 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB)

(1) Remove the air intake grille according to the item 2.7.1 “Removing Air Intake Grille”.
(2) Remove the air filter according to the item 2.7.2 “Removing Air Filter”.
(3) Remove the front cover according to the item 2.7.4 “Removing Front Cover”.
(4) The side cover can be removed by removing the three (3) fixing screws and pulling it downwards.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Side Panel

Screws

(5) Remove the electrical box cover after removing two (2) fixing screws.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Electrical Box Cover

Screws

2-98

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.7 Floor Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(6) The electrical box can be turned up to an angle of 90° by removing two fixing screws and unhooking
the catch at the rear side of the electrical box.
(7) The PCB is supported by four holders. Pull out the PCB from the PCB hole by pushing the expanded
part of the holder using long-nose pliers and putting a finger near the hole of the PCB.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Long-nose Pliers

Rear Side of Unit Front Side

of Unit
PCB

Expanded Part
of Holder

PCB
(Low Voltage)

PCB Holders

View from Left Side of Unit

NOTES:
1. Do not touch electrical components. Do not apply a
large force to the PCB or it could result in damage.
2. When reassembling, check to ensure that each terminal
is correctly connected by referring to the wire marks
and terminal codes. If incorrectly connected,
malfunction or damage of electrical parts will occur.

View from Front Side of Unit

2-99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.7 Floor Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.7.7 Removing Thermistors for Liquid Pipe and Gas Pipe

(1) Remove the air intake grille according to the item 2.7.1 “Removing Air Intake Grille”.
(2) Remove the air filter according to the item 2.7.2 “Removing Air Filter”.
(3) Remove the front cover according to the item 2.7.4 “Removing Front Cover”.
(4) Remove the side cover after removing three (3) fixing screws.

Side Panel

Screws

(5) Remove the piping cover after removing two (2) fixing screws for the partition plate and four (4) fixing
screws for piping cover.

Partition Plate

Piping Cover

Screw

2-100

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.7 Floor Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(6) Remove CORK TAPE and pull out the thermistor after removing the fixing plate for the thermistors.

Thermistor for Gas Pipe

Cork Tape

Liquid Pipe Thermistor

Pipe

Thermistor Holder

2-101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.8 Floor Concealed Type)
2.8 Floor Concealed Type

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.8.1 Removing Air Filter

(1) The air filter is located at the inner upper part of the inlet.
(2) Remove the air filter by pulling the center knob and bending the filter.

Air Filter

2.8.2 Removing Front Covers

(1) Remove the air filter according to the item 2.8.1 “Removing Air Filter”.
(2) Remove the front lower cover after removing ten screws at the lower part of the front cover.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Front Lower Cover

2-102

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.8 Floor Concealed Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(3) Remove the front upper cover after removing eleven (11) fixing screws.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screws

Front Upper Cover

2.8.3 Removing Fan Motor

(1) Remove the air filter according to the item 2.8.1 “Removing Air Filter”.
(2) Remove the front covers according to the item 2.8.2 “Removing Front Covers”.
(3) Remove the fan motor as same as indicated in No.4 to No.8 of the item 2.7.5 “Removing Fan Motor”.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Hexagon Wrench

2.8.4 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB)

(1) Remove the front covers according to the item 2.8.2 “Removing Front Covers”.
(2) Remove the PCBs as same as indicated in No.5 to No.7 of the item 2.7.6 “Removing Printed Circuit
Board (PCB)”.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Pincers

2.8.5 Removing Thermistors for Liquid Pipe and Gas Pipe

(1) Remove the air filter according to the item 2.8.1 “Removing Air Filter”.
(2) Remove the front covers according to the item 2.8.2 “Removing Front Covers”.
(3) Remove the thermistor as same as indicated in No.4 to No.6 of the item 2.7.7 “Removing
Thermistors for Liquid Pipe and Gas Pipe”.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

2-103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.9 Ceiling Type)
2.9 Ceiling Type

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.9.1 Removing Air Filter and Air Intake Grille

The air filter is located inside of the air intake grille.
Remove the air filter after opening the air intake grilles.

(1) Slide the catches on both sides of the air

intake grille backwards.
(2) Open the air intake grille downwards.
(3) To remove the air filter, lift it upwards
unhook it and draw it forward.

2.9.2 Removing Side Cover

(1) Open the air intake grille according to the item 2.9.1 “Removing Air Filter and Air Intake Grille”.
(2) Remove the screw fixing the side cover.
(3) Pull the side cover forward and unhook it from two (2) catches and metal plate hook.

Screw

Catch

Metal Plate Catch

2-104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.9 Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.9.3 Removing Discharge Air Grille

(1) Remove the side covers according to the item 2.9.2 “Removing Side Cover”.
(2) Remove the screw connecting the AS motor assembly and the discharge air grille, and remove the
stopper.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screw

Connector for AS Motor

Stopper

(3) Remove the screw supporting the bearing at the left side, pull out the discharge air grille including the
bearing, and pull out the discharge air grille from the right side of the bearing.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Screw

Discharge
2 Air Grille

Bearing 1

2-105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.9 Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.9.4 Removing Fan Motor

(1) Open the air intake grille according to the item 2.9.1 “Removing Air Filter and Air Intake Grille”.
(2) Hook the electrical box on the lower frame after removing the screws fixing the electrical box.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Electrical Box

NOTE:
During this work, support the electrical box
by hands not to drop it.

(3) Open the electrical box cover and remove the connector of the fan motor wiring from the PCB.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Ex.) After Alteration

!
CAUTION

PCN 202
Disconnect connector PCN 202

2-106

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.9 Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(4) Remove the casing “1” by pushing the catch part

at four positions towards the inner side. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

"1"

Catch
Casing

(5) Loosen the screw for the coupling by

a hexagon wrench. Tool Hexagon Wrench

Coupling

Loosen

Hexagonal Wrench

(6) Remove the fan motor by sliding it backwards after removing the fixing band.
Pay attention not to drop it.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Motor Fixing Band

Screw

NOTE:
Pay attention to the position of the runner shaft when replacing the fan motor.
In case that the resistance is big when rotating the motor shaft by hand after replacing, remove the bearing
once according to the item 2.9.5 “Removing Bearing”, adjust the positions of the runner shaft and the motor
shaft on the straight and assemble the runner shaft again.

2-107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.9 Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.9.5 Removing Bearing

(1) Open the air intake grille according to the item 2.9.1 “Removing Air Filter and Air Intake Grille”.
(2) Remove the lower part of the casing according to the item 2.9.4 “Removing Fan Motor”.
(3) Loosen one (1) screw for the coupling by a hexagon wrench according to the item 2.9.4 “Removing
Fan Motor”.
(4) Remove two (2) M8 bolts fixing the bearing and remove the bearing including the shaft and the
runner assembly.
Tool Hexagon Wrench, Phillips Screwdriver

M8 Bolt

Casing
Bearing

Air Filter

2.9.6 Removing Coupling

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(1) Open the air intake grille according to the item 2.9.2 “Removing Side Cover”.
(2) Remove the lower part of the casing according to the item 2.9.4 “Removing Fan Motor” and loosen
two (2) screws for the coupling by a hexagon wrench.
(3) Remove two (2) M8 screws fixing the bearing according to the item 2.9.5 “Removing Bearing”.
(4) Remove the coupling after removing the shaft and the fan runner assembly.

2-108

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.9 Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.9.7 Removing Automatic Louver Motor

(1) Remove the right side cover according to the item 2.9.2 “Removing Side Cover”.
(2) Remove the M4 screws and remove the AS motor assembly from the right shaft of the discharge air
grille. Pay attention not to damage the AS motor assembly.
(3) Remove two screws (A) fixing the motor for auto louver and remove the motor from the AS motor
fixing plate.
Remove one screw (B) fixing the shaft of
the motor for auto louver and pinion AS. Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Torque Wrench

M4 Screws

Connector for AS Motor

NOTE:
When assembling, tighten two screws (A) with a torque of 0.8Nm (8kg-cm)
and one screw (B) with a torque of 0.4Nm (4kg-cm) using a torque wrench.

2.9.8 Removing Thermistors for Liquid Pipe and Gas Pipe, and Electronic Expansion Valve Coil
(1) Open the air intake grille and remove the right and left side covers according to the items 2.9.1
“Removing Air Filter and Air Intake Grille” and 2.9.2 “Removing Side Cover”.
(2) Remove the drain hose from the drain pan and remove the screws fixing the drain pan to the unit.
(3) Remove the drain pan.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Drain Pan
Drain Hose

2-109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.9 Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(4) Remove the thermistors for the liquid pipe and gas pipe.
(5) Refer to the item 2.4.12 “Removing Electronic Expansion Valve Coil” in pages 2-63 and 2-64 for the
procedures of removing electronic expansion valve coil.

Partition Plate

Thermistor for Gas Pipe

Thermistor for Liquid Pipe

Heat Exchanger

Holder
Thermistor

Completely seal the thermistor

Cork Tape
with cork tape.

2.9.9 Checking Procedures for Electronic Expansion Valve Coil

(1) Remove the right side cover according to the item 2.9.2 “Removing Side Cover”.
(2) Remove the check cover from the side cover R.
(3) The electronic expansion valve can be seen through the checking hole.
(4) Check the activation of the electronic expansion valve by touching with a hand.

Checking Hole
Side Plate R

Expansion Valve

Check Cover

2-110

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.9 Ceiling Type)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.9.10 Removing Printed Circuit Board (PCB)

(1) Open the air intake grille according to the item 2.9.1 “Removing Air Filter and Air Intake Grille”.
(2) Turn the electrical box according to No.4 of the item 2.9.4 “Removing Fan Motor” and hook the
electrical box at the lower frame.
(3) Remove the cover after removing two (2)
screws fixings electrical box cover. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Electrical Box Cover

NOTE:
During this work, support the electrical box not to drop it.

(4) The PCB is supported by four (4) holders.

Pinch the expanded part of the holder with
long-nose pliers. Tool Long-nose Pliers

Expanded Part
of Holder

PCB
(Low Voltage)

PCB Holders PCB

NOTE:
Do not touch the electrical components.
Do not apply big force to the PCB.
If applied, the PCB will be faulty.

2-111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.10 Total Heat Exchanger)
2.10 Total Heat Exchanger

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.10.1 Structure
The structure of the total heat exchanger is as shown in the figure.
When maintaining, use service access door of ceiling.

Electrical Control Box

Total Heat Exchange
Element Holder
Service Cover

Exhaust Fan
Air Supply Fan

Damper Plate
Suspension Air Filter
Bracket
Motor for Total Heat Exchange
Discharge Air Element Motor for Supply Air

2.10.2 Removing Electrical Parts

(1) Remove screws for fixing for the electrical control box cover and remove the corresponded electrical
parts.
(2) Open the service cover by pulling the handle.
Remove the total heat exchanger element
or air filter. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Control Box Cover

Screw

2-112

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.10 Total Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.10.3 Removing Air Filter and Total Heat Exchanger Element

(1) Open the service cover by pulling the hinge.
(2) Remove the air filter or total heat exchanger element.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Hinge Maintenance Cover

Heat Exchanger

Filters

2-113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.10 Total Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.10.4 Removing Fan Motor

(1) Open the service cover by pulling the handle according to the item 2.10.3 “Removing Air Filter and
Total Heat Exchager Element”.
(2) Remove the air filter according to the item 2.10.3 “Removing Air Filter and Total Heat Exchanger
Element”.
(3) Remove the heat exchange element according to the item 2.10.3 “Removing Air Filter and Total Heat
Exchanger Element”.
(4) Remove two (2) screws for fixing the total heat exchange element holder and remove the total heat
exchange element holder.
(5) Remove the fan casing.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

(6) Remove six (6) screws for fixing the fan motor for supply air and remove the fan motor for supply air.
(7) Remove four (4) screws for fixing the fan motor for discharge air and remove the fan motor for supply
air.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

2-114

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.10 Total Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.10.5 Air Filter Cleaning

(1) Perform cleaning of the air filter more than once a year.
(2) Ensure to use electric vacuum cleaner to remove dust clogged.
(Otherwise, clean with water or natural type cleaning agent.)
To dry-out the air filter, keep out of direct sun to avoid any deformation.

2.10.6 Total Heat Exchanger Cleaning

(1) Clean up the total heat exchanger element more than once two years.
(2) Use a vacuum cleaner to suck up the dust and dirt on the exposed surfaces of the total heat
exchange elements. Attach a nozzle with a brush to the vacuum cleaner for this job, and clean the
elements by passing the brush lightly over their exposed surfaces.

Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Total Heat
Exchange Element

Vacuum Cleaner
Corner (with brush attachment)

G Do NOT wash the element by water.

G Do not use the fard nozzle of the vacuum cleaner. It may damage the exposed surfaces of the
total heat exchange element.
G Under no circumstances should the total heat exchange elements be washed in water.

2-115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)
2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger
2.11.1 Required Tools for Cleaning (for All Indoor Units)

No. Remark No. Tool Remark

1 Cleaning Water Pump 2 Water Tank Approx. 18 liters
Clean Water
A water pump equipped with 3 Nozzle Attached with Water Pump
a tank is recommended. 4 Brush If the heat exchanger is heavily
(non-metal) clogged with dust, remove it
with this brush. The length of
brush should be 25 to 35mm.

!

5 Hose for Select a hose according to

Water Pan site requirements.
6 Bucket 2 Nos. for 5 liters
7 Phillips 1 No.
Screwdriver
8 Nipper 1 No.
9 Adjustable 1 No.
Wrench
10 Megohm Tester 500V
11 Cleaning Agent Select a neutral type cleaning
agent.
12 Spray To spray cleaning water.
13 Tape with To fix the vinyl sheet to protect
Adhesive the room from cleaning water.
14 Rope 1m, 4 pieces
15 Vinyl Sheet Select a vinyl sheet with
0.5mm thickness.
16 Gloves
17 Cleaning Water Collector
* In-the-Ceiling Type
* 4-Way Cassette Type
* 2-Way Cassette Type Bar
* Wall Type
Insert
* Ceiling Type
120 the bar.
0
φ1

200
20

00
10

00
12

Transparent
Insert the bar.
Vinyl Sheet
Boss Inner Side of φ120 hole should
be covered with felt sheet to
Hose
insert the spray nozzle.

2-116

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.11.2 In-the-Ceiling Type

Before cleaning, cover the floor with a vinyl sheet.

* Refer to the item 2.11.1 “Required Tools for Cleaning” for cleaning tools.
Step Procedure Required Tool
1 Remove the drain pan according to the item 2.2.8 "Removing Drain Pan"
and clean the drain pan.
2 Remove the indoor fan motor and the fan runner assembly according
to the item 2.3.3 "Removing Indoor Fan and Fan Motor".
3 Removing Fan Fixing Plate * Phillips Screwdriver
Top Plate

Side
Plate

Fan Fixing
Plate

Remove the screws fixing the fan

fixing plate and then pull out the
fan fixing plate downwards.

After removing the fan fixing plate,

cover the lead wire with a vinyl sheet
to avoid cleaning water.
4 Removing Dust Clogged * Brush
in Heat Exchanger * Bucket or
Paper Board Box

Fins of Suction Side

Heat Exchanger

Scratch and remove the dust clogged

in fins of the suction side exchanger with
a brush. Collect the dust in a bucket.

2-117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

Step Procedure Required Tool

5 Protection from * Vinyl Sheet
Cleaning Water * Adhesive Tape
Heat Exchanger
* Cutter

Vinyl Sheet

Discharge Sheet Suction Sheet

Cover the discharge side of the heat exchanger

with a vinyl sheet to protect the insulation
materials inside the unit from cleaning
water. Seal the vinyl sheet properly so as
to make no gaps with the adhesive tape.

NOTE:
Perform the work by wearing gloves to
prevent any injuries from touching the fins
of the heat exchanger.
Attach the vinyl sheet to protect the
insulation materials from the cleaning water.
(A transparent board is also applicable
instead of the vinyl sheet.)
6 Attaching Cleaning
Water Pan Indoor Unit

Metal Bar
Rope

Suspension
Bracket Cleaning Water
Collector

Boss
Hose

Bucket

Hang a cleaning water collector from the

indoor unit.
(1) Attach ropes to the suspension brackets.
(2) Put the metal bars through the holes of
the cleaning water collector.
(3) Attach the ropes to the four bars of the
cleaning water collector and suspend
the cleaning water collector.
(4) Attach the hose to the boss of the
cleaning water collector and set
the bucket at the end of the hose.
7 Spraying the Cleaning Water Spray the cleaning water over the fins of * Cleaning Agent
the heat exchanger.

2-118

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

Step Procedure Required Tool

8 Cleaning with Clean Water * Water Tank
* Pump
* Washer
Nozzle

Spray

Hose

Bucket

Pump

Insert the nozzle into the hole of the cleaning

water collector. Operate the pump, wash
the dust off on the fins with clean water
thoroughly. If the cleaning agent is left on
the fins, it may cause corrosion.

Adjust the pressure of the spray at

approximately 2.5 to 5.0 kg/cm 2 so as not
to crush the fins and direct the nozzle in a
straight line toward the fins.
9 Make sure that there are no drops of water left after cleaning the fins * Screwdriver
and reassemble the fan assembly and the drain pan. * Hexagon Wrench
10 Measure the condition of insulation of the drain pump with a
megohm-meter tester.
(Check to ensure that the resistance is bigger than 1 MΩ at 500V.)
11 Connect the electrical wiring as it was and attach the removed parts. * Screwdriver
12 Neutralization Treatment after Cleaning
The cleaning agent specified in the item 2.11.1, is of neutral type.
However, the cleaning water after cleaning may be not neutral due to
dust or other foreign particles. Collect all cleaning water and make
necessary neutralization for the cleaning water.

2-119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.11.3 Cleaning 4-Way Cassette Type Indoor Unit

Spread a vinyl sheet over the floor to protect furnitures, etc. from cleaning water before this work.

No. Procedure Tool

1 Remove the optional air panel according to the item 2.4.4 Phillips Screwdriver
"Removing Optional Air Panel".
2 Remove the electrical box after opening the electrical box cover Phillips Screwdriver
and disconnecting the connectors between the indoor and outdoor
units and other connectors according to the item 2.4.3
"Removing Electrical Box Cover".
3 Remove the bell-mouth and fan according to the item 2.4.5 Phillips Screwdriver
"Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor". Adjustable Wrench
4 Remove the drain pan according to the item 2.4.8 Phillips Screwdriver
"Removing Drain Pan".
5 Remove the float switch according to the item 2.4.10 Phillips Screwdriver
"Removing Float Switch".
6 Remove the drain-up mechanism according to the item 2.4.9 Phillips Screwdriver
"Removing Drain-up Mechanism".

NOTES:
Remove the drain pan after removing drain water on the drain pan.
1. Remove the drain water on the drain pan after pulling out the rubber plug. Check to ensure that water
can flow smoothly through the hole by pricking it with a pencil.
2. Insert the rubber plug into the hole after the above checking.
3. Remove the drain pan after removing four fixing screws. Carefully remove the drain pan, since drain
water may remain at the bottom of the drain pan.
4. Clean and dry the drain pan after removing. Carefully handle the drain pan not to damage it.

2-120

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(1) Scratch off the dust on the inner surface of the heat exchanger downwards using a brush. Collect all
dust in a bucket or carton box.
Tool Brush, Bucket (or Carton Box)

(2) Attach a vinyl sheet by using adhesive tape around the heat exchanger so that cleaning water will not
be splashed over the insulation surface and drain-up pump. Seal the gap between vinyl sheets by
using adhesive tape.
(3) Attach ropes to the each suspension bracket.
(4) Put the metal bars through the holes of the cleaning water collector.
(5) Attach the ropes to the four bars of the cleaning water collector and suspend the cleaning water
collector as shown in the figure.
(6) Connect a hose to the boss and put end
of hose in a bucket.
Tool Cutter Knife, Bucket

Suspension
Indoor Unit
Bolt
Rope
Suspension
Cleaning Bracket
Support Water The water
Bar Collector 20 to 30mm collector should
(8 Nos.) be located 20 to
Boss 30mm higher
Ceiling than the bottom
of the unit.
Hose Cleaning Water
Collector

Bucket

2-121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(7) Put approximately 15 liters of cleaning agent for aluminum fins in a supply tank.

Cleaning Agent for

Aluminum Fins

(8) Insert the spray nozzle through the hole of the cleaning water collector. Operate the water pump and
clean the dust on the heat exchanger. After cleaning, spray clean water to remove the cleaning
water. Adjust the pressure of the water pump
so as not to damage the fins. Clean Water, Cleaning Agent,
Tool Water Pump, Cleaning Spray

Cleaning
Spray

Bucket

NOTES:
1. If the cleaning water remains, fins will be corroded.
2. Adjust the pressure of the pump at 2.5 to 5.0 kg/cm2 so as not to damage fins.

2-122

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(9) After cleaning, mount the drain pan by extending the rope downwards.
NOTE:
In the case that the cleaning water collector is
removed, wipe off the drops from the indoor unit. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Drain Pan

Cleaning
Water
Collector

(10) Check the insulation of the drain pump with a megohm-meter. Check to ensure that the insulation is
greater than 1 MΩ when 500V is applied.
(11) Connect wiring as it was.
(12) Neutralization Treatment after Cleaning
The cleaning agent specified in the item 2.11.1 is of the neutral type. However, the cleaning water
after use may be not neutral. Collect all cleaning water and make necessary neutralization treatment
for the cleaning water.

2-123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.11.4 Cleaning 2-Way Cassette Type Indoor Unit

Spread a vinyl sheet over the floor to protect furnitures, etc. from cleaning water before this work.
(1) Remove the drain pan according to the item 2.5.8 “Removing Drain Pan”. Clean the drain pan after
removal.
(2) Remove the indoor fan motor and fan runner assembly according to the item 2.5.4 “Removing Fan
Runner and Fan Motor”.
(3) Removing Fixing Plate
Protect the wiring from cleaning water during the
cleaning after removing fixing plate for the fan. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

Top Plate

Side
Plate

Pull down the fixing plate after

Fan Fixing
removing three screws fixing the fixing
Plate
plate for the fan to the top plate and
side plate.

(4) Removing Dust on Heat Exchanger

Remove dust on the fins at the inlet side of the heat exchanger by scratching off downwards.
Collect all dust in a bucket or carton box.
Tool Brush, Bucket (or Carton Box)

Inlet Side of
Heat Exchanger

2-124

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(5) Put a vinyl sheet behind the heat exchanger so that cleaning water will not be splashed on the
insulation surface of the unit. Seal the gap
between vinyl sheets. Tool Vinyl Sheet, Tape, Cutter

Heat Exchanger

Vinyl Sheet

Discharge Sheet Suction Sheet

NOTES:
1. It is recommended that gloves be used during this
work to avoid any injury.
2. Put a vinyl sheet to avoid splashed cleaning water.

(6) Suspend the cleaning water collector from the indoor unit.
(a) Connect a rope to the suspension bracket of the indoor unit put is downwards.
(b) Insert the support bar into the cleaning water collector hole.
(c) Suspend the cleaning water collector with the rope from the indoor unit.
(d) Connect a hose to the boss for the cleaning water collector and put the other end in a bucket.
(7) Spraying Cleaning Water
Spray the cleaning water over the fins of
the heat exchanger. Tool Cleaning Water

Indoor Unit

Metal Bar
Rope

Suspension
Bracket Cleaning Water
Collector

Boss
Hose

Bucket

2-125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(8) Cleaning with Clean Water

Insert the spray nozzle through the hole of the cleaning water collector.
Operate the pump and clean the fins with clean water. Adjust the water pump pressure so as not to
damage the fins.
Tool Clean Water, Pump, Spray

Nozzle

Spray

Hose

Bucket

Pump

NOTES:
1. If the cleaning water remains, fins will be
corroded.
2. Adjust the pressure of the pump at 2.5 to
5.0 kg/cm2 so as not to damage fins.

(9) Attach the fan assembly and drain pan after cleaning is completed and dropping of cleaning water is
stopped.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Hexagon Wrench

(10) Check the insulation of drain-up pump by megohm-meter. Check to ensure that the insulation is
greater than 1 MΩ when 500V is applied.
(11) Connect the wiring as it was. Mount the air
Tool Phillips Screwdriver, Megohm-meter
distribution chamber and optional air panel.
(12) Neutralization Treatment after Cleaning
The cleaning agent specified in the item 2.11.1 is of the neutral type. However, the cleaning water
after use may be not neutral. Collect all cleaning water and make necessary neutralization treatment
for the cleaning water.

2-126

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.11.5 Cleaning Wall Type Indoor Unit

Spread a vinyl sheet over the floor to protect furnitures, etc. from cleaning water before this work.
(1) Remove each parts according to the item 2.6 “Wall Type”.
(2) Remove the front panel according to the item 2.6.2 “Removing Front Panel”.
(3) Remove the electrical box according to the item 2.6.5 “Removing Electrical Box Cover”.
(4) Remove the drain pan according to the item 2.6.7 “Removing Drain Pan”.
(5) Remove the heat exchanger according to the item 2.6.8 “Removing Heat Exchanger”.
(6) Cleaning
(a) Remove dust with a brush.
(b) Cover a vinyl sheet over the electrical components to protect them from splashed cleaning water.
(c) In the case that cleaning agent is used, clean the heat exchanger with clean water completely.
(d) Adjust the pressure of the pump so as not to damage fins.
(7) Neutralization Treatment after Cleaning
The cleaning agent specified in the item 2.11.1 is of the neutral type. However, the cleaning water
after use may be not neutral.
Collect all cleaning water and make necessary Cleaning Water, Clean Water,
neutralization treatment for the cleaning water. Tool Pump, Spray

Nozzle

Heat
Exchanger

NOTES:
1. If the cleaning water remains, fins will be
corroded.
2. Adjust the pressure of the pump at 2.5 to
5.0 kg/cm2 so as not to damage fins.

2-127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.11.6 Cleaning Floor Type and Floor Concealed Type Indoor Unit
Spread a vinyl sheet over the floor to protect furnitures, etc. from cleaning water before this work.
(1) Remove the front cover according to the item 2.7.4 and 2.8.2 “Removing Front Cover”.
(2) Disconnect the drain hose from the field-supplied pipe.
(3) Cover the rear side of the heat exchanger with a vinyl sheet after removing front side partition and
drain pan. After covering, remount the front
side partition and drain pan. Tool Vinyl Sheet, Tape, Cutter

Heat
Exchanger Cover it
with Vinyl
Sheet

Front Side
Partition

Drain
Pan

(4) By lifting the drain hose and put the end in a bucket.

Bucket
Drain
Hose

2-128

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(5) Removing Dust on Heat Exchanger

Remove the dust on the heat exchanger with a brush by scratching dust downwards.
Collect all dust in a bucket or carton box.
Tool Brush, Bucket (or Carton Box)

Bucket

(6) Spray cleaning water over the fins of the heat exchanger.
(7) Cleaning with Clean Water
Cover the wiring connectors with insulation tape. Operate the pump and clean the heat exchanger
with clean water completely. Adjust the pressure
of pump so as not to damage fins. Tool Clean Water, Pump, Spray

NOTES:
1. If the cleaning water remains, fins will be
corroded.
2. Adjust the pressure of the pump at 2.5 to
5.0 kg/cm2 so as not to damage fins.

2-129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(8) After checking that no power is supplied, connect the drain pipe and remove the insulation tape for
the wiring connectors and then mount the front cover correctly.
(9) Check the insulation of the terminal board in the electrical box.
If the insulation is greater than 1MΩ
Megohm-meter, Voltage-Checker,
by a 500 Megohm-meter, it is normal. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

(10) Neutralization Treatment after Cleaning

The cleaning agent specified in the item 2.11.1 is of the neutral type. However, the cleaning water
after use may be not neutral. Collect all cleaning water and make necessary neutralization treatment
for the cleaning water.

2-130

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

2.11.7 Cleaning Ceiling Type Indoor Unit

Spread a vinyl sheet over the floor to avoid cleaning water before this work.
(1) Remove the left and right side covers according to the item 2.9.2 “Removing Side Cover”.
(2) Remove the discharge deflector according to
Tool Phillips Screwdriver
the item 2.9.3 “Removing Discharge Air Grille”.
(3) Open the intake air grille according to the item 2.9.1 “Removing Air Filter and Intake Air Grille”.
(4) Remove the lower cover and drain pan according to the item 2.9.8 “Removing Thermistors
for Liquid Pipe and Gas Pipe, and
Electronic Expansion Valve Coil”. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

(5) Remove the indoor fan motor and fan

assembly according to the item 2.9.4 Tool Phillips Screwdriver
“Removing Fan Motor”.

(6) Remove the partition plate 2 after removing

two fixing screws. Tool Phillips Screwdriver

(7) Remove the fixing plate for the fan after removing two screws at the left and one screw at the right
side partition.
Tool Phillips Screwdriver

(8) Attach the drain pan and lower cover according

to the reverse procedures in the item (4). Tool Phillips Screwdriver

2-131

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.11 Cleaning Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger)

TURN OFF all power source switches.

(9) Cover all components except the drain pan with a vinyl sheet avoid splashed cleaning water.
NOTE:
Wear gloves to avoid any injury during this Vinyl Sheet, Tape, Cutter,
Tool Phillips Screwdriver
work due to sharp edge of fins.

(10) Spray the cleaning water over the fins from the rear side of the heat exchanger.
If the heat exchanger is heavily covered
Tool Spray, Brush
with dust, use a brush to wipe off.
(11) Cleaning with Clean Water
(a) Operate the pump and clean the heat exchanger with clean water completely.
(b) Adjust pressure of the pump so as not
to damage fins. Tool Clean Water, Pump, Cleaning Water

NOTES:
1. If the cleaning water remains, fins will be
corroded.
2. Adjust the pressure of the pump at 2.5 to
5.0 kg/cm2 so as not to damage fins.

(12) Check the insulation of the terminal board with a megohm-meter.

Check to ensure that the insulation is greater
than 1MΩ when 500V is applied. Tool Megohm-Meter

(13) Check to ensure that water can flow smoothly after pouring water on the drain pan.
NOTE:
Pay attention to the drain pan not to overflow.
(14) Neutralization Treatment after Cleaning
The cleaning agent specified in the item 2.11.1 is of the neutral type. However, the cleaning water
after use may be not neutral. Collect all cleaning water and make necessary neutralization treatment
for the cleaning water.

2-132

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SERVICING
(2.12 Collecting Refrigerant for Replacing Indoor Unit)
2.12 Collecting Refrigerant for Replacing Indoor Unit
(1) Prepare an empty refrigerant cylinder at -760mmHg with a charging hose. Measure the empty
cylinder’s weight.
(2) After shutting the stop valve on the cylinder, connect the charge hose to the liquid line stop valve.
Connect a pressure gauge to the check joint on the gas line stop valve.
(3) Air purge inside of the hose between the liquid line stop valve and cylinder by loosening connection
of the liquid line stop valve and close the connecting port of the cylinder after air purging.
(4) Operate the unit as cooling mode at a frequency of 48Hz.

Hose
NOTES:
Connecting
Port 1. The cylinder capacity shall be equivalent
to half of the total refrigerant capacity.
2. In case of 8HP and 10HP outdoor units;
Cylinder Remove the terminals of the constant
speed compressor, and cover the
Pressure Gauge terminals of the cables by insulator.
Liquid Line Gas Line
Stop Valve Stop Valve

(5) Open the liquid line stop valve on the cylinder to collect refrigerant into it. The cylinder capacity shall
be equivalent to half of the total refrigerant capacity. Check the refrigerant quantity by measuring the
weight.
(6) Close the liquid line stop valve on the cylinder gradually during the cooling operation.
(7) Fix the opening of the liquid line stop valve at a slightly opened position. Continue the cooling
operation.
(8) Finally close the liquid line stop valve and then gas line stop valve and stop the units at the same
time when the pressure at the liquid line stop valve reaches at -400mmHg.

NOTE:
In the case that the collected refrigerant is recharged into the system, charge it by let the cylinder up
side down so that refrigerant and oil can be charged together.

2-133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 MAIN PARTS

3. MAIN PARTS
3.1 Inverter
3.1.1 Specifications of Inverter (For 380/415V, 50Hz and 380V, 60Hz Power Source)

Applicable Model RAS-5FSG, RAS-5FS3, RAS-8FSG,

RAS-8FS3, RAS-10FSG, RAS-10FS3,
RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5,
RAS-16FSG, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FSG,
RAS-30FSG1, RAS-30FS5
RAS-20FS3, RAS-8FXG, RAS-8FX3,
RAS-10FXG, RAS-10FX3
Applicable Power Source 3 Phase 380/415V + 10% 50/60Hz +5%
Output Voltage (Maximum) 380/415V, 3 Phase
Output Current (Maximum) 14.0A (5, 8 and 10HP),
14.0A
16.5A (16 and 20HP)
Time Rating Continuous
Control Method Frequency < 75Hz, Space Vector PWM Control
Vector PWM Control
75Hz < Frequency < 115Hz, V/F Control
Range Output Frequency 30 to 95Hz (5HP),
30 to 115Hz
30 to 115Hz (8 to 20HP)
Accuracy of Frequency 0.005Hz, at 0.01Hz, at
Applicable Frequency Range Applicable Frequency Range
Accuracy of Output Voltage + 10% at Applicable Frequency Range
Output / Characteristics Conditions:
1. Power Source Voltage AC380/415V
2. Non-Loading (Free Output)
3. Ammeter Type Volt-Meter (X1.1)

(V)
400
380

300

200
24 and 30HP

100

0 50 75 100 115
f (Hz)

Refer to the note in next page.

Soft Start Stop 0.5Hz/S, 1Hz/S, 3Hz/S, 6Hz/S, 30Hz/S (5 Steps)
Protection Function
Excessive High or Excessive Low Voltage at a DC Voltage is Lower than 350V
Low Voltage for Inverter Excessive High Voltage at a DC Voltage is Higher than 750V
Abnormality of Stoppage at a current of compressor smaller than 0.5A
Current Sensor When the frequency is 15 to 18Hz after starting.
Cause of Abnormality: Failure of Current Sensor
Failure of Transistor Module
Failure of ISPM
Failure of Compressor
Disconnected Wiring

3-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

Protection Function
Overcurrent Protection
for Inverter

(1)

(2) Detecting current is more than

150% of the rated current.

(3)
Rated Current 150%
(4)
Rated Current 105%

20µs 20ms 30s Time

(1) Short-Circuit Trip of Arm Internal Protection

(2) Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Transistor Module or ISPM
(3) Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip
(4) Electronic Thermal Trip
Condition is maintained longer than 30 seconds or accumulated
longer than 3 minutes during 10 minutes sampling time.
Protection of Transistor module or ISPM has four protection function for self-protection.
Transistor Module (1) Some of the output terminals between "U" and "V", "V" and "W",
"W" and "U" has a short-circuit.
(2) Running current reaches the maximum rated current.
(3) Abnormal temperature is measured by internal thermistor.
(4) Control voltage decreases abnormally.
Overload Control Overload control as a current greater than (Rated Current X105%).
Overload control release at a current smaller than (Rated Current X 88%).
Fin Temperature The unit is stopped when the ISPM temperature is higher than 100oC.
Increase (Only for 24 and 30HP)
Earth Detection The unit is stopped when the compressor is earthing.
(Only for 24 and 30HP)

NOTE:
Characteristics are fluctuated by the current minimize control.

3-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.1.2 Specifications of Inverter (For 220V, 60Hz Power Source)

Applicable Model RAS-5FSG, RAS-5FS3,

RAS-8FSG, RAS-8FS3,
RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5,
RAS-10FSG, RAS-10FS3,
RAS-30FSG1, RAS-30FS5
RAS-16FSG, RAS-16FS3,
RAS-20FSG, RAS-20FS3
Applicable Power Source 3 Phase 220V + 10% 60Hz +5%
Output Voltage (Maximum) 220V, 3 Phase
Output Current (Maximum) 25A (5, 8 and 10HP),
27.5A
30A (16 and 20HP)
Time Rating Continuous
Control Method Frequency < 75Hz, Space Vector PWM Control
Vector PWM Control
75Hz < Frequency < 115Hz, V/F Control
Range Output Frequency 30 to 95Hz (5HP),
30 to 115Hz
30 to 115Hz (8 to 20HP)
Accuracy of Frequency 0.005Hz, at 0.01Hz, at
Applicable Frequency Range Applicable Frequency Range
Accuracy of Output Voltage + 10% at Applicable Frequency Range
Output / Characteristics Conditions:
1. Power Source Voltage AC220V
2. Non-Loading (Free Output)
3. Ammeter Type Volt-Meter (X1.1)

(V)
400

300

200

100
24 and 30HP

0 50 75 100 115
f (Hz)

Refer to the note in next page.

Soft Start Stop 0.5Hz/S, 1Hz/S, 3Hz/S, 6Hz/S, 30Hz/S (5 Steps)
Protection Function
Excessive High or Excessive Low Voltage at a DC Voltage is Lower than 194V
Low Voltage for Inverter Excessive High Voltage at a DC Voltage is Higher than 440V
Abnormality of Stoppage at a current of compressor smaller than 0.5A
Current Sensor When the frequency is 15 to 18Hz after starting.
Cause of Abnormality: Failure of Current Sensor
Failure of Transistor Module
Failure of ISPM
Failure of Compressor
Disconnected Wiring

3-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

Protection Function
Overcurrent Protection
for Inverter

(1)

(2) Detecting current is more than

150% of the rated current.

(3)
Rated Current 150%
(4)
Rated Current 105%

20µs 20ms 30s Time

(1) Short-Circuit Trip of Arm Internal Protection

(2) Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Transistor Module or ISPM
(3) Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip
(4) Electronic Thermal Trip
Condition is maintained longer than 30 seconds or accumulated
longer than 3 minutes during 10 minutes sampling time.
Protection of Transistor module or ISPM has four protection function for self-protection.
Transistor Module (1) Some of the output terminals between "U" and "V", "V" and "W",
"W" and "U" has a short-circuit.
(2) Running current reaches the maximum rated current.
(3) Abnormal temperature is measured by internal thermistor.
(4) Control voltage decreases abnormally.
Overload Control Overload control as a current greater than (Rated Current X105%).
Overload control release at a current smaller than (Rated Current X 88%).
Fin Temperature The unit is stopped when the ISPM temperature is higher than 100oC.
Increase (Only for 24 and 30HP)
Earth Detection The unit is stopped when the compressor is earthing.
(Only for 24 and 30HP)

NOTE:
Characteristics are fluctuated by the current minimize control.

3-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.1.3 Arrangement of Inverter Power Unit

< RAS-5 to 20FSG/FS3 (380-415/380V, 50/60Hz) >

5HP: Before Manufacturing #U4MV0196
8 to 20HP: Before Manufacturing #U4NG1001

1
W V U

2
B
N

4 U

255
V

A
K W

200

No. Parts Model Name

1 Fin (mm) 200 X 255 X 50 -
2 Transistor Module PM25RSB120 IPM
3 Diode Module DF40AA160 DM
4 Diode Module RM201-1A-20F D

3-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

< RAS-5 to 20FSG/FS3 (380-415/380V, 50/60Hz) >

5HP: After Manufacturing #U4MV0197
8 to 20HP: After Manufacturing #U4NG1002

2 3

1
B
N

255
W
V
U

16

200

No. Parts Model Name

1 Fin (mm) 200 X 255 X 50 -
2 Transistor Module 6MBP25RA120-05 IPM
3 Diode Module 6RI30G-160 DM

3-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

< RAS-5 to 20FSG/FS3 (220V, 60Hz) >

1 2 3

B
U

255
V
W

200

No. Parts Model Name

1 Fin (mm) 200 X 255 X 50 -
2 Transistor Module 7MBP50JB060 IPM
3 Diode Module 6RI50E-080 DM

3-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

< RAS-24 and 30FSG1/FS5 (380-415/380V, 50/60Hz) >

1 CN201 R1 S1

PD P1 P N RB

R
S
T
C

U
V
W
COM2
MAIN1 SUB1 COM1

No. Parts Model

1 AC Chopper FH9212P
2 ISPM HS15A3F12

< RAS-24 and 30FSG1/FS5 (220V, 60Hz) >

No. Parts Model

1 ISPM 1 HS28A3F06
2 ISPM 2 HS06A3F06

3-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.1.4 Inverter Time Chart

Main Circuit
Frequency LOW
Power Source Frequency All bit 1 All bit 1 Operation
HIGH

Frequency
Instruction

Output Voltage

Soft Start-Stop
(Frequency) The changing speed
depends on the outer
setting.

Failure Signal
Output

Activation of
Protection Device Transmit Protection
Error 30sec. Activation
10sec.

Overload Signal
Activation Recovery

Charged Indication
(Red LED5 on PCB5
or LED2 on PCB2)

3-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.1.5 Protective Function

(1) Excessive High or Low Voltage for Inverter
(a) Level of Detection
1 When the voltage of direct current is greater than (A) V, abnormalities are detected.
2 When the voltage of direct current is smaller than (B) V, abnormalities are detected.

380 - 415V, 50Hz

Power Supply 220V, 60Hz
380V, 60Hz
(A) 750 440
(B) 350 194

(b) Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter compressor is stopped and transmit the signal code
of stoppage cause to PCB1.
(c) Cancellation of Protection Function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is cancelled when a stopping order is given or
main power source is cut off.
(2) Abnormality of Current Sensor
(a) Level of Detection
When current of the inverter compressor decreases lower than 0.5A during the inverter
compressor frequency between 15Hz and 18Hz, an abnormality is detected.
(b) Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter compressor is stopped, and transmit the signal code
of stoppage cause to PCB1.
(c) Cancellation of Protection Function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is cancelled when a stopping order is issued or
main power source is cut off.
(3) Overcurrent Protection for Inverter
(a) Level of Detection
1 When the current detected by current sensor reaches 150% of the rated current, overcurrent is
detected. (Instantaneous Overcurrent)
2 When the current detected by current sensor exceeds 105% of the rated current continuously for
30 seconds or for 3.5 minutes in total during a 10 minutes period, overcurrent is detected. (Electric
Thermal Relay)
(b) Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter compressor is stopped and transmit the signal code
of stoppage cause to PCB1.
(c) Cancellation of Protection Function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is canceled by stopping order is issued or main
power source is cut off.
(4) Protection of Transistor Module and ISPM
(a) Level of Detection
1 When some of the output terminals between “U” and “V”, “V” and “W”, “W” and “U” of transistor
module or ISPM are short-circuited, an abnormality is detected.
2 When the running current of transistor module or ISPM reaches (Maximum Rated Current x
105%), an abnormality is detected.
3 When an internal temperature is measured by internal thermistor of transistor module or ISPM, an

abnormality is detected.
4 When the control voltage of transistor module or ISPM decreases, an abnormality is detected.

(b) Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter compressor is stopped and the signal code of
stoppage cause is transmitted to PCB1.
(c) Cancellation of Protection Function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is canceled when a stopping order is issued or
main power source is cut off.

3-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

(5) Fin Temperature Increase (Only for 24 and 30HP)

(a) Level of Detection
When the temperature of internal thermistor exceeds more than 100oC, an abnormality is detected.
(b) Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter compressor is stopped and the signal code of
stoppage cause is transmitted to PCB1.
(c) Cancellation of Protection Function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is canceled when a stopping order is issued or
main power source is cut off.
(6) Earth Detection
(a) Level of Detection
When the starting current of the compressor reaches 80% of the overcurrent protection value, an
abnormality is detected.
(b) Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter compressor is stopped and the signal code of
stoppage cause is transmitted to PCB1.
(c) Cancellation of Protection Function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is canceled when a stopping order is issued or
main power source is cut off.

3.1.6 Overload Control

(a) Level of Detection
When the output current exceeds 105% of the maximum output current, an abnormality is
detected.
(b) Function
An overload signal is issued when output current exceeds 105% of the maximum output current,
and the frequency decreases.
For 10 seconds after the output current decreases lower than 88% of the rated current, the
operation is performed with the compressor frequency limited to the upper level frequency when
the output current decreases lower than 88% of the rated one.
However, if the frequency order is smaller than the maximum value, the operation is performed
according to the order.
(c) Cancellation of Protection Function
After the operation described in the above item b. is performed for 10 seconds, this control is
canceled.

3-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.2 AC Chopper
Reduction of Electromagnetic Sound
Fan Motor Control by AC Chopper:
Lower electromagnetic sound and vibration have been achieved by AC Chopper control than thyristor
control.
AC Chopper Control
Concept of Fan Speed Control
The voltage applied to the fan motor is controlled by chopping
(ON/OFF) the power supply voltage at a frequency of 20kHz.

Features
• Sinusoidal Wave Pattern and Remarkable Low Level of Electromagnetic Sound
• No Generation of Harmonic Current

(1) Specifications

Rated Current of AC Chopper 2.1A 5.6A

Applicable Power Source Single Phase 220/240V + 10% 50/60Hz
Output Voltage Single Phase 220/240V + 10%
Output Current (Maximum) 2.1A 5.6A
Control Method AC Chopper Control
Chopping Frequency 20kHz + 20%
Input Duty Signal 100kHz + 5% Current 2 to 8mA + 10%
Accuracy of Output Voltage + 6%
Output/Characteristics
Output Duty (%)
100

b
Input Duty = b/a
a

d
Output Duty = d/c
0 10 50 c
Input Duty (%)

Soft Start Input Duty: 10%/s

Overcurrent Protection Method Current Limiter
Overcurrent Setting (Minimum) 2.1A 5.6A
Overcurrent Protection Area
[For 5.6A]
Output Current (A) Output Current (A)
: Protection Area : Protection Area
(Max. x 2)
50Hz
60Hz 4.75

(Max. ) 4A
3.5A

0 10 30 50 Input Duty (%) 0 10 30 40 50 Input Duty (%)

3-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

(2) Structure
a. 2.1A (For Indoor Units: RCI, RCD, RPC and RPI (0.8 to 2.5HP) Models)

98 45

PCN203
PCN202

110
PCN201
CAUTION

PCN204
CN201

b. 5.6A (For Outdoor Units and Indoor Units: RPI (3.0 to 5.0HP) Models)

180 69

SUB1MAIN1 COM1
S1

CAUTION

124
COM2
R1
CN201

(3) Circuit Diagram (Outline)

a. 2.1A

PCN201 PCN202
AC220-240V R 1 1
(From Control PCB) S 3 3 MFE
5 5

1
3
CN201
PCN203 C
Input Duty Signal 1
(From Control PCB) PCN204 1 3 5
3

b. 5.6A

R SUB1
R1
AC220-240V C
(From Control PCB)
S MAIN1 MFE
S1

COM1
E1

CN201

Input Duty Signal 1

(From Control PCB) NORMAL COM2
3

3-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.3 Auto-Louver Mechanism

3.3.1 4-Way Cassette Type
(1) Auto-Louver Operation
The louvers of the optional air panel with auto-louver swing simultaneously by a drive motor.
The parts of the auto-louver mechanism are shown below.

The motor (1) is installed to the louver (2) directly.

The louver (2) is operated by rotating the motor (1).
Four pieces of the motor (1) are installed to the unit
and rotated simultaneously.

No. Part Name No. Part Name

1 Motor 3 Bearing
2 Louver 4 Stopper AS

(3) Bearing AS (3) (2) (3) (4)

(1) (1)

(2) Louver (1) Motor

(4) Stopper AS

(1)
(1)
(3) Bearing AS

(2) Auto-Louver Stoppage

Press the "AUTO LOUVER"

of the remote control switch
during auto-louver operation.

0 (zero) Reset
The AS stopper of the
louver (2) touches the steel
(1) Motor
plate stopper, and the louver (4) Motor
is reset to the 0 position.

The power supply for the

motor (1) is turned OFF when Steel Plate
the louver is at the setting Stopper
position.
(2) Louver

The louver is stopped at the

setting position.

3-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.3.2 2-Way Cassette Type

(1) Auto-Louver Operation
The louvers of the optional air panel with auto-louver swing simultaneously by a drive motor.
The parts of the auto-louver mechanism are shown below.

Stopper
Bearing Louver Bearing Arm Arm
Shaft B
Stopper

AS Motor Assembly Stopper

Crank Arm
Stopper
Bearing Louver Bearing Arm Shaft A

The principle of the auto-louver mechanism is as follows;

The motor (1) rotates, the crank (2) fixed to the shaft of the motor (1) rotates, the rotating torque is
changed at the arm (3) and transmitted to the arm shaft A (4) and the arm shaft B (5).
The circular reciprocating force gives the driving force to the louver (6) and rotates the louver.

No. Part Name No. Part Name

1 Motor 5 Arm Shaft B
2 Crank 6 Louver
3 Arm 7 Fixing Plate of
4 Arm Shaft A Motor

(2) Auto-Louver Stoppage

Press the "AUTO LOUVER" of

the remote control switch
during auto-louver operation.

The crank (2) touches the

stopper of the fixing plate of
motor (7), and the louver is
reset to the 0 position.

The power supply for the

motor (1) is turned OFF when
the louver is at the setting
position.

The louver (6) is stopped at

the setting position.

3-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.3.3 Ceiling Type

(1) Auto-Louver Operation
The louvers of the optional air panel with auto-
louver swing simultaneously by a drive motor.
(1) AS Motor
The parts and the principle of the auto-louver
mechanism are shown in the right figure.
(2) Pinion
The AS motor (1) rotates, the pinion (2) fixed to
the shaft of the AS motor (1) rotates, the rotating (5) Cover
torque is changed at the rack (3) and the circular (6) Louver
reciprocating force gives the driving force to the (4) Bearing
louver (4) and rotates the louver. (3) Rack
(2) Auto-Louver Stoppage

Press the "AUTO LOUVER" of the remote

control switch during auto-louver operation.
(3) Rack

(6) Louver (1) AS Motor

The rack (3) touches the stopper of the
cover (6), and the louver is reset to the
0 position.

(2) Pinion

The power supply for AS motor (1) is turned Stopper

OFF when the louver is at the setting (5) Cover
position.

The louver (4) is stopped at the setting

position.

3.3.4 Wall Type

(1) Auto-Louver Operation
The louvers of the optional air panel with auto-
louver swing simultaneously by two drive motors.
The parts and the principle of the auto-louver
mechanism are shown in the right figure.
The motor (1) rotates, the rotating torque is
transmitted to the louver (4) directly and the
circular reciprocating force of the motor rotates
the louver.
(2) Louver (1) Motor
(2) Auto-Louver Stoppage

Press the "AUTO LOUVER" of the remote

control switch during auto-louver operation. 0 (zero) Reset

The louver swings toward the fully open

direction, and the louver is reset to the 0
position.
Main Louver
Sub Louver

The louver swings until the louver is at the

setting position.

The louver is stopped at the setting position.

3-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.4 Scroll Compressor

3.4.1 Reliable Mechanism for Low Vibration and Low Sound
(1) The rotating direction is definite.
(2) The pressure inside of the chamber is high pressure, and the surface temperature of the chamber is
60Co to 110Co.
3.4.2 Principle of Compression

(1) The gas is inhaled from the inlet port at the outer frame of the fixed scroll.

(2) The gas inside of the compression space is compressed toward

the center of the scroll.

(3) The compression space is minimum at the center of the scroll, and
the gas compressed at the maximum is discharged from the outlet port
of at the center of the scroll.

(4) The above procedures (Suction Compression Discharge) is

repeated continuously.

Fixed Scroll
Rotating Scroll
Compression
Space

Suction Process
Discharge Process
Discharge Compression Process
Outlet

3-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.4.3 Structure
The compressor has the structure for oil supply from the outer oil separator. (8 to 20HP)
The inside of the oil separator is at high pressure, and the surface temperature of the oil separator is as
high (60Co to 110Co) as the compressor.

Suction Pipe Suction

Discharge

Suction
Fixed Scroll

Frame

Motor

Oil Separator
Discharge
Pipe
Discharge

Oil Supply

Oil Pipe

G Compressor Type
RAS-5FSG and 5FS3: Inverter Compressor x 1
RAS-8FSG, 10FSG, 8FS3, 10FS3, 8FXG, 10FXG, 8FX3 and 10FX3:
Inverter Compressor x 1 and Constant Speed Compressor x 1
RAS-16FSG and 16FS3: Inverter Compressor x 1 and Constant Speed Compressor x 2
RAS-20FSG, 24FSG1, 30FSG1, 20FS3, 24FS5 and 30FS5:
Inverter Compressor x 1 and Constant Speed Compressor x 3
Seen from the front side of the unit, the one compressor at the left is the inverter compressor and other
compressor(s) is(are) constant speed type.

3-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

Model Inverter Compressor Constant Speed Compressor Total

RAS-5FSG, RAS-5FS3
Without 1

Q'ty: 1

RAS-8FSG, RAS-8FS3
RAS-10FSG, RAS-10FS3
RAS-10FXG, RAS-10FX3
2

Q'ty: 1 Q'ty: 1

RAS-16FSG, RAS-16FS3 3

Q'ty: 1 Q'ty: 2

RAS-20FSG, RAS-20FS3 4

Q'ty: 1 Q'ty: 3

RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5
RAS-30FSG1, RAS-30FS5
4

Q'ty: 1 Q'ty: 1 Q'ty: 2

3-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.5 Thermistor
3.5.1 Thermistor for Indoor Unit
(1) Position of Thermistor (In Case of 4-Way Cassette Type)

Thermistor for Indoor Heat Exchanger

Gas Pipe Temperature (THM5)

Thermistor
for Air Outlet Thermistor for Indoor Heat
Temperature Thermistor for Exchanger Liquid Pipe
(THM2) Air Inlet Temperature Temperature
(THM1) (For Freeze Protection) (THM3)

(2) Thermistor for Indoor Suction Air 90

82
Temperature (For Room Temperature 80
Control) 70

The room temperature is controlled by the 60

61

thermistor for indoor suction air temperature Thermistor 50 46

detecting the temperature at the suction air Resistance
(KΩ) 40 35
inlet of the indoor unit. 30 27
The setting temperature is indicated on the 20
20.5
16
12.5
L.C.D. of the remote control switch by 10
10
8 5.3 3.6 2.5
number. 0
-15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Adjust the setting temperature for prevention
from excessive cooling and heating. Ambient Temperature (oC)

t is recommended to set the temperature as Thermistor Characteristics

follows;
Economical Cooling Operation: 27oC to 29oC / Economical Heating Operation: 18oC to 20oC
The resistance characteristics of thermistor is shown in the above figure.

ATTENTION:
The thermo-off valve of the indoor unit air inlet thermistor is set at the temperature higher than the valve
indicated on the remote control switch by 4Co and the maximum is 30Co, because the suction air temperature
during heating operation has a tendency to become higher than that of the occupied zone, intending
comfortable heating operation.

(3) Thermistor for Indoor Discharge Air Temperature (For Discharge AIr Temperature Control)
The thermistor for indoor discharge air temperature is utilized for the control of prevention from cold
air discharge in heating operation, etc.
The resistance characteristics of thermistor is shown in the above figure.
(4) Thermistor for Liquid Pipe Temperature of Indoor Heat Exchanger

When the temperature of the heat exchanger is below 0oC, Prevention from freezing
thermostat is turned OFF automatically and over 14oC, onto the heat exchanger in
thermostat is turned ON again. COOL and DRY operation.

The resistance characteristics of thermistor is shown in the above figure.

(5) Thermistor for Gas Pipe Temperature of Indoor Heat Exchanger

When the temperature of the heat exchanger is below 0oC, Prevention from freezing
thermostat is turned OFF automatically and over 14oC, onto the heat exchanger in
thermostat is turned ON again. COOL and DRY operation.

The evaporating temperature in heating operation is detected.

The resistance characteristics of thermistor is shown in the above figure.

3-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.5.2 Thermistor for Outdoor Unit

(1) Position of Thermistor

<Example: RAS-30FSG1>

Thermistor
for Outdoor Ambient
Temperature

Thermostat Holder
Holder

Thermistor for
Discharge Gas
Temperature
Thermistor
for Evaporating
Temperature

(2) Thermistor for Upper Part Temperature of Compressor

(For Prevention of Discharge Gas Overheating)
200
a. A thermistor for the upper part temperature of
the compressor is installed to prevent discharge 200
Resistance Value of

gas from overheating. R25 = 200kΩ

B = 3920k
If discharge gas temperature increases
Thermistor (kΩ)

excessively lubricating oil deterioration occurs

and lubricating properties deteriorate, resulting 100
in short compressor life. 72.3
b. If discharge gas temperature increases
excessively, compressor temperature 14.2 5.3
increases. At the worst, compressor motor 0
winding will be burnt out. 25 30 100 132 150
c. When the upper part temperature of Temperature (oC)
compressor increases during heating operation, Resistance Characteristics of Thermistor
the unit is controlled according to the following for Discharge Gas Overheating Protection
method.
G An electronic expansion valve of outdoor units is (are) opened to return the liquid refrigerant to the
compressor through the accumulator, decreasing compressor temperature.
G If the compressor upper part temperature increases exceeding 132oC even if an electronic
expansion valve opens, the compressor is stopped, in order to protect the compressor.
In cooling operation, the above function is also available.
d. If compressor upper part temperature increases excessively, the protection control is activated and
the compressor is stopped according to the following method.

Upper Part Temperature

Operation Defecting Period
of Compressor
Cooling Over 132oC 10 minutes (Continuously)
o
Over 140 C 5 seconds (Continuously)
Heating Over 132oC 10 minutes (Continuously)
Over 140oC 5 seconds (Continuously)
o
Defrosting Over 132 C 5 seconds (Continuously)

3-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

(3) Thermistor for Outdoor Ambient Temperature

The thermistor resistance characteristics are shown in the figure below.
(4) Thermistor for Evaporating Temperature of Outdoor Unit in Heating Operation (For Defrosting)
The characteristics for the thermistor is the same with the value of outdoor ambient temperature
thermistor as shown in the figure below.

90
82
80

70
61
60
Thermistor 50 46
Resistance
(KΩ) 40 35

30 27
20.5
20 16
12.5
10
10 8 5.3 3.6 2.5
0
-15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
o
Ambient Temperature ( C)
Thermistor Characteristics

3-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.6 Electronic Expansion Valve

3.6.1 Electronic Expansion Valve for Outdoor Units

Micro-Computer
Pulse Signal Pulse Motor
2-Phase Permanent Magnetic Pulse Motor
Control 0 to 500 Pulse by 1 Pulse

Refrigerant Flow Control

Precise Control

Needle

Specifications
Items Specifications
Models to be Applied For Main Cycle of
RAS-5FSG, RAS-5FS3, RAS-8FSG, RAS-8FS3, RAS-10FSG,
RAS-10FS3, RAS-16FSG, RAS-16FS3, RAS-20FSG, RAS-20FS3,
RAS-24FSG1, RAS-24FS5, RAS-30FSG1, RAS-30FS5,
RAS-8FXG, RAS-8FX3, RAS-10FXG and RAS-10FX3
Type EKV (10.0USRT) Series / EKV (5.0USRT) Series for FX MVB
Refrigerant Used R22 or R407C
Working Temperature
Range -30oC to 65oC (Operating Time of Coil: less than 50%)
Mounting Direction Drive shaft in Vertical Direction within an Angle of 45o as Maximum
Flow Direction Reversible
Drive Method 4-Phase Pulse Motor Method
Rated Voltage DC12V+1.8V
83PPS (Pulse Width at ON: 36mm sec, OFF: 60mm sec)
Drive Condition
1, 2 Phase Excitation
Coil Resistance
46Ω+10% (at 20oC)
(each Phase)
Wiring Diagram,
Drive Circuit and
Activation Mode
ON
A OFF
M

Wiring B
Diagram A
B A B A
B
Drive Close Open
DC12V Circuit Valve

Activation

3-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.6.2 Electronic Expansion Valve for Indoor Units

Micro-Computer
Pulse Signal Magnet
2-Phase Permanent Magnetic Pulse Motor Coil
Pulse Motor
Control 0 to 2,000 Pulse by 1 Pulse

Refrigerant Flow Control Gear

Precise Control
Driver

Bellows

Valve

Specifications
Items Specifications
Type EDM Type
Refrigerant Used R22 or R407C
Working Temperature
Range -30oC to 70oC (With Coils Not Electrified)
Mounting Direction Drive shaft in Vertical Direction, Motor Upside and 90o in Four Direction
Flow Direction Reversible
Rated Electricity
Drive Method 4-Phase Pulse Motor Method
Rated Voltage DC12V+1.2V
100Ω+250PPS (Pulse Width Over 3mm)
Drive Condition
2 Phase Excitation
Coil Resistance
150+10% (at 20oC)
(1 Phase)
Wiring Diagram,
Drive Circuit and
Procedure
Activation Mode 1 2 3 4 1
1φ Phase
ON
M 1φ OFF

3φ Wiring 2φ
2φ 4φ Diagram
3φ

4φ
Drive Valve
DC12V Circuit Activation
Close Open

Activation

3-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.7 Pressure Sensor

Heating Operation
(1) High Pressure Control
The high pressure during heating operation
is detected by a high pressure sensor, and Proportional Control of
Compressor Frequency
compressor frequencies are controlled by High
with Operating Capacity
the proportional controlling method with of Indoor Units
Pressure
operating capacity of indoor units (or PID Control
Control for Compressor Frequency) so that Protection Control (Gas
Bypass Control)
the high pressure is controlled in an
appropriate range. The output of the high
pressure sensor during heating operation
performs protective control; gas by-pass
control. 5

Output Voltage (DC V)

Heating Operation

PID Control for

Compressor Frequency
High
Pressure
Control
Protection Control 0.5
(Gas Bypass Control)

0.371
-0.1 0 3.5
(-1) (35)
(FX Series Only) Pressure MPa (kgf/cm G) 2

Output Characteristics of High Pressure Sensor

(2) Low Pressure Control

The suction pressure during cooling
operation is detected by a low pressure
sensor, and compressor frequencies are Cooling Operation
controlled by the proportional controlling
method with operating capacity of indoor Proportional Control of
units (or PID Control for Compressor Compressor Frequency
with Operating Capacity
Frequency) so that the suction pressure is Low of Indoor Units
Pressure
controlled in an appropriate range. Control
If the suction pressure reaches excessively Vacuum Prevention
low, the cooling can be insufficient and Control
parts composing the refrigeration cycle can
be damaged. For this reason, if the output
of the low pressure sensor indicates
vacuum and the value is maintained 12 4.36
minutes or longer, the compressor is
Output Voltage (DC V)

stopped for the purpose of protection.

Cooling Operation

PID Control for 1.15

Compressor Frequency
Low 0.5
Pressure
Control 0.37
Vacuum Prevention
Control
-0.1 0 0.5 3.0
(-1) (5) (30)
Pressure MPa (kgf/cm2G)
(FX Series Only) Output Characteristics of Low Pressure Sensor

3-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.8 High Pressure Protection Device

If the discharge pressure is excessively high, the compressor and the component parts of the
refrigeration cycle can be damaged. Therefore, in case that the discharge pressure is higher than
3.3/3.0MPa (R407C/R22), the protection control is activated and the compressor is stopped.

High Pressure
Switch
Low Pressure
Union Sensor High Pressure
Sensor

(1) For controlling the high pressure not to Gas By-pass Circuit
increase excessively during heating
operation, the gas by-pass circuit and the
air volume of the outdoor fan is controlled S
S
automatically. P

(2) The gas by-pass circuit, which is composed P

of the solenoid valve and the capillary tube Solenoid
Capillary Tube Valve
for flow adjustment, control the high MP

pressure not to increase excessively by S

leading the high pressure gas to the low

pressure side.

S S

3-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.9 Noise Filter (NF)

The noise filter decreases the leakage of noise made by the inverter to the power supply side. Terminals
indicated with “OUT” are connected to the inverter side and terminals indicated with “IN” to the power supply
side.

For RAS-5FSG/5FS3~20FSG/FS3
Items Specifications
Model HF4020C-DV
Rated Current AC415V 20A
Permissible Temperature Range -20oC to 65oC
Circuit Diagram
IN OUT
Z5

E
L1 L5 N
N
Z4
L2 L6 L1
L1
Z1 Z2 C10
C11
L3 L7 L2
L2
Z3 C12
C13
L3 L4 L8 L3
C14
C15

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9

250

N N

L1 EMI FILTER L1
TYPE
120
100

RATING
L2 T.V L2
LOT No.

L3 L3

260
270
18
93
75

3-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

for RAS-5 to RAS-20FSG/FS3

Items Specifications
Model 20PTT10-H
Rated Current AC415V 20A
Permissible Temperature Range -20oC to 85oC
Circuit Diagram L1 L1
L CY1 L
L2 L2'
L CY1 L
L L
I O
L3 L3'
N CY1 A
z Cx L L Cx
E D
N N'
CY2
CY2
E E'

250
7.0 ± 0.3 118 ± 0.3 118 ± 0.3
7.0 ± 0.3

Date Code

20PTT10-H 415VAC/20A
Cy1 Cy1
E E Cy2
E'
Cx Cy2 Cx E'

N N N' N'
L L
106 ± 0.3

I O
N Cx Cx A
120

L3 Z L3 L3' L3'
E D

L2 L2'
Z L2 L2'

L1 Z
L1 Cx Cx L1' L1'
L Cy1 L
5 - φ4.2

Unit: mm
30 Max.
70 Max.

for RAS-24 and 30FSG1/FS5

Items Specifications
Model 4LFB-12822-2F
Rated Current AC415V 22A
Permissible Temperature Range -20oC to 85oC
Circuit Diagram
L1 L1
L CY1 L
L2 L2'
L CY1 L
L L
I O
L3 L3'
N CY1 A
z Cx L L Cx
E D
N N'
CY2
CY2
E E'

250
7.0 ± 0.3 118 ± 0.3 118 ± 0.3
7.0 ± 0.3

Date Code

4LFB-12822-2F 415VAC/22A
Cy1 Cy1
E E Cy2
E'
Cx Cy2 Cx E'

N N N' N'
L L
106 ± 0.3

I O
N Cx Cx A
120

L3 Z L3 L3' L3'
E D

L2 L2'
Z L2 L2'

L1 Z
L1 Cx Cx L1' L1'
L Cy1 L
5 - φ4.2

Unit: mm
30 Max.
70 Max.

3-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

3.10 Capacitor (CB1, CB2)

This part is used for changing the alternative current to the direct current for the inverter. Connect two
capacitor in line and used.

Specifications
Items Specifications
Models 400LGSN2700M
Capacity of Static Electricity 2700µF
Rated Voltage 400V
Permissible Temperature Range -25oC to 95oC

140

φ84

−
3.11 Reactor (DCL)
This part is used for changing the alternative current to the direct current for the inverter.

for RAS-5FSG to RAS-20FSG (380/415V)

Items Specifications
Character 1mH+10% (at 1kHz)
Rated Current 33A
Direct Resistance 25.1mΩ+20% (at 20oC)
Permissible Temperature Range -20oC to 60oC
75
70

76.2

3-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAIN PARTS

for RAS-5 to 20FSG/FS3 (220V/60Hz)

Items Specifications
Character 0.5mH+10% (at 1kHz)
Rated Current 37A
Direct Resistance 12.2mΩ+20% (at 20oC)
Permissible Temperature Range -20oC to 65oC

MAX. 80
47.5±2
66±2
74±2

60±0.5

86±2

for RAS-24 and 30FSG1/FS5

Items Specifications
Character 0.5mH+10% (at 1kHz)
Rated Current 30A
Direct Resistance 15mΩ+20% (at 20oC)
Permissible Temperature Range -20oC to 65oC
MAX. 70
37.5±2
56±2
74±2

60±0.5

86±2

3-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.1 Indoor Unit)
4. OPTIONAL FUNCTION
4.1 Indoor Unit (For RPF(I)-FSG(E), RPK-FSGM(6), RPC-FSG1 (Before Alteration)
and RPI (8, 10HP) Series)
4.1.1 Remote Control ON/OFF Function
This function provides a control to stop and start the system automatically from a remote place. Three
methods are available by using each signal from a building management system.
(1) Remote Control 1 (Level Signal Input)
This is an ON/OFF function from a remote place by using level signal (or ON/OFF). The basic wiring,
time chart are shown below.

NOTE:
Indoor Unit PCB When the unit is started by the remote ON/OFF switch,
the fan speed is subject to the mode memorized in
CN4 the remote control switch.
3
2 SS3: Remote Control ON/OFF

X1 SS3
Power
3 Source
2
X1
Control Circuit
3P Connector
Wiring Diagram Example of Remote Control 1

Signal to 2 & 3 of CN4

NOTES:
1. Picking up signal within 10 seconds after power supply is turned ON is not available due to initializing of
components.
Do not change the signal (RUN/STOP) in this period.
2. Remote Control Switch is required for this function.

4-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.1 Indoor Unit)
(2) Remote Control 2 (Pulse Signal Input)
This is an ON/OFF function from a remote place by using pulse signal. The basic wiring and time
chart are shown below.

Turn OFF the power source before setting the dip switch.

Indoor Unit PCB Set No.6 at ON side.

DSW2
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NOTES:
1. When the unit is started by the remote ON/OFF switch,
Indoor Unit PCB the fan speed is subject to the mode memorized in
the remote control switch.
CN4
2. The pulse width shall be wider than 200ms.
3
2
1
X1 ON OFF
Power
3 Source
2
1 X1 X2
X2 Control Circuit
3P Connector
Wiring Diagram Example of Remote Control 2

Signal to 2 & 3 of CN4 (Operation)

Signal to 1 & 2 of CN4 (Stop)

Control by R.C.S

Unit Operation
NOTE:
Time
Operation priority is given to the remote
ON/OFF signal or remote control switch
signal which is given last. Time Chart

NOTES:
1. Picking up signal within 10 seconds after power supply is turned ON is not available due to initializing of
components.
Do not change the signal (RUN/STOP) in this period.
2. Remote Control Switch is required for this function.

4-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.1 Indoor Unit)
(3) Remote Control 3 (Pulse Signal Input)
By using the signal from a building management system, the air conditioners can be stopped.
If a signal is input during stoppage of air conditioner, the air conditioner remains unchanged.
The basic wiring and time chart are shown below.

Turn OFF the power source before setting the dip switch.

Indoor Unit PCB Set No.6 at ON side.

DSW2
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Indoor Unit PCB NOTE:

The pulse width shall be wider than 200ms.
CN4
2
1

OFF
Power
2 Source
1 X1 X1
Control Circuit
3P Connector
Wiring Diagram Example of Remote Control 3

Signal to 1 & 2 of CN4

NOTES:
1. Picking up signal within 10 seconds after power supply is turned ON is not available due to initializing of
components.
Do not change the signal (RUN/STOP) in this period.
2. Remote Control Switch is required for this function.

4-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.1 Indoor Unit)
(4) Cancellation of Commands from Remote Control Switch after Forced Stoppage (Level Signal Input)
By using the signal from a building management system, the air conditioners can be stopped and the
individual commands from the remote control switch are canceled.
The basic wiring and time chart are shown below. The required parts are shown in Table 4.1.

Cut JP5 of indoor PCB. Indoor Unit PCB

CN4
3 SS3: Forced Stoppage Sw.
2
SS3
JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 Power
X1 Source
< RPK >
3 X1
2 Control Circuit
Cut JP2 of
JP1 JP2 indoor PCB.
3P Connector
Wiring Diagram Example

CN4

NOTES:
1. Picking up signal within 10 seconds after power supply is turned ON is not available due to initializing of
components.
Do not change the signal (RUN/STOP) in this period.
2. Remote Control Switch is required for this function.

Table 4.1 Specifications on Required Components for (1) to (4) Functions

Component Manufacturer or Specifications Remarks

OMRON Mini Power Relay
Auxiliary Relay (X1, X2) Voltage
Model: MY1F or Equivalent
220V or 240V
Changeover Switch (SS2, SS3) Manual Type
Optional Part PCC-1 (*) Five Cords with
3P Connector Cord
(Able to Connect JST Connector XHP-3 (*)) Connectors as One Set

Cord Low Voltage 0.3mm2 less than 24V (*)

(Indoor) 220V/240V Class 0.5 to 0.75mm 2

Cord Low Voltage 0.5 to 0.75mm2 less than 24V (*)

(Outdoor) 220V/240V Class 2mm 2

(*) Only for RPK (After Alteration): PCC-1A (Connector XARP-3), 12V

NOTE:
Make the wires CN4 as short as possible. Do not install the wires along the 200-400V power line.
Separately install them at a distance of more than 30cm. (Intersecting as applicable.)
If the wires are installed along the power line, put the wires in a metal tube and connect a wire to an end for
grounding. The maximum wiring length is 70m.
In the case that this function is used, it is recommended that safety devices such as electric leakage
breaker or smoke detector, etc. be used.

4-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.1 Indoor Unit)
4.1.2 Power Supply ON/OFF 1 (Automatic Operation When Power Supply ON)
Set the dip switch on the PCB for the indoor unit as shown in the figure below to start and stop the system
automatically according to the power supply ON/OFF.
When this function is utilized in the condition that there is no person to operate the unit, make the system
with monitoring for disaster prevention.

Turn OFF the power source before setting the dip switch.

NOTES:
Indoor Unit PCB The unit is started and stopped according to the power
Set No.5 at ON side. supply ON/OFF due to the power failure.
DSW2 When the power failure is occurred during stoppage by
ON the remote control switch operation, the unit is started
OFF
again automatically after the power supply is recovered.
In case of RPK-FSGM* (After Alteration) controlled by
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PC-P1H, set by PC-P1H. Refer to the item 4.4.4
Optional Function Setting "item d1".

4.1.3 Power Supply ON/OFF 2 (Restarting Function After Power Failure)

Set the dip switch on the PCB for the indoor unit as shown in the figure below to restart the system
automatically even if power failure continues for more than 2 seconds. The standard setting provides
automatic restarting in less than 2 seconds after a power failure.
The compressor starts in 2 seconds after a 3 minute time guard after power failure.

Turn OFF the power source before setting the dip switch.

Indoor Unit PCB

NOTES:
Set No.7 at ON side.
The system does not start if the system is stopped
DSW2 before power failure.
ON In case of RPK-FSGM* (After Alteration) controlled
OFF by PC-P1H, set by PC-P1H. Refer to the item 4.4.4
Optional Function Setting "item d3".
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.1 Indoor Unit)
4.1.4 Control by Field-Supplied Room Thermostat
In the case that a field-supplied room thermostat instead of the inlet thermistor of the indoor unit is used,
connect wires as shown below. The required parts are shown in Table 4.2.

Turn OFF the power source before setting the dip switch.

3P Connector
3
2
1 Thermostat

3 CN3
2
1 Temperature Indoor Unit
Increase Set No.3 at ON side.
DSW2
ON
Indoor Unit PCB OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Field-Supplied Room Thermostat

Operation
Cooling Operation: Compressor is ON by closing terminals 2 and 3 at CN3
Compressor is OFF by opening terminals 2 and 3 at CN3
Heating Operation: Compressor is ON by closing terminals 1 and 2 at CN3
Compressor is OFF by opening terminals 1 and 2 at CN3

Table 4.2 Specifications on Required Components

Component Manufacturer or Specifications
Thermostat Equivalent of YAMATAKE R7031P005, R7031Q005

NOTES:
1. When a field-supplied room thermostat is used, select the specified thermostat as below.
Contactor Load: DC24V 50 to 6 mA (*)
Differential: more than 1.5 degree
(*) Only for RPK (After Alteration): DC 12V
2. Do not use a thermostat utilizing mercury.
3. This function can be used together with “4.1.1 Remote Control ON/OFF Function”.

4-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.1 Indoor Unit)
4.1.5 Operation Control by Remote Temperature Sensor (Except for RPK-FSGM (Before Alteration) Series)
By using an optional remote temperature sensor, the followings are available.
(1) The unit is controlled by the average temperature of the inlet air thermistor and remote temperature
sensor.
(2) In the case that the discharge air temperature exceeds 60oC, the fan speed increases from “Medium”
to “High” or “ Low” to “Medium”.

NOTES:
1. The remote temperature sensor can not be used together with the remote control thermistor.
(Refer to the item 4.4.5 (17).)
2. During the heating operation, “Heating Temperature Calibration” is automatically cancelled.
(Refer to the item 4.4.5 (1).)

4.1.6 Cooling or Heating Operation Mode Setting Change by External Input (Level Signal Input)
By utilizing this function, the cooling or heating operation mode can be changed by giving a contact signal
from the outside to the unit. The operation mode is followed by the field-supplied switch or the remote
control switch, which is used last.

CN4

CN4

NOTES:
1. This function can not be used together with the following functions; “Remote Control 2”, “Remote Control
3” and “Cancellation of Commands from Remote Control Switch after Forced Stoppage”.
2. Remote Control Switch is required for this function.

4-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.1 Indoor Unit)
4.1.7 Picking Up Operation Signal

Table 4.3 Required Parts for Modification

Parts Name Specification / Model
Auxiliary Relay * OMRON made High Power Relay Model LY2F DC24V (*)
Connector Cable PCC-1 (3P Connector Cable) (*)
*: Do not use the relay with diode.
(*) Only for RPK (After Alteration): DC12V, PCC-1A

(1) Picking Up Operation Signal

This function is utilized to pick up the operation signal. By this function, operation signal at a remote
place can be checked, or operation at the fresh air intake fan motor can be interlocked. Connect
wires as shown below. The required parts are indicated in Table 4.3. Please note that the contact of
the auxiliary relay “RYa” is closed when this operation signal is given.

RPK-FSGM* (After Alteration)

CN7 Connector
CN6 Connector

CN6 CN7

2 1
RY

(JST-XHP-3) 3 Pin Connector Housing

(JST-XARP-3)

Picking Up Operation Signal

(2) Picking Up Alarm Signal

This signal is utilized to pick-up activation of safety devices. However, this function is not available
under abnormal transmission conditions of the remote control switch. Connect the wires as shown
below. The required parts are indicated in Table 4.3. Please note that the contact of auxiliary relay,
RYa is closed when one of the safety devices is activated.

(JST-XHP-3) (*)
(*) Only for RPK (After Alteration):
Picking Up Alarm Signal JST XARP-3

4-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.1 Indoor Unit)
(3) Picking Up Heating Operation Signal (Except for RPK-FSGM Series)
This function is utilized to pick up the heating operation signal. The contact of RYa is closed when
heating operation signal is ON despite “Thermo-ON” or “Thermo-OFF”. Connect the wires as shown
below.

CN8 Connector

CN8

(JST-XHP-3)

Picking Up Heating Operation Signal

(4) Picking Up “Thermo-ON” Signal during Heating Operation (Except for RPK-FSGM Series)
This function is utilized to pick up the heating “Thermo-ON” signal of compressor running to control a
circulator or a humidifier. Connect wires as shown below. The required parts are indicated in Table
4.3. The contact of RYa is closed when “THERMOSTAT” is ON during heating operation mode.

(JST-XHP-3)

NOTE:
“Thermo-ON” indicates that one of the micro-computer control function “THERMOSTAT” is ON as a
thermostat.

4-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.1 Indoor Unit)
(5) Picking Up Cooling Operation Signal (Except for RPK-FSGM Series)
This function is utilized to pick up the cooling signal. The contact of RYa is closed when cooling
operation signal is ON despite “Thermo-ON” or “Thermo-OFF”. Connect the wires as shown below.
The required main parts are indicated in Table 4.3.

CN5 Connector

CN5

(JST-XHP-3)

Picking Up Cooling Operation Signal

(6) Picking Up “Thermo-ON” Signal during Cooling Operation (Except for RPK-FSGM Series)
This function is utilized to pick up the cooling “Thermo-ON” signal of compressor running. Connect
the wires as shown below. The required parts are indicated in Table 4.3. The contact of RYa is
closed when “THERMOSTAT” is ON during cooling operation mode.

CN5 Connector

CN5

(JST-XHP-3)
Picking Up "Thermo-ON" during Cooling Operation

NOTE:
“Thermo-ON” indicates that one of the micro-computer control function “THERMOSTAT” is ON as a
thermostat.

4-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
4.2 Indoor Unit (For RPI (0.8 to 5.0HP), RCI, RCD, RPC (After Alteration) and KPI Series)
4.2.1 Input and Output Setting of Indoor PCB Connector
For the external input and output signal, there are two input ports (CN3) and three output ports
(CN7, CN8) prepared on the indoor unit PCB.
In case of changing the setting (factory-set), perform the following procedures.

(1) Field Setting Mode

Check to ensure that the unit is stopped, press
the “CHECK” switch and the “RESET” switch on
the remote control switch simultaneously more
than 3 seconds, and the remote control switch is
changed to the field setting mode.
When the remote control switch is at the field
setting mode, the “SERVICE” is indicated and the
“01” is flickers below the “SERVICE” indication.
(2) Input and Output Setting Mode

>
At the field setting mode as described in the above item (1), press the “TEMP ” switch or the
>

“TEMP ” switch and the number flickering below the “SERVICE” indication is changed as
(01 <=> 02).
Set the flickering number at “02”, leave this condition for 7 seconds or press the “CHECK” switch, and
the remote control switch is changed to the mode for input and output setting of indoor unit.
(3) Selection of Indoor Unit
(a) At the input and output setting mode, the
indication on the remote control switch is
changed as shown in the right figure.
1 The indication of “02” is turned ON.
2 The address of the indoor unit which

the optional function is to be set, is

indicated at the segments for timer setting
time indication, and the “ADDS” is indicated
below.
3 The refrigerant cycle number of the indoor unit for the input and output setting is indicated

at the segments for timer setting time indication, and the “RN” is indicated below.
4 The indication of the setting temperature is turned OFF. >
>

(b) At the condition of the above item (a), press the “TEMP ” switch or the “TEMP ” switch of the
remote control switch and the indoor unit for the input and output setting, can be changed.
NOTES:
1. The indoor unit can be selected among the indoor units connected to the remote control switch.
2. In case that both the indications of the address and the refrigerant cycle number is “AA”, all the indoor
units connected to the remote control switch are selected. In this case, the individual setting for each
indoor unit can not be performed.
(c) After selecting the indoor unit, leave the condition for 7 seconds or press the “CHECK” switch, the
remote control switch is changed to the input and output setting mode.

4-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
(4) Setting Procedures
(a) At the input and output setting mode,
the indication on the remote control switch is
changed as shown in the right figure.
1 The allocated port for input and output

signal is indicated at the segments for timer

setting time indication.
Refer to the indicated port and
the connector of the indoor PCB for
the table below.
2 The codes of the input and output signals are indicated at the segments for setting temperature
indication.
Refer to the indicated code and the input and output signal for the table below.

Indications and Input and Output Signals

Indication 2 Input Output
00 Not Set Not Set
01 Control by Field-Supplied Room Thermostat (Cooling) Operation Signal
02 Control by Field-Supplied Room Thermostat (Heating) Alarm Signal
03 Remote Control ON/OFF Function 1 Cooling Operation Signal
04 Remote Control ON/OFF Function 2 (Operation) Thermo-ON Signal during Cooling
05 Remote Control ON/OFF Function 2 (Stop) Heating Signal
06 Cancellation of Commands from Remote Control Thermo-ON Signal during Heating
Switch after Forced Stoppage
07 Cooling or Heating Operation Mode Setting Total Heat Exchanger Operation Signal
08 Input for UP/DOWN Grille (Not Available) Output for UP/DOWN Grille
(Not Available)

4-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
Factory-Setting

Connector No. Pin No. of Connector Setting When Shipping Indication 2

Input CN3 #1 - #2 Remote Control ON/OFF Function 1 03
#2 - #3 Cancellation of Commands from Remote 06
Control Switch after Forced Stoppage
Output CN7 #1 - #2 Operation Signal 01
#1 - #3 Alarm Signal 02
CN8 #1 - #2 Thermo-ON Signal during Heating 06

(b) Press the “TIME ” switch or the “TIME ” switch, the indication of port at the segments for timer
setting time indication is changed as shown below.
Select the port for allocating the input and output signal.

When pressing the “TIME ” switch

i1 i2 o1 o2 o3
When pressing the “TIME ” switch

(c) Press the “CHECK” switch, and the code of the input and output signal at the segments for setting
temperature indication is changed as shown below.
Select the input and output signal to be allocated to the port.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

(5) Selection of Other Indoor Unit

>
>
At the input and output setting mode, press the “TEMP ” switch or the “TEMP ” switch, the
condition of the remote control switch is changed so that the indoor unit can be selected for the input
and output setting described in the item (3).
(6) Return from Input and Output Setting Mode
Press the “RESET” switch, the input and output setting is memorized and the mode is returned to the
normal condition.

4.2.2 Remote Control Thermistor Function

The temperature can be controlled by the built-in thermistor of the remote control switch (remote control
thermistor) instead of the thermistor for the suction air of the indoor unit.

NOTES:
1. Even in case of controlling temperature by the remote control thermistor, the detected temperature by
the thermistor for the suction air of the indoor unit is applied for the activation of the protective devices in
relation with the thermostat for the suction air of the indoor unit.
2. In temperature control by the remote control thermistor, when the detecting temperature is abnormal due
to the failure of the remote control thermistor, etc., the thermistor to be used is changed to the thermistor
for suction air of the indoor unit automatically.
3. In case of using this remote control thermistor function, select the location for installing the remote
control thermistor as follows;
* where the average temperature of the room can be detected.
* where the thermistor is not exposed to the sunlight directly.
* where the heat source is not near the thermistor.
* where the outdoor air do not affect the room temperature by opening and closing the door, etc.
4. In case of using two remote control switches (Main and Sub), this remote control thermistor function is
available only for the main remote control switch.
Refer to the item 4.4.4 “Optional Function Setting” for the setting procedures of optional functions.
5. This function is not available while the remote sensor is utilizing. (Priority of Remote Sensor)

4-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
4.2.3 Remote Control ON/OFF Function
This function provides a control to stop and start the system from a remote place. Four methods are
available by using each signal from a building management system.
The factory-setting is as follows; “Remote Control 1” Signal Input to 1# and 2# of CN3 (item (1)), and
“Cancellation of Commands from Remote Control Switch after Forced Stoppage” Signal Input to 2# and 3#
of CN3. In case of using other functions, change the contact setting according to the item 4.2.1.

(1) Remote Control 1 (Level Signal Input)

This is an ON/OFF function from a remote place by using level signal (or ON/OFF). The basic wiring,
time chart are shown below.
(In Case of “Remote Control 1” Signal Input to 1# and 2# of CN3)

NOTES:
1. Picking up signal within 10 seconds after power supply is turned ON is not available due to initializing of
components.
Do not change the signal (RUN/STOP) in this period.
2. Remote Control Switch is required for this function.
3. KPI series is applicable for “A/C + VENTI Mode” only.

4-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
(2) Remote Control 2 (Pulse Signal Input)
This is an ON/OFF function from a remote place by using pulse signal. The basic wiring and time
chart are shown below.
(In Case of “ON” Signal Input to 2# and 3# of CN3 and “OFF” Signal Input to 1# and 2# of CN3)

NOTES:
1. Picking up signal within 10 seconds after power supply is turned ON is not available due to initializing of
components.
Do not change the signal (RUN/STOP) in this period.
2. Remote Control Switch is required for this function.
3. KPI series is applicable for “A/C + VENTI Mode” only.

4-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
(3) Remote Control 3
By using the signal from a building management system, the air conditioners can be stopped.
If a signal is input during stoppage of air conditioner, the air conditioner remains unchanged.
The basic wiring and time chart are shown below.
(In Case of “Stoppage” Signal Input to 1# and 2# of CN3)

NOTES:
1. Picking up signal within 10 seconds after power supply is turned ON is not available due to initializing of
components.
Do not change the signal (RUN/STOP) in this period.
2. Remote Control Switch is required for this function.

4-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
(4) Cancellation of Commands from Remote Control Switch after Forced Stoppage
By using the signal from a building management system, the air conditioners can be stopped and the
individual commands from the remote control switch are canceled.
The basic wiring and time chart are shown below. The required parts are shown in Table 4.1.
(In Case of “Cancellation of Commands from Remote Control Switch after Forced Stoppage” Input to
2# and 3# of CN3)

NOTES:
1. Picking up signal within 10 seconds after power supply is turned ON is not available due to initializing of
components.
Do not change the signal (RUN/STOP) in this period.
2. Remote Control Switch is required for this function.

At this function, the B contact can be used by the optional setting (item 4.4.5 (20)) of the remote control
switch. The time chart when using the B contact is shown below.

Time Chart

NOTES:
1. Picking up signal within 10 seconds after power supply is turned ON is not available due to initializing of
components.
Do not change the signal (RUN/STOP) in this period.
2. Remote Control Switch is required for this function.

4-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
Table 4.4 Specifications on Required Components

Component Manufacturer or Specifications Remarks

OMRON Mini Power Relay
Auxiliary Relay (X1, X2) Voltage
Model: MY1F or Equivalent
220V or 240V
Changeover Switch (SS2, SS3) Manual Type
Optional Part PCC-1A Five Cords with
3P Connector Cord
(Able to Connect JST Connector XARP-3) Connectors as one set

Cord Low Voltage 0.3mm2 less than 12V

(Indoor) 220V/240V Class 0.5 to 0.75mm 2

Cord Low Voltage 0.5 to 0.75mm2 less than 12V

(Outdoor) 220V/240V Class 2mm 2

NOTE:
Make the wires CN3 as short as possible. Do not install the wires along the 200-400V power line.
Separately install them at a distance of more than 30cm. (Intersecting as applicable.)
If the wires are installed along the power line, put the wires in a metal tube and connect a wire to an end for
grounding. The maximum wiring length is 70m.
In the case that this function is used, it is recommended that safety devices such as electric leakage
breaker or smoke detector, etc. be used.

4.2.4 Power Supply ON/OFF 1 (Automatic Operation When Power Supply ON)
Set the optional function of the remote control switch as shown in the item 4.4.5 (22) to start and stop the
system automatically according to the power supply ON/OFF.
When this function is utilized in the condition that there is no person to operate the unit, make the system
with monitoring for disaster prevention.
NOTE:
The unit is started and stopped according to the power supply ON/OFF due to the power failure.
When the power failure is occurred during operation, the unit is started again automatically after the power
supply is recovered.
Remote Control Switch is required for this function.

4.2.5 Power Supply ON/OFF 2 (Restarting Function After Power Failure)

Set the optional function of the remote control switch as shown in the item 4.4.5 (24) to restart the system
automatically even if power failure continues for more than 2 seconds. Set it after the main switch is OFF.
The standard setting provides automatic restarting in less than 2 seconds after a power failure.
The compressor starts in 2 seconds after a 3 minute time guard after power failure.
NOTE:
The system does not start if the system is stopped before power failure.
Remote Control Switch is required for this function.

4-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
4.2.6 Control by Field-Supplied Room Thermostat (Except for KPI Series)
In the case that a field-supplied room thermostat instead of the inlet thermistor of the indoor unit is used,
connect wires as shown below. The required parts are shown in Table 4.5.
(In Case of “Room Thermostat (Cooling)” Input to 2# and 3# of CN3 and “Room Thermostat (Heating)”
Input to 1# and 2# of CN3 according to the item 4.2.1)

Operation
Cooling Operation: Compressor is ON by closing terminals 2 and 3 at CN3
Compressor is OFF by opening terminals 2 and 3 at CN3
Heating Operation: Compressor is ON by closing terminals 1 and 2 at CN3
Compressor is OFF by opening terminals 1 and 2 at CN3

Table 4.5 Specifications on Required Components

Component Manufacturer or Specifications
Thermostat Equivalent of YAMATAKE R7031P005, R7031Q005

NOTES:
1. When setting the dip switch DSW2, turn OFF power source and set the dip switch. If the dip switch is
set without turning OFF the power source, it does not correctly function.
2. When a field-supplied room thermostat is used, select the specified thermostat as below.
Contactor Load: DC12V
Differential: more than 1.5 degree
3. Do not use a thermostat utilizing mercury.
4. This function can be used together with “4.2.3 Remote Control ON/OFF Function”.

4-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
4.2.7 Operation Control by Remote Temperature Sensor (Except for KPI Series)
By using an optional remote temperature sensor, the followings are available.
(1) The unit is controlled by the average temperature of the inlet air thermistor and remote temperature
sensor.
(2) In the case that the discharge air temperature exceeds 60°C, the fan speed increases from “Medium”
to “High” or “Low” to “Medium”.

NOTES:
1. The remote temperature sensor can not be used together with the remote control thermistor.
(Refer to the item 4.4.5 (17).)
2. During the heating operation, “Heating Temperature Calibration” is automatically cancelled.
(Refer to the item 4.4.5 (1).)

4.2.8 Cooling or Heating Operation Mode Setting Change by External Input (Except for KPI Series)
By utilizing this function, the cooling or heating operation mode can be changed by giving a contact signal
from the outside to the unit. The operation mode is followed by the field-supplied switch or the remote
control switch, which is used last.
(In Case of “Cooling or Heating Operation Mode Setting Change by External Input” Signal Input to 1# and
2# of CN3)

NOTES:
1. This function can not be used together with the following functions; “Remote ON/OFF 2”, “Remote ON/
OFF 3” and “Cancellation of Commands from Remote Control Switch after Forced Stoppage”.
2. Remote Control Switch is required for this function.

4-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
4.2.9 Precooling/Preheating Operation (KPI Series Only)
This function is delayed to start the total heat exchanger at interlock with air conditioner.
(1) 30 minutes Period
Total heat exchanger starts 30 minutes later after starting air conditioner.
This function is set by optional function on remote control switch (PC-P1H).
NOTES:
1. This function is not available at ventilation setting (single operation of total heat exchanger).
2. Remote control switch is needed to set this function.
(2) 60 minutes Period
Total heat exchanger starts 60 minutes later after starting air conditioner.
This function is set by optional function on remote control switch (PC-P1H).
NOTES:
1. This function is not available at ventilation setting (single operation of total heat exchanger).
2. Remote control switch is needed to set this function.

4.2.10 Picking Up Operation Signal

By utilizing this function, the cooling or heating operation mode can be changed by giving a contact signal
from the outside to the unit. The operation mode is followed by the field-supplied switch or the remote
control switch, which is used last.

Required Parts for Modofication

Parts Name Specification / Model
Auxiliary Relay * OMRON made High Power Relay Model LY2F DC12V
Connector Cable PCC-1A (3P Connector Cable)
*: Do not use the relay with diode.

(1) Picking Up Operation Signal

This function is utilized to pick up the operation signal. By this function, operation signal at a remote
place can be checked, or operation at the fresh air intake fan motor can be interlocked. Connect
wires as shown below. Please note that the contact of the auxiliary relay “RYa” is closed when this
operation signal is given.
(In Case of Giving Operation Signal to 1# and 3# of CN7)

4-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
(2) Picking Up Alarm Signal
This signal is utilized to pick-up activation of safety devices and is normally indicated on the remote
control switch. However, this function is not available under abnormal transmission conditions.
Connect the wires as shown below. Please note that the contact of auxiliary relay, RYa is closed
when one of the safety devices is activated.
(In Case of Giving Alarm Signal to 1# and 3# of CN7)

(3) Picking Up Heating Operation Signal (Except for KPI Series)

This function is utilized to pick up the heating operation signal. The contact of RYa is closed when
heating operation signal is ON despite “Thermo-ON” or “Thermo-OFF”. Connect the wires as shown
below.
(In Case of Giving Heating Operation Signal to 1# and 3# of CN7)

4-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
(4) Picking Up “Thermo-ON” Signal during Heating Operation (Except for KPI Series)
This function is utilized to pick up the heating “Thermo-ON” signal of compressor running to control a
circulator or a humidifier. Connect wires as shown below. The contact of RYa is closed when
“THERMOSTAT” is ON during heating operation mode.
(In Case of Giving “Thermo-ON” Signal during Heating Operation to 1# and 2# of CN8)

NOTE:
“Thermo-ON” indicates that one of the micro-computer control function “THERMOSTAT” is ON as a
thermostat.

(5) Picking Up Cooling Operation Signal (Except for KPI Series)

This function is utilized to pick up the cooling signal. The contact of RYa is closed when cooling
operation signal is ON despite “Thermo-ON” or “Thermo-OFF”. Connect the wires as shown below.
(In Case of Giving Cooling Operation Signal to 1# and 3# of CN7)

4-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.2 Indoor Unit)
(6) Picking Up “Thermo-ON” Signal during Cooling Operation (Except for KPI Series)
This function is utilized to pick up the cooling “Thermo-ON” signal of compressor running. Connect
the wires as shown below.
The contact of RYa is closed when “THERMOSTAT” is ON during cooling operation mode.
(In Case of Giving “Thermo-ON” Signal during Cooling Operation to 1# and 3# of CN7)

NOTES:
1. “Thermo-ON” indicates that one of the micro-computer control function “THERMOSTAT” is ON as a
thermostat.
2. See the item 4.2.1 regarding remote control switch setting for wiring and output signal.

(7) Picking Up Total Heat Exchanger Signal

This function is utilized to pick up the total heat exchanger signal when the ventilation is operated by
PC-P1H. Connect the wires as shown below.

4-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.3 Outdoor Unit)
4.3 Outdoor Unit
On the outdoor unit printed circuit board, there are three input terminals to receive external signals and two
or five output terminals to send signals outwards. These signals are available by setting as shown below.

Function No. Input Output

1 Fixing Heating Mode Operation Signal
2 Fixing Cooling Mode Alarm Signal
3 Demand Compressor ON Signal
4 Snow Sensor Defrosting Signal
5 Enforced Stoppage --
6 Demand Current Control 80%
7 Demand Current Control 70% Only for 24 and 30HP
8 Demand Current Control 60%

Each input terminal and output terminal are set before shipment as shown below.

Input/Output
Connector Pin No. Setting Function (No.)
Name
Input 1 CN17 (1-2) Fixed Heating Mode (1)
Input 2 CN17 (2-3) Fixed Cooling Mode (2)
Input 3 CN18 (1-2) Demand (3)
Output 1 CN16 (1-2) Operation (1)
Output 2 CN16 (1-3) Alarm (2)

In the case that the above setting change is required at site, perform the following procedures.
(1) Set No. 1 pin on the dip-switch, DSW8 on the outdoor printed circuit board at the “ON” side while the
main power to the outdoor unit is being supplied. By setting, function selection mode is available and
the following appears on the 7-segment display.

SEG2 SEG1

Input/Output Terminal Function No.

This display indicates that the function No. 1 (Fixed Heating Mode) is set at input 1.

4-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.3 Outdoor Unit)
(2) By pressing the push-switches PSW2 and PSW3, input/output terminal name is changed.
The following shows the display changes when PSW2 and PSW3 are pushed.

PSW3

Indication
for Input 1

PSW2 PSW3

Indication
for Input 2

PSW2 PSW3

Indication
for Input 3

PSW2 PSW3

Indication
for Output 1

PSW2 PSW3

Indication
for Output 2

PSW2

(3) After the input/output terminal name is selected, select your required function No. by pushing PSW2 or
PSW3 while PSW1 is being pushed.

This number is increased by 1 by pushing PSW2

while PSW1 is being pushed.
This number is decreased by 1 by pushing PSW3
while PSW1 is being pushed.

(4) After selecting the function No., return No. 1 pin at the “OFF” side on the DSW8. The selected contents
are memorized in the outdoor unit printed circuit board and the function selection mode is stopped. The
memorized data is maintained even power source lines are disconnected. The connecting details of
each function are described below, and the required parts are also indicated below.

4-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.3 Outdoor Unit)
4.3.1 Demand
In the case that the demand input terminals on the outdoor unit printed circuit board are short-circuited,
compressor(s) is stopped. (In this case, the indoor unit(s) is put under thermo-OFF condition.)
The stoppage code No. “10” is given. By disconnecting the demand switch contact, restarting is available.
The following indicates an example for Demand at input 3 (between 1 and 2 pins of CN18).

Wiring Diagram Example of Demand Control

4.3.2 Forced Stoppage

The compressor is stopped and the indoor fan motor is stopped when the forced stoppage input terminals
(CN18 #1 to #2) on the outdoor unit PCB is short-circuited during running. However, the remote control
switch display remains at the same mode with the stoppage code No. “10”.
In this case, if the input terminals are opened, operation is resumed.

Wiring Diagram Example of Forced Stoppage

4-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.3 Outdoor Unit)
4.3.3 Demand Current Control (Only for 24 and 30HP)
In the case that the demand input terminals on the outdoor unit PCB are short-circuited, the compressor
frequency is controlled that the maximum limit of the outdoor running current is set 80%, 70% and 60%.
(The maximum limit of the outdoor unit running current can be selected according to the item “4.3 Outdoor
Unit”.)
If the outddor unit running current decreses beyond the maximum limit, the indoor unit is put under themo-
OFF condition. The stoppage code No. “10” is given. When the input terminal is opened during the demand
current control, its control is reset.

Wiring Diagram Example of Demand Current Control

4.3.4 Fixing Operation Mode

In the case that the fixing input terminals of the operation mode on the outdoor PCB are short-circuited, the
operation mode can be fixed at the cooling or heating mode.
Short-circuit between Terminals 1 and 2 of CN17: Fixed Heating Mode
Short-circuit between Terminals 2 and 3 of CN17: Fixed Cooling Mode
During this fixed heating (or cooling) mode, no cooling (or heating) operation is available. The indoor units
under the cooling or dry operation (or heating operation) will be changed to the Thermo-OFF condition
during this mode, and an alarm code of “20” appears.

Outdoor Unit

Wiring Diagram Example of Fixing Operation Mode

4-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.3 Outdoor Unit)
4.3.5 Snow Sensor
In the case that the input terminals of the snow sensor are short-circuited during compressor stoppage, all
the outdoor fan motors are operated at the full speed. However, if the compressor is called for compressor
operation, the fan operation is changed to the normal operation. If the input terminal is opened, the fan(s)
is stopped. This function protects the outdoor units from a condition covered with snow.

Wiring Diagram Example of Snow Sensor

Table 4.6 Specifications of Required Main Parts

Parts Specifications Remarks

Auxiliary Relay (X1, X2) Mini-Power Relay, MY1F (or 2F) made 220/240V
by OMRON
Changeover Switch (SS2, SS3) Manual Switch 220/240V
3 Pin Connector PCC-1A Five Cords with
Cord (Connected to JST Connector, XARP-3) Connectors as One Set
Cord Low Volt. 0.3mm2 lower than 24V
(Inside of Unit) 220/240V 0.5 to 0.75mm2
Cord Low Volt. 0.5 to 0.75mm2 lower than 24V
(Outside of Unit) 220/240V 2mm2

NOTES:
1. Make the wire to the terminals as short as possible.
2. Do not run the wires along high voltage cable. (crossing is applicable.)
If necessary to run wires along high voltage cable, insert the low voltage cable(s) into metal tube
and ground it at one end. If sealed wires are used at the low voltage wire side, ground it at one
end of shield wires. The maximum length should be 70m.

4-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.3 Outdoor Unit)
4.3.6 Defrosting Condition Changeover
By changing the position of No.5 on dip switch, DSW5, defrosting operation conditions can be changed.

Standard Specifications Cold Area Specifications

Dip Switch
Setting

15 15
Defrosting Operation Defrosting Operation
Stop Area Stop Area
10 10
Outdoor Evaporating Outdoor Evaporating
Temperature Temperature Temperature
5 5
Conditions (Pipe) (Pipe)
under -15 -10 -5 0 5
6
10 15 -15 -10 -5 0 5
6
10 15

Defrosting
Outdoor Temp. Outdoor Temp.
Operation -4 -4
-7
-8.7 Defrosting Operation
-10 -10
Start Area
Defrosting Operation
-15 -15 Start Area

(1) No. 5 of DSW5 is set at OFF before shipment.

(2) Turn OFF the main switch and set the dip switch.

4.3.7 Indoor Fan Control during Thermo-OFF at Heating

By setting the dip switch as shown below, the indoor fan operates for 2 min. and stop for 6 min. as a cycle
when the activation conditions are satisfied.

(1) No. 1 of DSW5 is set at OFF before shipment.

(2) Turn OFF the main switch and set the dip switch.

NOTE:
When the indoor fan is stopped by another control, it is not available to operate indoor fans.

4-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.3 Outdoor Unit)
4.3.8 All Season Heating Operation
By setting the dip switch, the heating operation through the year is available.
The heating operation is continued under a high outdoor temperature.

(1) No. 3 of DSW5 is set at OFF before shipment.

(2) Turn OFF the main switch and set the dip switch.

NOTE:
The operation may be OFF due to high outdoor temperature protection control, since protection control is
not cancelled.

4.3.9 All Season Cooling Operation

By setting the dip switch, the cooling operation through the year is available.
The cooling operation is continued under a low temperature.

(1) No. 4 of DSW5 is set at OFF before shipment.

(2) Turn OFF the main switch and set the dip switch.

NOTE:
The operation may be OFF due to low outdoor temperature protection control since protection control is not
cancelled.

4-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.3 Outdoor Unit)
4.3.10 Night Shift (Low Sound) Operation
By changing No.2 of the dip switch, DSW5, the night shift (low sound) operation can be set.
In case of the night shift operation, the cooling capacity is decreased down to 60%. The night shift
operation shall be applied only in case that the cooling capacity has the margin to be allowed for the
capacity decrease and the low sound operation is required especially in the nighttime.

(1) Outdoor Fan

NOTE:
The maximum rotation is always 100% (rotation ratio) for the standard unit.
(No limitation of the outdoor temperature)

(2) Frequency Range

Outdoor Unit Minimum Maximum Conditions
Capacity (HP) Frequency Frequency
When 5 95Hz Except for the Conditions Below
Night Shift 8 165Hz
is not Set 10 177Hz
16 30Hz 255Hz
20 325Hz
24 385Hz
30 465Hz
When 5 50Hz (1) Night Shift Operation
Night Shift 8 100Hz (2) Cooling Operation
is Set 10 114Hz (3) Outdoor Fan: Below 70%
16 30Hz 140Hz
20 176Hz
24 211Hz
30 255Hz

Converted Frequency of Constant Speed Compressor

Outdoor Unit Capacity Power Supply Frequency

(HP) 50Hz 60Hz
8 50Hz 60Hz
10 62Hz 74Hz
16 70 x 2Hz 84 x 2Hz
20 70 x 3Hz 84 x 3Hz
24 70+100 x 2Hz 84+120 x 2Hz
30 70+140 x 2Hz 84+168 x 2Hz
NOTE:
The maximum frequency for the 8 to 30HP outdoor unit is indicated as;
Inverter Frequency + Converted Frequency of Constant Speed Compressor.

4-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.3 Outdoor Unit)
4.3.11 Picking Up Signals from Outdoor Unit Printed Circuit Board
The setting function of input terminal are shown to the item 4.3 “Outdoor Unit”.
The parts applied to picking up operation signals are shown in Table 4.7.

Table 4.7 Main Required Part

Part Name Manufacturer etc.

Auxiliary Relay OMRON High Power Relay Model: LY2F DC12V

(1) Picking Up Alarm Signal

With this procedure the indoor unit alarm signals can be picked up. The method is explained in the
figure below. The required part is indicated in Table 4.7. Connecting relay contactors (RYa) are
closed at the time of alarm. (When either one of the units issues an alarm, an alarm signal is
indicated.)

Picking Up Alarm Signal

(2) Picking Up Operation Signal

With this procedure the operation signal of cooling or heating can be picked up. The method for
picking up the signal is explained in the figure below. The required part is the same as in Table 4.7.
Connecting relay contactors RYa are closed at the time of cooling or heating. These signals can be
applied to the operation of circulators and humidifiers.

Picking Up Operation Signal

4-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.3 Outdoor Unit)
(3) Picking Up Compressor ON Signal
With this procedure the compressor operation signal can be picked up. The method is explained in
the figure below. The required part is the same part as in Table 4.7. Connecting relay contactors
RYa are closed at the time of compressor running. This signal can be applied to the check of signals
at the time of remote controlling and to the fan interlock of outdoor fresh air.

Picking Up Compressor ON Signal

(4) Picking Up Defrosting Signal

With this procedure the defrosting signal can be picked up. The method is explained in the figure
below. The required part is the same as in Table 4.7. Connecting relay contactors are closed at the
time of defrosting.

Picking Up Defrosting Signal

4-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)
4.4 Remote Control Switch, PC-P1H and PC-2H2
4.4.1 Name of Part

Liquid Crystal Display (L.C.D) Section

Swing Louver Indicator

Fan Speed Indicator "DEFROST" Indicator ON / OFF Timer (Timer
Ventilation Indicator CENTRAL (Central Control) Indicator Operation) Indicator
SET TEMP (Set Temperature)
Indicator
Alarm Code Indicator
Operation Mode Indicator "NO FUNCTION" Indicator
Automatic Cooling / Heating
Operation Indicator

FAN HIGH SWING

LOUVER ON/OFF TIMER SET TEMP. ABNML (Alarm) Indicator
Run indicator (Red Lump) "FILTER" Indicator
COOL MED
ADDS RN HR
HEAT LOW NO FUNCTION UNIT
DEFROST
DRY A/C SERVICE
ABNML FILTER
+ CENTRAL
AUTO VENT H.STRG T. RUN CHECK

RUN / STOP TEMP.

Operation Switch Section
TEMP (Temperature Setting)
*Run / Stop Switch
Switch
MODE (Operation Mode
Selection) Switch
MODE FAN SPEED ON/OFF TIMER RESET

*RESET (Filter Reset) Switch

*FAN SPEED (Fan Speed

VENTI LOUVER CHECK
Selection) Switch
TIME
CHECK Switch

" "(Up & Down Panel Operation) Switch *ON / OFF TIMER Switch
(This function is not available.)
*TIME (Time Setting) Switch
*VENTI (Ventilator Operation) Switch

LOUVER (Swing Louver Operation) Switch

*Available for Total Heat
Exchanger Operation

Remote Control Switch (PC-P1H and PC-2H2: Option)

4-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)
4.4.2 Simultaneous Operation
Simultaneous Indoor Unit Operation with Remote Control Switch

[All power sources must be turned off!!]

Up to 16 indoor units can be simultaneously controlled using one remote control switch. The operation
mode such as fan, cooling or heating, the setting of air flow, the setting of temperature and the setting of
run/stop can only be set uniformly for all units. However, on/off operation of each thermostat can be done
individually. Defrosting, protective devices function, etc. are individually performed.

<PC-2H2>
* The total length of the wire shall be 200m or F 01

CD E

23
456
AB
shorter. (for 0.75mm2 wire 500m or shorter) 7 9
8

* Use the fllowing three cable wire in the RSW

CN12 (Yellow) 1 Set

system parts. Use an optional extension cable

CN12 (Yellow) or field-supplied 0.32mm2 cable.

Model PRC-10E PRC-15E PRC-20E Main Unit PCB

CN13 (Blue)
Length 10m 15m 20m FAN HIGH
COOL
HEAT LOW
DRY A/C
SWING
LOUVER

DEFROST
+ CENTRAL
AUTO VENT H.STRG
ON/OFF TIMER

ADDS RN HR
NO FUNCTION

SERVICE
ABNML
SET TEMP.

T. RUN CHECK
FILTER
UNIT

RUN / STOP TEMP.

F 01

CD E

23
CN13 (Blue)

456
AB
Controller 7 9 1st Branch Unit PCB
8
In case of using 0.32mm2 cable, the
RSW
total length of the cable must be within 200m.
Set the rotary switch to No.1
<PC-P1H>
* Simultaneous Indoor Units Operation in Same Refrigerant Piping System
Control Cable
(H-LINK)

Main No. 1 No. 2 No. 14 No. 15

Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit

Main Switch
(PC-P1H)

* Simultaneous Indoor Units Operation in Plural Refrigerant Piping Systems

Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit

Refrigerant Refrigerant Refrigerant Control Cable
System 1 System 2 System 3 (H-LINK)

Main No. 1 Main No. 1 Main No. 1

Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit

Main Switch
(PC-P1H)

NOTE:
Pay attention not to overlap the indoor units’ addresses in case that each of intoor units have a different
refrigerant system.

(1) Perform wiring between indoor units as shown in the following figure.
ATTENTION:
Indoor Unit Indoor Unit
1 2 A B 1 2 A B 1. Use shielded twist pair cable for indoor
unit - remote control switch and indoor
unit - indoor unit.
Shielded Twist Pair Cable 2. The total length between each indoor
for Remote Control Switch units, indoor unit and the remote control
Control Cable between switch must be 500m or shorter.
Outdoor Unit and Indoor Units
(H-Link Control Cable) 3. In case the remote control switch cables
connect, pay attention to check the cables
Use 0.75mm2 shielded
A B twist pair cable. lest the H-LINK control cable is connected
Remote Control Switch accidentally.
4-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)
(2) Connected unit control wires should not be installed parallel to 200-400V power cables. Fix them by
utilizing bands. It is recommended, that cables be installed at least 30cm away from power cables or
be put into grounded metal pipes.
(3) Set rotary switches RSW on the printed circuit boards of respective units as shown in the following
figure.
[Turn off all power sources!!]

<Setting of Rotary Switches> When indoor units are connected to the same outdoor unit, it is
unnecessary to set rotary switches, because they are automatically addressed.

Main Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01
Rotary
CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E
23

23

23

23

23

23

23

23
Switch
456

456

456

456

456

456

456

456
AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB
Setting
7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No.10 Unit No.11 Unit No.12 Unit No.13 Unit No.14 Unit No.15 Unit
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

Rotary F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01
CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E
23

23

23

23

23

23

23

23
Switch
456

456

456

456

456

456

456

456
AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB
Setting 7 9
8
7 9
8
7 9
8
7 9
8
7 9
8
7 9
8
7 9
8
7 9
8

( ): Address Indication

ATTENTION:
* Pay attention not to overlap addresses.
* Check the number of connected units by using “Test Run Mode”. Test run mode shall be performed after
finishing wiring, refrigerant piping, additional refrigerant charge and other items required for operation.

(4) Check Method of Number of Connected Units

Perform this check after finishing wiring, refrigerant piping, additional refrigerant charge and other
items required for operation.
(a) Test Running Mode
Turn ON the power sources of all units.
Depress the CHECK switch and the MODE switch on the remote control switch simultaneously for
three seconds or longer, to change the unit(s) to the test running mode. (Refer to the checking
procedure by the CHECK switch.)
(b) Number of Units Connected
When the number of units connected is indicated where usually the temperature is indicated, the
system is functioning normally.
(c) False Number of Connected Units is Indicated
When the indicated number of connected units is smaller than the actual number or zero,
presumable causes are as follows:
1) The power source of some units is not turned ON.
2) Incorrect setting of unit numbers was performed.
3) Control wires between units or remote control switch were incorrectly connected regarding
polarity and order.
(d) Ending of Test Running Mode
(5) When the confirmation of the number of connected units and the wiring-checking are finished, end
the test running mode by depressing the “RESET” switch.

4-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)
4.4.3 Operation System with Two Remote Control Switches

<PC-2H2>
(1) By installing an additional remote control switch, a maximum of 16 units can be controlled from two
different locations. Altering Method to Sub Control Switch
Cut Jumper Wire JP01 with Nipper.

Main and Sub Control Switch

Determine one of the two remote control switches
Liquid Crystal Display
to be the main switch and the other as a sub JP01
switch. Cut the jumper wire JP01 in the sub
remote control switch as shown in the right figure.

(2) Wiring Method

(a) Perform wiring between units as shown in the following figure:
(Three Unit Case)
Wiring Method
Connecting Cable between Units (3-Core or 2-Wire)

No. 0 Unit No. 0 Unit No. 0 Unit

CN12 (Yellow) CN12 (Yellow) CN12 (Yellow)
CN13 (Blue) CN13 (Blue) CN13 (Blue)

Remote Remote
Control Control
Switch Switch

Main Switch Sub-Switch

Connect the main remote control switch to CN13 (or CN12)

and the sub-remote control switch to CN12 (or CN13)

(b) Decide the number of units. The method should be the same as in “Simultaneous Indoor Unit
Operation with One Remote Control Switch”.

(3) Checking the Main and Sub Remote Control Switches

Press the “CHECK” switch and the “RESET” switch simultaneously for more than 3 seconds, the
main remote control switch is changed to the field setting mode, and the sub remote control switch is
changed to the check mode.

ATTENTION:
1. When a main remote control switch malfunctions, unit operation stops. The units cannot be operated
with only a sub-remote control switch.
2. When a main switch and a sub-switch are simultaneously operated, the units will operate according to
either one of the modes after 30 seconds.

4-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)

<PC-P1H>
(1) By installing an additional remote control switch, a maximum of 16 units can be controlled from two
different locations.

Main and Sub Control Switch

Determine one of the two remote control switches to be the main switch and the other as a sub
switch. Set the sub remote control switch by referring to the “4.4.4 (31) Optional Function Setting”.
Then turn off and on the power source.

(2) Wiring Method

(a) Perform wiring between units as shown in the following figure:
(Three Unit Case)
* Simultaneous Indoor Units Operation in Same Refrigerant Piping System

Control Cable
(H-LINK)

Main No. 1 No. 2 No. 14 No. 15

Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit

Main Switch
Connector Cable
(Remote
Control Switch) Between Units
Sub Switch
(Remote
Control Switch)

(b) Decide the number of units. The method should be the same as in “Simultaneous Indoor Unit
Operation with One Remote Control Switch”.
* Simultaneous Indoor Units Operation in Plural Refrigerant Piping Systems

Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit

Refrigerant Refrigerant Refrigerant Control Cable
System 1 System 2 System 3 (H-LINK)

Main No. 1 Main No. 1 Main No. 1

Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit

Main Switch
(Remote Connector Cable
Control Switch) Between Units

ATTENTION:
1. When a main remote control switch malfunctions, unit operation stops. The units cannot be operated
with only a sub-remote control switch.
2. When a main switch and a sub-switch are simultaneously operated, the units will operate according to
either one of the modes after 30 seconds.

4-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)
4.4.4 Optional Function Setting
The remote control switch is changed to the optional setting mode by the following procedures.

(1) Field Setting Mode

Check to ensure that the unit is stopped, press
the “CHECK” switch and the “RESET” switch
on the remote control switch simultaneously
more than 3 seconds, and the remote control
switch is changed to the field setting mode.
When the remote control switch is at the field
setting mode, the “SERVICE” is indicated and
the “01” is flickers below the “SERVICE” indication.
(2) Optional Setting Mode

>
At the field setting mode as described in the above item (1), press the “TEMP ” switch or the
>

“TEMP ” switch and the number flickering below the “SERVICE” indication is changed (01 <=> 02).
Set the flickering number at “01”, leave this condition for 7 seconds or press the “CHECK” switch, and
the remote control switch is changed to the optional setting mode.
(3) Selection of Indoor Unit
(a) At the optional setting mode, the indication on
the remote control switch is changed as shown
in the right figure.
1 The indication of “01” is turned ON.
2 The address of the indoor unit which
the optional function is to be set, is
indicated at the segments for time
setting time indication, and the
“ADDS” is indicated below.
3 The refrigerant cycle number of the indoor unit for which the optional function is to be set, is
indicated at the segments for timer setting time indication, and the “RN” is indicated below.
4 The indication of the setting temperature is turned OFF.
>

>
(b) At the condition of the above item (a), press the “TEMP ” switch or the “TEMP ” switch of the
remote control switch and the indoor unit for which the optional function is to be set, can be
changed.
NOTES:
1. The indoor unit can be selected among the indoor units connected to the remote control switch.
2. In case that both the indications of the address and the refrigerant cycle number is “AA”, the
settings of all the indoor units is same.
(c) After selecting the indoor unit, leave the condition for 7 seconds or press the “CHECK” switch, the
remote control switch is changed to the optional setting mode.
(4) Changing of Optional Functions and Setting Conditions
(a) At the optional setting mode, the indication on
the remote control switch is changed as shown
in the right figure.
1 The indications of “ADDS” and “RN”
are turned OFF.
2 The item number of the optional
function is indicated at the segment
for the setting temperature indication.
Refer to the table in the next pages for the item numbers and the contents of the optional
functions.

4-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)
3 The setting condition of the optional function item is indicated at the segments for timer setting
time indication. Refer to the table in the next pages and description of each items for the
indication of the setting condition and the contents of the optional function.
(b) Press the “TIME ” switch or the “TIME ” switch, the optional function item is changed as
shown below.

When pressing the “TIME ” switch

b1 b2 b3 b4 ~ E4 E5 F1
When pressing the “TIME ” switch

(c) Press the “CHECK” switch, and the setting condition of the optional function is changed as shown
below.
When pressing the “CHECK” switch
00 01 ~

(5) Selection of Other Indoor Unit

>
>
At the optional setting mode, press the “TEMP ” switch or the “TEMP ” switch, the condition of
the remote control switch is changed so that the indoor unit can be selected to set the optional
function described in the item (3).
(6) Return from Optional Function Setting Mode
Press the “RESET” switch, the optional function setting is memorized and the mode is returned to the
normal condition.

G Setting Items of Optional Functions

No. Items Optional Functions Individual Setting Contents

Setting Condition
Removal of Heating 00 Not Available
1 b1 Temperature Compensation
01 Available
due to Uneven Heat Load
Circulator Function at 00 Not Available
2 b2
Heating Thermo-OFF 01 Available
Enforced 3 Minutes 00 Not Available
3 b3 Minimum Operation Time of
01 Available
Compressor
00 Standard
01 100 hours
4 b4 Change of Filter Cleaning 02 1,200 hours
Time
03 2,500 hours
04 No Indication
00 Not Available
5 b5 Fixing of Operation Mode 
01 Available
00 Not Available
6 b6 Fixing of Setting Temperature 
01 Available
Fixing of Operation as 00 Not Available
7 b7 
Exclusive Cooling Unit 01 Available
00 Not Available
8 b8 Automatic COOL/HEAT 
01 Available
00 Not Available
9 b9 Fixing of Air Volume 
01 Available
10 C1 Not Prepared −
11 C2 Not Prepared −
12 C3 Not Prepared −
00 Not Available
13 C4 Drain Pump in Heating
01 Available
00 Not Available
14 C5 Hi Speed 01 Hi Speed 1 (*1)
02 Hi Speed 2 (*1)

4-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)
Hi Speed at Heating 00 Not Available
15 C6
Thermo-OFF 01 Available
Canceling of
Enforced 3 Minutes 00 Not Available
16 C7
Minimum Operation Time 01 Available
of Compressor
00 Control by Indoor Suction Thermistor
01 Control by Thermistor of Remote Control Switch
17 C8 Thermistor of
Remote Control Switch 02 Control by Average Value of Indoor Suction
Thermistor and Thermistor of Remote Control
Switch
18 C9 Not Prepared −
19 CA Not Prepared −
Selection of 00 Forced Stoppage Input A Contact
20 Cb 
Forced Stoppage Logic 01 Forced Stoppage Input B Contact
21 CC Not Prepared −
00 Not Available
22 d1 Power Supply ON/OFF 1
01 Available
23 d2 Not Prepared −
00 Not Available
24 d3 Power Supply ON/OFF 2
01 Available
00 Automatic Ventilation
25 E1 Ventilation Mode 01 Ventilation by Total Heat Exchanger
02 Bypass Ventilation (No Total Heat Exchanging)
00 Not Available
26 E2 Increasing Supply Air Volume
01 Available
27 E3 Not Prepared −
00 Standard
28 E4 Precooling/Preheating Period 01 30 minutes
02 60 minutes
29 E5 Not Prepared −
00 No Function
01 OFF Timer by 1 hour
Automatic Setting for 02 OFF Timer by 2 hours
30 F1 
OFF Timer M
23 OFF Timer by 23 hours
24 OFF Timer by 24 hours
Remote Control 00 Main
31 F2 
Main-Sub Setting 01 Sub

NOTES:
1. (*1): This function is applicable for RCI and RCD models. In case of RPI-0.8 to 5.0FSG1 series,
“Hi Speed 1” is “High External Pressure Setting” and “Hi Speed 2” is “Low External Pressure Setting”.
2. As for the optional functions with “ X ” at the individual setting, only when the “All Rooms” is selected to set
the optional function, the setting condition can be changed.
3. The items “C1” and “C3” are not available. Do not change the setting condition “00”.
4. For the models RPF(I)-FSG(E), RPI-8, 10HP, RPC-FSG1 (Before Alternation) and RPK-FSGM (Before
Alternation), only the function setting of No.1 to No.9, No.17 and No.30 are available.
(No.17 is settable “01” only.)

4-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)
4.4.5 Optional Functions of Remote Control Switch
(1) Removal of Heating Temperature Calibration
This function is utilized when the temperature settings of the remote control switch and the suction air
temperature of the indoor unit are required to be equal.
In standard heating operation, the suction air temperature is higher than the room temperature,
therefore the suction air temperature is calibrated -4°C.
(Indicated Setting Temperature = Inlet Air Temperature -4°C Return to 0°C)
This is useful when the thermistor at the suction side of an indoor unit is removed and installed in
another place.
The indicated setting temperature and the suction air temperature after removal of heating
temperature calibration are as shown below.

18 20 22 24
Indicated Temperature
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
When Cooling - - 22 20 24 22 26 24
Activating
Standard 22 24 24 26 26 28 28 30
Temperature When For
(oC) Heating Comp. After 18 20 20 22 22 24 24 26
Removal

26 28 30
Indicated Temperature
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
When Cooling 28 26 30 28 32 30
Activating
Standard 30 32 30 32 30 32
Temperature When For
(oC) Heating Comp. After 26 28 28 30 30 32
Removal

(2) Circulator Function at Heating Thermo-OFF

In case that the fan speed is changed to “LOW” tap at heating Thermo-OFF, there is a case that the
room air is stratified because warm air stagnates near the ceiling. In this case, it is recommended
that the circulator function explained below be utilized.
<Circulator Function>
The function keeps the fan speed at thermo-OFF at the same level as thermo-ON. In this case, air
movement in the room will be kept on the same level as thermo-ON, ensuring a homogenous air
distribution. In the case that an Auto Louver is equipped, this operation will be also held on when the
heating is turned thermo-OFF.
NOTE:
Perceptions of coolness, heat and air flow are subject to personal tastes and behaviors. It is therefore
recommended to discuss this with customers thoroughly and then to set the unit accordingly.
(3) Enforced 3 Minutes Minimum Operation Time of Compressor
When a compressor frequently starts and stops in short intervals, this function should be used to
guard the compressor. By setting this function, the mode of a minimum 3 minutes operation will be
added. (The mode of a minimum 3 minutes stoppage is standard.)
In case of SET-FREE, this function is standard even when setting is not available.
NOTE:
When the safety device is activated or the “ON/OFF” switch is pressed, the compressor is stopped
immediately.

4-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)
(4) Change of Filter Cleaning Time
The period for filter sign indication is set for each indoor unit model when shipping.
The filter sign is indicated according to the filter cleaning time (Factory-Setting).
However, this filter cleaning time can be changed depending on the condition of the filter as shown in
the table below.
Period for Filter Sign Indication
Approx. Approx. Approx. No Indication
100 hrs. 1,200 hrs. 2,500 hrs.
In case of
4-Way Cassette Type
02 b4
Liquid Crystal Display on 01 b4 03 b4 04 b4
or
Remote Control Switch
00 b4 *

: Factory-Setting
: Changed Setting Period
* : In the case of RPK model, the factory setting is 200 hrs.

(5) Fixing of Operation Mode

This function is utilized when changes in operation modes are not required.
When this function is valid, the operation mode which has been set cannot be changed.
(6) Fixing of Setting Temperature
This function is utilized when changes in setting temperature are not required.
When this function is valid, the setting temperature which has been set cannot be changed.
(7) Fixing of Operation as Exclusive Cooling Unit
This function is utilized when exclusive cooling operation is required.
This function invalidates the heating operation and the automatic COOL/HEAT operation, as the
operation of exclusive cooling unit.
(8) Automatic COOL/HEAT Operation
This function is utilized to operate the unit with changing cooling and heating operation automatically
(same operation mode for indoor units in same refrigerant cycle).
This function is invalid when the outdoor unit is cooling only model or the function of “Fixing
Operation as Exclusive Cooling Unit” is valid.
* As for FXG/FX3 series, cooling and heating operation mode can be changed individually
for each indoor unit in same refrigerant cycle.
(9) Fixing of Fan Speed
This function is utilized to fix the fan speed. When this function is valid, the fan speed is not changed
by the remote control switch.
(10) Not Prepared
(11) Not Prepared
(12) Not Prepared
(13) Drain Pump in Heating (When the humidifier is installed)
This function is utilized to operate the drain pump in heating operation. However, in case of SET-
FREE, the indoor units do not have humidifier.
Do not change the setting condition “00” of the item “C4”.
(14) Hi Speed
This function is utilized to increase the fan speed due to the high ceiling.
(15) Hi Speed at Heating Thermo-OFF
This function is utilized to increase the fan speed when thermo-OFF in heating operation with the
function (14). (The fan speed is not increased when thermo-OFF in heating operation at the function
(14) setting.)
(16) Canceling of Enforced 3 Minutes Minimum Operation Time of Compressor
In case of SET-FREE, “Enforced 3 Minutes Minimum Operation Time of Compressor” described in
the item (3) is the standard function.
This function is utilized to cancel the “Enforced 3 Minutes Minimum Operation Time of Compressor”
function.

4-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)
(17) Remote Control Thermistor
This function is utilized to control the unit by the built-in thermistor of the remote control switch
(remote control thermistor) instead of the thermistor for suction air.
Set this function at “01” or “02” when utilizing this function.
However, even when this function is set at “01” or “02”, the detecting temperature is abnormal due to
the failure of the remote control thermistor, etc., the thermistor to be used is changed to the
thermistor for suction air of the indoor unit automatically.
(18) Not Prepared
(19) Not Prepared
(20) Selection of Forced Stoppage Logic
This function is utilized to select the logic of the contact for forced stoppage signal input.
The setting condition and the logic of the contact are as shown below.

(21) Not Prepared

(22) Power Supply ON/OFF 1 (Automatic Operation When Power Supply ON for the models of RPI-0.8 to
5.0FSG1, RCI-FSG2, RCD-FSG1 and RPC-FSG1 (After Alteration). In case of other models, refer to
the item 4.1.2.)
This function is utilized to start and stop the unit according to the power supply ON/OFF.
When this function is utilized in the condition that there is no person to operate the unit, make the
system with monitoring for disaster prevention.
NOTE:
The unit is started and stopped according to the power supply ON/OFF due to the power failure.
When the power failure is occurred during stoppage by the remote control switch operation, the unit is
started again automatically after the power supply is recovered.

(23) Not Prepared

(24) Power Supply ON/OFF 2 (Restarting Function After Power Failure for the models of RPI-0.8 to
5.0FSG1, RCI-FSG2, RCD-FSG1 and RPC-FSG1 (After Alteration). In case of other models, refer to
the item 4.1.3.)
This function is utilized to start the unit operation again automatically when the power supply is
recovered after the power failure over 2 seconds.
The standard unit is started operation again automatically with all the same operating conditions such
as operation mode, etc. in case of the power failure within 2 seconds.
(The compressor is started operation again after three minutes guard in addition to 2 seconds power
failure as a maximum.)
NOTE:
In case of the power failure during the unit stoppage, the unit is stopped after recovering the power supply.

(25) Ventilation Mode (Total Heat Exchange Model)

This function is utilized to set the ventilation mode of the total heat exchanger.
The setting condition and the ventilation mode are as shown below.
Setting Condition Ventilation Mode Contents
Selecting effective ventilation mode (Total Heat
Exchanging Ventilation or Bypass Ventilation)
00 Automatic Ventilation for energy saving by detecting the temperature
difference between the outdoor temperature and
the room temperature.

01 Total Heat Exchanging The heat exchanging is performed continuously

Ventilation when the total heat exchanger is operated.
02 Bypass Ventilation The heat exchanging is not performed continuously
when the total heat exchanger is operated.

4-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)
(26) Increasing Supply Air Volume (Total Heat Exchange Model)
This function is utilized to increase the supply air volume with the one-step high tap of the fan motor
for supply air during operation of the total heat exchanger, make the room pressure higher than the
surrounded room with the increased supply air volume and prevent the polluted air and smell from
entering into the room.
The setting air flow mode by remote control switch and the actual air flow of the total heat exchanger
when setting this function are as shown below.

Setting Air Flow Mode by Remote Control Switch Air Flow of Total Heat Exchanger
LOW MED
MED HIGH
HIGH HIGH
NOTE:
In case that the setting air flow mode by the remote control switch is “HIGH”, the air flow of the total heat
exchanger is “HIGH” even when this function is set.

(27) With Humidifier (Only Indication) (Total Heat Exchange Model)

This function is utilized to control the total heat exchanger with the humidifier. However, in case of
the total heat exchanger of SET-FREE, the humidifier is not attached. Do not set this function.
When this function is not set, the control of the humidifier is not performed.
(28) Precooling/Preheating Period (Total Heat Exchange Model)
This function is utilized to delay the start-up of the total heat exchanger operation.
The setting condition and the delaying period of operation start-up are as shown below.

Setting Condition Delaying Period of Operation Start-Up

00 0 minutes
01 30 minutes
02 60 minutes

(29) Not Prepared

(30) Automatic OFF Timer Setting
This function is utilized to set the OFF timer function automatically when the unit is started by the
remote control switch. During operation with the automatic OFF timer setting function, the
cancellation of the OFF timer and the changing of the setting period for OFF timer can not be
performed. However, the OFF timer function is canceled when the unit is stopped.
When the unit is operated again after stoppage, the setting period for OFF timer is the period set by
the optional setting.
The setting condition and the setting period for OFF timer are as shown below.

Setting Condition Setting Period for OFF Timer

00 Function Invalid
01 1 hour
02 2 hours
03 3 hours
~ ~
22 22 hours
23 23 hours
24 24 hours
NOTE:
This function is canceled when connecting with the CS-NET, and 7-day Timer, controlled by Remote
Control.

(31) Remote Control Main-Sub Setting

This function is utilized when two remote control switches are installted in one system.
Set one remote control switch to “Main”, another remote control switch to “Sub”.

4-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.4 Remote Control Switch)
4.4.6 Indication of Address (ADDS) and Refrigerant Cycle Number (RN)
The address and the refrigerant cycle number can be indicated on the liquid crystal display of the remote
control switch.
(1) Model Indication Mode

>
>
During operation or stoppage in normal condition, press the “TEMP ” switch and “TEMP ” switch
simultaneously for more than 3 seconds.
The remote control switch is changed to the model indication mode.
(2) Indication of Unit Model
(a) At the model indication mode, the following items of information about the indoor unit connected to
the remote control switch are indicated for 3 seconds serially.
1 Address and Refrigerant Cycle Number
2 Model Code of Outdoor Unit

In case of group setting for the plural indoor units by the remote control switch, the above
items 1 ~ 2 are indicated for each indoor unit.

Indoor Unit 1 Indoor Unit 2

(3 seconds) (3 seconds) (3 seconds) (3 seconds) (3 seconds) (3 seconds)

Address and Address and
Refrigerant Model Code of Serial Refrigerant Model Code of Serial
Outdoor Unit Number Outdoor Unit Number
Cycle Number Cycle Number

The indication of the above items 1 ~ 2 for all the indoor units connected the remote control
switch is completed, the remote control switch is returned to the normal condition.
(b) Indication of Address and Refrigerant Cycle Number
The indication of the address and
the refrigerant cycle number of the indoor unit
is shown in the right figure.
1 The address of the indoor unit is indicated
at the segments for timer setting time
indication and the “ADDS” is indicated
below the address indication.
2 The refrigerant cycle number of the indoor unit is indicated at the segments for timer setting
time indication and the “RN” is indicated below the refrigerant cycle indication.
3 The indication of the setting temperature is turned OFF.

(c) Indication of Model Code

The indication of the model code is shown in
the right figure.
1 The model code of the outdoor unit
connected to the indoor unit indicated in
the above item 1 is indicated at
the segments for timer setting time
indication.
* Model Code of SET-FREE: “F”
2 The number of the indoor units in the same refrigerant cycle of the indoor unit indicated in the

above item 1 at the segments for timer setting time indication.

3 The indication of the setting temperature is turned OFF.
4 Serial No. Indication
The serial No. is indicated in the liquid crystal HIGH
display when mode is indoor unit serial No. COOL
indication mode as shown in the figure.
Though an actual serial No. is eight digits, A/C
the last six digits are indicated in the liquid
crystal display.
6th digit of Serial Number
5th digit of Serial Number
4th digit of Serial Number
3rd digit of Serial Number
2nd digit of Serial Number
1st digit of Serial Number

4-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.5 Wireless Remote Control Switch)
4.5 Wireless Remote Control Switch, PC-LH3
4.5.1 Name of Part

Wireless Remote Control Switch (PC-LH3: Option)

4-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.5 Wireless Remote Control Switch)
4.5.2 Identifying of Indoor Units Installed Side By Side
NOTE:
This function is not available in case of simultaneous operation mode.
When installing two (2) indoor units side by side, the commands from the wireless remote control
switch can be received by both the indoor units.

a. When installing two (2) indoor units

(A and B) side by side, set one unit
identified by the following method.

Turn OFF the power source before performing the following procedures.

b. Open the cover of the receiver part of the

indoor unit to be identified (B unit) and set
the dip switch No.8 on the ON position
(set at OFF position at factory).
c. Identify the wireless remote control switch
for the identified indoor unit.
1 Press the “ ” switch and the “ ”
switch simultaneously more than
3 seconds.
When “b” is indicated on the liquid
crystal display of the wireless remote
control switch, the unit is identified.
2 Press the “ ” switch and the “ ”
switch simultaneously more than
3 seconds again.
When “A” is indicated on the liquid
crystal display of the wireless remote
control switch, the identification of the
unit is canceled.
d. Set the rotary switch (RSW) on the indoor F 01
CD E

23

PCB of the indoor unit B as shown in the

456
AB

right figure. 7 9
8

e. When the above procedures b, c and d are performed, only the identified indoor unit corresponds
to the commands from the identified wireless remote control switch.
f. When canceling the identification of the unit, set the dip switches of the receiver part and the
setting of the rotary switch (RSW) on the indoor PCB at the former position and cancel the
identification of the unit.

4-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.5 Wireless Remote Control Switch)
4.5.3 Simultaneous Operation
Up to 16 indoor units can be simultaneously
Indoor Unit
controlled using one wireless remote control
switch.
In this case, only two (2) air panels for wireless
control can be connected. Controller

Apply the simultaneous operation only in the

case that the plural indoor units are installed in Control Cable between
the same room as shown in the right figure. Indoor Units (Option)
* Do not apply the simultaneous operation for
the indoor units installed separately in
different rooms. Control Example of Simultaneous Operation of
Multiple Indoor Units
Some units may be left without turning OFF
the power source.

Turn OFF all the power sources before wiring and setting the dip switches.

(1) Installation of Air Panel for Wireless Control

In case of simultaneous operation of plural (up to 16) units by the wireless remote control switch,
apply the air panel for wireless control only to the unit to be operated, and apply the standard panels
(for wired control) to other units. In case of applying plural air panels for wireless control, up to 2 air
panels for wireless control can be used.
Wireless Standard Standard
Panel Panel Panel

Standard Panel
or
Wireless Panel

Wireless
Controller Should be Standard Panel

In case of applying two (2) air panels for wireless control, the setting of main and sub receiver part is
required. Refer to the item 4.5.5 “Optional Function Setting” of the table for the dip switch setting
procedures.
(2) Perform wiring between indoor units by referring to the receiver kit installation manual.

4-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.5 Wireless Remote Control Switch)
(3) Connected unit control wires should not be installed parallel to 200-400V power cables. Fix them by
utilizing bands. It is recommended that cables be installed at least 30cm away from power cables or
be put into grounded metal pipes.
(4) Set the rotary switches (RSW) on the printed circuit boards of respective units as shown in the table
below.

Setting Position
F 01

CD E

23
Set by inserting slotted screwdriver

456
AB 7 9
8 into the groove

No. 0 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No.5 No. 6 No. 7

Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit

Rotary F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01
CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E
23

23

23

23

23

23

23

23
Switch
456

456

456

456

456

456

456

456
AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB
7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9
Setting 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

No. 8 No. 9 No. 10 No. 11 No. 12 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15

Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit

Rotary F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01 F 01
CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E

CD E
23

23

23

23

23

23

23

23
Switch
456

456

456

456

456

456

456

456
AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB
Setting
7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

ATTENTION:
If the setting of the rotary switches (RSW) is not performed correctly, the operation LED (Red) on the panel
flickers and the unit can not be operated due to the abnormal setting of the indoor unit number.

Receiver Part
(5) Identify the indoor units by attaching the
nameplates of unit number (field-supplied)
to the indoor units when setting the rotary
switches (RSW) for each indoor unit.

Receiver Part
Unit Number Nameplates

(6) Attach the nameplate of unit number for

outdoor unit (field-supplied) corresponding
to the unit number of the indoor unit.

Unit Number Nameplates

4-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.5 Wireless Remote Control Switch)
4.5.4 Emergency Operation
In case that the unit is required to be operated when the wireless remote control switch is out of battery
and can not function, etc., the unit can be operated by the emergency operation switch.
The cooling operation and the heating operation are available for the emergency operation.

Turn OFF the power source of the unit before performing the emergency operation.

a. Open the cover of the receiver part or the

grille of panel.

b. Set the switch 1 to the “COOL” or

“HEAT” position.

c. Set the switch 2 (emergency operation

switch) to the “EMERGENCY” position.

d. Close the cover of the receiver part and

turn ON the power source of the unit.

e. The unit is operated.

<Operating Condition>
Operation Cooling Heating
Setting Temperature 21oC 30oC
Air Flow Mode HIGH HIGH

* When operating the unit by the wireless remote control switch again, set the switch 2 (emergency
operation switch) to the “NORMAL” position.

NOTE:
For stopping the unit operated by the wireless remote control switch, the unit can be stopped by setting the
switch 2 (emergency operation switch) to the “STOP” position instead of turning OFF the power source of
the unit.

[In Case of PC-RLH8, 9, 10, 11]

In case that PC-LH3 is unusable by batteries shortage, etc., perform emergency operation as follows.
1 Switch “COOL”: Press “COOL” so that the cooling operation is started.

Press “COOL” again so that the cooling operation is stopped.

2 Switch “HEAT”: Press “HEAT” so that the heating operation is started.
Press “HEAT” again so that the heating operation is stopped.

NOTE:
During the emergency operation, the LED (yellow)
blinks (0.5 second ON / 0.5 second OFF).

4-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.5 Wireless Remote Control Switch)
4.5.5 Optional Function Setting (In Case of PC-RLH4, PC-RLH5 and PC-RLH7)

Turn OFF all the power sources before setting the dip switches.

The following optional functions can be set by the

dip switches of the receiver part.
1 Change of Filter Cleaning Time
2 Removal of Heating Temperature Calibration
3 Circulator Function at Heating Thermo-OFF
4 Identifying of Indoor Units Installed Side By Side
5 Setting of Main and Sub Receiver Part
6 Muffling Buzzer Sound

a. Open the cover of the receiver part or the

grille of panel.

* Refer to the receiver kit installed in the indoor

unit for the actual shape and the layout of the
switches.

b. Set the dip switches 1 as shown in the

table below.
After dip switch setting, close the cover of
the receiver part or the grille of panel.

Dip Switch
Optional Function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Standard    − − − − −
100 hours   − − − − −
Filter Option 1,200 hours   − − − − −
2,500 hours  − − − − −
No Indication − − − − −
Muffling Buzzer Sound − − − − − − −
Removal of Heating Temperature Calibration − − − − − − −
Circulator Function at Heating Thermo-OFF − − − − − − −
Setting of Sub Receiver Part − − − − − − −
Identifying of Indoor Units − − − − − − −
: ON, : OFF, −: ON or OFF (both available)

4-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.5 Wireless Remote Control Switch)
4.5.6 Optional Functions of Wireless Remote Control Switch
(1) Change of Filter Cleaning Time
The filter sign (LED; Yellow) of the receiver part is set to turn ON after the total operation period is
over 1,200 hours approximately (Factory-Setting). (In case of the RPK model, the factory-setting is
200 hrs.)
However, this filter cleaning time can be changed depending on the condition of the filter as shown in
the page .
(2) Removal of Heating Temperature Calibration
Refer to 4.4.5 (1) for the details.
(3) Circulator Function at Heating Thermo-OFF
Refer to 4.4.5 (2) for the details.
(4) Identifying of Indoor Units Installed Side By Side
Refer to the item 4.5.2 “Identifying of Indoor Units Installed Side By Side”.
(5) Setting of Main and Sub Control Switch
Refer to the item 4.5.3 “Simultaneous Operation”.

[In Case of PC-RLH8, 9, 10, 11]

The following optional functions can be set by the dip switches of the receiver kit.
1 Identifying of Indoor Units Installed Side by Side

2 Setting of Main and Sub Receiver Kit

Dip Switch Setting 3 (SW3)

Optional Function
1 2 3 4
Setting of Sub Receiver Kit   
Identifying of Indoor Units   

: ON, : OFF

4-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.6 7-Day Timer)
4.6 7-Day Timer, PSC-5T

<Name of Parts>

Liquid Crystal Display Section The figure below shows all the indications for reference.
The actual display during operation is different.

Indication of Indication of
Mode Selection Pattern Setting

Indication of Indication of Indication of ON/OFF Setting Time

Holiday Setting Present Time * Setting 1, Setting 2 and
Setting 3 <From Above>

Indication of
Present Day

Indication of
Running Day
of A Week

Run Indicator
(Red Lamp)

Setting Switch of
Change Switch of ON/OFF Time
Operation Mode

Setting Switch of OK Switch

Holiday

Change Switch of Cancel Switch of

Setting Pattern Setting Time

Setting Switch of
Present Time

Setting Switch of Change Switch of

Setting Switch of Change Switch of
Running Day ON/OFF Setting
Day of A Week Setting

Operation Switch Section The above figure shows the control timer with the cover opened.

The present time and the ON/OFF setting time are indicated
by 12 hour units (AM0:00 – 12:00, PM0:00 – 12:00).

When opening the cover,

pull the cover foward the
arrow direction.

4-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OPTIONAL FUNCTION
(4.7 Central Station)
4.7 Central Station, PSC-5S
This central station is of the soft touch type. (Operation except with finger is not recommended.) Activation
can be checked by referring to the liquid crystal display and LEDs.

<Name of Parts>

The figure below shows all the indications for reference.

Liquid Crystal Display Section
The actual display during operation is different.

Indication of
Indication of Indication of Indication of Setting
Group Number Timer Demand Control Temperature

Indication of Emergency Stop Indication of

Indication of
Indication of Louver Angle Alarm Code
Indication of “NO FUNCTION”
Fan Speed Indication of
Indication of Each Group Operation “Remote Control
Switch
Indication of Not Available”
Operation Mode
“AUTO” is “ALARM”
indicated only Indicator
when the
TIMER DEMAND
SET TEMP. “FILTER”
optional function FAN HIGH
GROUP

“Auto EMERGENCY Indicator

COOL
COOL/HEAT” HEAT MED
NO FUNCTION

is set. DRY LOUVER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RMT. SW NAVAL CHECK

AUTO LOW 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Group Selection
ABNML FILTER
Switch
Run Indicator
(Red Lamp) RUN/STOP GROUP

“FILTER”
RUN/STOP Switch Indication Reset
Switch
MODE FAN SPEED RESET
Fan Speed
Selection Switch Check Switch
Do not touch.
TIMER RMT. SW NAVAL LOUVER CHECK This switch is only
Operation Mode for service use.
TEMP
Selection Switch

Timer Selection
Switch

“Remote Control
Switch Not
Available” Switch
Auto Louver Switch Temperature This switch is not used.
Setting Switch

The above figure shows the central

Operation Switch Section
station with the cover opened.

When opening the cover,

pull the cover foward the
arrow direction.

NOTE:
In the case that the unit is operated under the following conditions, “REMOTE” is indicated on the LCD and
control by the remote control switch is not available.
(1) NAVL is selected by the control station.
(2) Two minutes after resetting of the Central Station even if AVL is selected.

4-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5. FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5.1 Burnt-out Compressor due to Insufficient Refrigerant Charge

Question and Answer for Field Work

Example 1: Burnt-out Compressor due to Insufficient

Refrigerant Charge

[Phenomenon]
After commissioning, alarm code “08” sometimes occurred and compressors were burnt out after
2 month operation.

[Cause]
Refrigerant piping work was performed during summer season. Additional refrigerant was not
sufficiently charged from the discharge side.
This insufficient refrigerant charge resulted in discharge gas overheating and oil deterioration finally
due to separated operation despite “08” alarm.

[Countermeasure]
1. The compressor was replaced with a new one.
2. Correct refrigerant amount was charged according to refrigerant piping length and connected indoor
units.

[Remarks]
Additional Refrigerant Charging:
Open the liquid stop valve slightly when the additional refrigerant is charged from the check joint of
the liquid stop valve (discharge side) during the cooling operation. If the liquid valve is fully open, it is
difficult to charge the additional refrigerant. Do not charge refrigerant from the gas stop valve.

5-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5.2 Insufficient Cooling Performance When A Long Piping Is Applied

Question and Answer for Field Work

Example 2: Insufficient Cooling Performance When A Long Piping

Is Applied

[Phenomenon]
Sufficient cooling was not available for an indoor unit which located at the farthest position.

[Cause]
In the case that an outdoor unit is located 20 meters lower than indoor units, resetting of the dip
switch, DSW3 is required.
However, no setting was performed. Therefore, the target discharge pressure was not increased,
resulting in insufficient cooling performance for the indoor.

I.U.

Insufficient
Cooling

O.U.
DSW3

[Countermeasure]
Setting for DSW3 was changed.

[Remarks]
Pay a special attention to the liquid pipe size if the lift between the indoor units and outdoor unit is
higher than 20 meters. For details, see the “Piping Work” in TCII.

5-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5.3 Abnormally High Operating Sound [In-the-Ceiling Type Indoor Unit]

Question and Answer for Field Work

Example 3: Abnormally High Operating Sound

[In-the-Ceiling Type Indoor Unit]

[Phenomenon]
Operating sound during “Hi” speed was abnormally high.

[Cause]
The indoor units was installed without ducts of inlet side and outlet side. Due to almost no external
static pressure, abnormally big air volume was supplied, resulting in higher air speed through the
heat exchanger.

Damper
Indoor Unit

Air Filter

[Countermeasure]
In order to reduce air flow, a plate as a damper at the discharge side was added.
Another solution is at inlet side and outlet side.

[Remarks]
Please note that running current is increased when no external pressure is given to the indoor unit,
resulting in overheating.

5-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5.4 Alarm Code “31”

Question and Answer for Field Work

Example 4: Alarm Code “31”

[Phenomenon]
Alarm code “31” sometimes occurred and the system was stopped.

[Cause]
Combination of the indoor and outdoor unit was as follows.

ON

ON OFF ON ON ON

I.U. I.U. I.U. I.U.

O.U.

This system was used in a tenant building.

One of tenant’s customers cut out the power switch for the indoor unit while other indoor units are
running, resulting in different total indoor unit capacity setting in the same refrigerant cycle.

[Countermeasure]
All the main power switches for the indoor units were always ON.

5-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5.5 Not Cooling Well due to Insufficient Installation Space for Outdoor Unit

Question and Answer for Field Work

Example 5: Not Cooling Well due to Insufficient Installation Space

for Outdoor Unit

[Phenomenon]
Cooling operation was well performed through the intermediate season. However, the cooling
operation was not well available when the outdoor temperature was higher than 35°C.

[Cause]
As the outdoor units were installed without a sufficient installation space, the hot discharge air from
other outdoor units was circulated.
In this case, though the outdoor temperature was 35°C, the actual suction air temperature was nearly
50°C and Protection System from Excessively High Suction Pressure was activated, the frequency of
the compressor was decreased and the cooling capacity was also decreased accordingly.
As the outdoor units in-line were installed back to back with a distance of 600mm between each
outdoor unit’s back, the hot discharged air from other outdoor units was circulated.

[Countermeasure]
To protect the unit from a short circuit, fences were mounted at the discharge air side as shown
below.

Min.
300mm
Fence

Min.
300mm

5-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5.6 Attention for SET-FREE FXG/FX3 Series

The SET-FREE FXG/FX3 series has been designed for the system to provide simultaneous cooling and
heating operations during intermediate seasons and the refrigerant cycle is controlled according to heat
balance of cooling and heating. Therefore, pay attention to the followings for the selection of installing sites
and the installation work.
As especially, this SET-FREE FXG series is operated by mixed refrigerant R407C (FXG), special attention is
required. Follow the items below.

* The SET-FREE FXG/FX3 series is for general office building air conditioning. Therefore, it is
recommended that different air conditioning systems be selected in a place where systems are utilized for
(i) machine rooms or computer rooms, providing big heat load and (ii) thermostatic chamber, requiring
precise temperature control.
* By operating this unit with other cooling/heating equipment at the same time, thermo-ON/OFF may occur
frequently or the heat load change may be big, and it may cause the decrease of the unit performance or
shorten the lifetime of the unit. Do not install the unit in a place where operation with other cooling/heating
equipment is required.

<Attention for System Design of FXG/FX3 Series>

(1) Installing Site:
Do not install the unit in such places;
(a) where temperature difference among rooms is excessively big and the heat load when cooling and
heating is excessively big during simultaneous COOL/HEAT operation.
(b) where the heat load change of a room is big and thermo-ON/OFF may occur frequently especially
during simultaneous COOL/HEAT operation.
(c) where temporary capacity decrease according to ON/OFF operation of other rooms is not allowed.
(d) where starting up in simultaneous COOL/HEAT operation mode is always required.
(2) Piping Work:
Do not perform the piping work as follows;
(a) The piping length between the farthest indoor unit and the last multi-kit is excessively long.
(b) The CH units are used individually for each indoor unit in a same room.
(c) There is a height difference between CH units.
Refer to the followings for the attention in detail. (Observe the attentions common to FSG/FS3 series.)

<Attention for Simultaneous COOL/HEAT Operation>

(1) Capacity of Simultaneous COOL/HEAT Operation:
[Phenomenon]
During the simultaneous cooling and heating operation, the capacity comparatively decreases when
compared with the capacity whilst operating all the indoor units at the same mode.
The capacity decrease mentioned above should be taken into consideration when in actual operation,
especially for the small capacity units (0.8 to 1.5HP).

<Cooling> All Indoor Units in <Heating> All Indoor Units in

Cooling Operation / Heating Operation /
Mainly Cooling Operation Mainly Heating Operation

100 100
Heating Capacity (%)
Cooling Capacity (%)

80 80

50 Mainly Heating 50 Mainly Heating

Operation Operation

0 0
0 (5) 21 0 (5) 21
Outdoor Air Temperature (˚C DB) Outdoor Air Temperature (˚C DB)

5-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

[Countermeasure]
Perform the heat load calculation with the decreased capacity as shown in the graph in page 5-8.
Do not install the unit in such a place where temperature difference among rooms is big and the heat
load when cooling and heating is excessively big during simultaneous COOL/HEAT operation.

(2) Influence by ON/OFF Operation of Other Rooms:

[Phenomenon]
During the simultaneous cooling and heating operation, the actual capacity of the indoor units in
operation is decreased for a short time due to the influence of heat balance when the cooling or
heating operation when some other indoor units is started or stopped, or thermo-ON/OFF.
[Countermeasure]
The following conditions and the system as shown below are not appropriate for FXG/FX3 series,
since other indoor units may be influenced by the indoor unit.
Therefore, it is recommended that different air conditioning systems be selected.
(a) There is a room where the heat load change is big and ON/OFF operation of indoor unit is
excessively frequent.
(b) where capacity decrease for a short time according to ON/OFF operation of other rooms is not
allowed. However, this system can be applied to a room where gradual heat load change is given,
such as a heating operation in the morning, cooling operation during daytime and heating operation
in the evening.
[Example]
In case that the mainly cooling operation is changed to the mainly heating operation especially when
the big capacity indoor unit (ex.: 5HP) is stopped at cooling operation or thermo-OFF, the outdoor heat
exchanger is changed from condenser to evaporator functions and the cooling capacity of other indoor
units in continuous cooling operation is excessively decreased.

CH Unit

10HP Outdoor Unit

Indoor Unit 5HP 3HP 1HP

Cooling Heating Cooling
ON / OFF (Continuous) (Continuous)

Mainly Mainly
Cooling Heating

ON OFF ON OFF ON

100%
Capacity

5HP Cooling Unit

Thermo ON /OFF

Approx. 10min.

100%
Capacity

80% 1HP Cooling Unit

Continuous Operation

5-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

(3) Piping Length of Farthest Indoor Unit:

[Phenomenon]
During the simultaneous cooling and heating operation, the cooling capacity of the farthest indoor unit
is decreased when the farthest indoor unit is in cooling operation and the second farthest indoor unit is
in heating operation.
[Countermeasure]
It is recommended that the piping length between the multi-kit and the farthest indoor unit be within
5m. In case that the piping length between the multi-kit and the farthest indoor unit is longer than 5m,
use the T-branch at only the liquid pipe instead of liquid multi-kit. The direction of the T-branch is as
shown below. Purchase the T-branch locally for this piping work and prepare at each site. If the
diameter of the pipe between the outdoor unit and CH unit is different, use a reducer.

Max. 30m
L (m)
L (m) < 5m
...Multi-kit
L (m) > 5m
...T-branch at the
Liquid Pipe only

CH Unit
Outdoor Unit
CH Unit
Outdoor Unit

CH Unit
Horizontal
CH Unit

(4) Start-Up in Simultaneous COOL/HEAT Operation Mode:

[Phenomenon]
In case of starting up in the simultaneous COOL/HEAT operation mode when the outdoor temperature
is low, the capacity increase time of the unit operation is longer in comparison with the only cooling or
heating operation mode (especially in starting up of small capacity operation; 1HP cooling and 1HP
heating [Example]).
[Countermeasure]
Do not install the unit where starting up in simultaneous COOL/HEAT operation mode is always
required. In case that the simultaneous COOL/HEAT operation is required, it is recommended that
individual refrigerant systems be applied for cooling and heating, or the starting up is performed in only
cooling or heating operation mode, and change over the operation mode to the simultaneous COOL/
HEAT mode when 10 to 20 minutes have passed after starting up operation.

5-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

[Example]
* In Case of Start-Up in Simultaneous COOL/HEAT Operation Mode

Cooling

Capacity
Heating

ON

* In Case of Start-Up in Cooling Operation Mode (and Changeover to Simultaneous COOL/HEAT

Operation Mode Afterward)

Cooling
Capacity

Heating

ON
10 to 20min.

<Attention for Automatic COOL/HEAT Operation>

In the case that the indoor units are operated under an automatic cooling/heating operation by pressing the
AUTO COOL/HEAT switch, pay attention to the followings.
(1) Interference of Cooling Unit and Heating Unit
[Phenomenon]
In the case that more than 2 indoor units are closely installed and operated in the same room, each
indoor unit interferes with the next unit, resulting in inefficient operation.
[Countermeasure]
Do not use CH units individually for each indoor units in a same room.
In such a case, connect the indoor units in a same room to one CH unit and operate indoor units in the
same operation mode, if it is possible.

Cooling Heating
CH Unit

CH Unit

Outdoor Outdoor
Unit Unit

(2) Fan Operation When Changing Cooling/Heating Operation Mode

[Phenomenon]
In the case that room temperature rapidly increases during this automatic COOL/HEAT operation, the
operation mode is changed in order, heating operation => fan operation => cooling operation.
During this mode change, the fan operation continues for more than 10 minutes in order to avoid
unwanted influences to other indoor units.
[Countermeasure]
It is recommended that other systems be considered if very precise temperature control is required.

5-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

<Attention for Installing CH Unit>

Before installing the CH units, pay attention to the service access and sound.
(1) The CH unit consists of mechanical components such as solenoid valves in order to change the
operation mode from cooling to heating or heating to cooling respectively.
Therefore, please provide a service access door (minimum of 600✕600mm) beneath the CH unit.
(2) Flowing sound of refrigerant may be heard from the CH unit when the solenoid valve in the CH unit is
activated. Therefore, take the following action to minimize the sound.
* Install the CH unit inside the ceiling.
As for the ceiling material, select a material like a plaster board which minimizes operation sound.
* Do not install the CH units in near a bed room or hospital room.
(3) Install the CH units according to the below table.

Correct
Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit

l: Max. 30m

Installed Higher than Indoor Unit)

Installed Lower than Indoor Unit)

L: Max. 100m (Actual) Installed Higher than Indoor Unit)

Installed Lower than Indoor Unit)

CH Unit CH Unit
Max. 125m (Equivalent)

(In Case of Outdoor Unit

(In Case of Outdoor Unit

H1: Max. 50m
(In Case of Outdoor Unit

(In Case of Outdoor Unit

H1: Max. 50m

Max. 40m
H2: Max. 15m
Max. 40m

l: Max. 30m

l0

l2
l0

l4
l2

1 2 3 1 2 3
l4
l1

l1

l3

l5
l3
H2: Max. 15m

Indoor Unit
Indoor Unit L: Max. 100m (Actual)
l0+l1, l2+l3, l0+l1, l2+l3, Max. 125m (Equivalent)
l4: Max 30m H2: Max. 4m l4+l5: Max. 30m

* CH units are installed according to the below table.

* The piping length between the 1st multi-kit and the farthest indoor unit is within 30m.
* The total piping length between each multi-kit and each indoor unit is within 30m.
* The maximum lift among indoor units is within 15m.
* The maximum lift between the outdoor unit and the indoor unit is within 50m (In the case that the
position of the outdoor unit is higher than that of the indoor unit) / 40m (In the case that the position of
the outdoor unit is lower than that of the indoor unit)

Height Difference among CH Unit

Lowest Indoor Unit
Installed Higher Less than 15m
than Outdoor Unit (Max. Indoor Unit: 16 Units)

Height Difference Max. Connectable

Lowest Indoor Unit of CH Unit CH Unit
Installed Lower 0 to 3m Up to 16
than Outdoor Unit 3.1 to 5m Up to 10
5.1 to 6m Up to 8

5-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5.7 Select Guide of Drain Pipe for Indoor Unit

● Selecting Method of Drain Pipe Diameter

<Step 1> Calculation of Drain Flow Volume

Calculate from that the drain flow volume is approximately 3 [l/hr] per 1HP of the indoor unit nominal
capacity.
For Example:
Common drain pipe for four 2HP indoor units and four 2.5HP indoor units.
(1) Total Horse Power of Indoor Unit: 4✕2HP+4✕2.5HP=18HP
(2) Total Drain Flow Volume: 18HP✕3 [l/hr.HP] =54 [l/hr]

<Step 2> Select Drain Pipe from Table A and B

(1) Horizontal Common Pipe with Slope 1/50: VP30 for above Example
(2) Horizontal Common Pipe with Slope 1/100: VP30 for above Example
(3) Vertical Common Pipe: VP30 for above Example

Table A. Permissible Drain Flow Volume of Horizontal Vinyl Pipe

Inner Diameter Permissible Flow Volume [l/hr]

JIS Symbol NOTE
[mm] Slope=1/50 Slope=1/100
VP20 20 39 27 Not Applicable to
VP25 25 70 50 Common Pipe
VP30 31 125 88
Applicable to
VP40 40 247 175
Common Pipe
VP50 51 473 334

Table B. Permissible Drain Flow Volume of Vertical Vinyl Pipe

Inner Diameter Permissible Flow Volume

JIS Symbol NOTE
[mm] [l/hr]
VP20 20 220 Not Applicable to
VP25 25 410 Common Pipe
VP30 31 730
VP40 40 1,440
Applicable to
VP50 51 2,760
Common Pipe
VP65 67 5,710
VP75 77 8,280

● Drain Piping Incorrect: Upward Slope

Unit
Rising Part
Incorrect

Drain Piping
Connection
1/25 to 1/100 Down-Slope

Correct
Common Drain Piping

This drain pipe shall be

separating from other pipes.

5-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5.8 Caution on Refrigerant Leakage

(1) Maximum Permissible Concentration of HCFC Gas
The refrigerant R407C (or R22), charged in the SET-FREE FSG, FS1/FS3, FS5 and FXG/FX3 system,
is an incombustible and non-toxic gas. However, if leakage occurs and gas fills a room, it may cause
suffocation.
The maximum permissible concentration of HCFC gas, R407C in air is 0.31 kg/m3, R22 in air is
0.3 kg/m3, according to the refrigeration and air conditioning facility standard (KHK S 0010) by the
KHK (High Pressure Gas Protection Association) Japan.
Therefore, some effective measure must be taken to lower the R407C or R22 concentration in air
below 0.3 kg/m3, in case of leakage.
(2) Calculation of Refrigerant Concentration
(a) Calculate the total quantity of refrigerant R (kg) charged in the system connecting all the indoor
units of rooms to be air conditioned.
(b) Calculate the room volume V (m3) of each objective room.
(c) Calculate the refrigerant concentration C (kg/m3) of the room according to the following equation.

R: Total Quantity of Charged Refrigerant (kg) = C: Refrigerant Concentration

V: Room Volume (m3) ≤ 0.3 (kg/m3)

(3) Countermeasure for Refrigerant Leakage According to KHK Standards

The facility shall be arranged as follows referring to the KHK standards, so that the refrigerant
concentration will be below 0.3 kg/m3.
(a) Provide a shutterless opening which will allow fresh air to circulate into the room.
(b) Provide a doorless opening of 0.15% or more size to the floor area.
(c) Provide a ventilator, linked with a gas leak detector, of 0.4 m3/min. or more ventilating capacity per
Japanese Refrigeration Ton (= compressor displacement m3/h / 8.5 (R22) or 9.8 (R407C)) of the air
conditioning system utilizing refrigerant R22.
<FSG, FSG1/FS3, FS5 Series>
RAS-5FSG ............................ 2.15 / 2.15 ton (50Hz / 60Hz)
RAS-5FS3 ............................. 2.48 / 2.48 ton
RAS-8FSG ............................ 3.74 / 3.98 ton
RAS-8FS3 ............................. 4.31 / 4.59 ton
RAS-10FSG .......................... 4.01 / 4.31 ton
RAS-10FS3 ........................... 4.63 / 4.97 ton
RAS-16FSG .......................... 5.78 / 6.44 ton
RAS-16FS3 ........................... 6.66 / 7.42 ton
RAS-20FSG .......................... 7.36 / 8.35 ton
RAS-20FS3 ........................... 8.49 / 9.63 ton
RAS-24FSG1 ........................ 8.72 / 9.96 ton
RAS-24FS5 ........................... 10.05 / 11.48 ton
RAS-30FSG1 ........................ 10.55 / 12.17 ton
RAS-30FS5 ........................... 12.16 / 14.03 ton
<FXG/FX3 Series>
RAS-8FXG ............................ 3.74 ton (50Hz)
RAS-8FX3 ............................. 4.31 ton
RAS-10FXG .......................... 4.01 ton
RAS-10FX3 ........................... 4.63 ton
(d) Pay a special attention to the place, such as a basement, etc., where refrigerant can stay, since
refrigerant is heavier than air.

5-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

<Example>

System A System B
Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit
20HP 18HP
System A System B
Refrigerant: 60kg Refrigerant: 50kg

2 4 4 5 5 5 5 3 3
Height
E D D B A 2.5m
Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor
40m2 70m2 70m2 400m2 120m2

Gas Leak Detector Opening: 0.06m2

Ventilator 2m3/min

Room R (kg) V (m3) C (kg/m3) Countermeasure

A 50 300 0.17 -
B 110 1000 0.11 -
C 60 175 0.34 0.06m2 Opening
D 60 175 0.34 0.06m2 Opening
C+D 60 350 0.171 -
2m3/min. Ventilator Linked with
E 60 100 0.6
Gas Leak Detector

If local codes or regulations are specified, follow them.

<Example>
British Standard BS4434 1989
R22 Commercial Office Building Class D Occupancy
MR = C✕V
MR: Maximum Charge or Leakage of Refrigerant (kg)
C: Maximum Allowable Concentration = 0.17 (kg/m3)
V: Volume of Space (m3)

5-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5.9 Maintenance Work

(1) For Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit
(a) Fan and Fan Motor
● Lubrication - All fan motors are pre-lubricated and sealed at the factory. Therefore, no lubricating
maintenance is required.
● Sound and Vibration - Inspect for abnormal sound and vibration.
● Rotation - Inspect for clockwise rotation and rotating speed.
● Insulation - Inspect for electrical insulation resistance.
(b) Heat Exchanger
● Clog - Inspect and remove any accumulated dirt and dust from the heat exchanger at regular
intervals. As for outdoor unit, other obstacles such as growing grass and pieces of paper, which
might restrict air flow, should also be removed.
(c) Piping Connection
● Leakage - Inspect for refrigerant leakage at piping connection.
(d) Cabinet
● Stain and Lubrication - Inspect and remove any stain and lubrication.
● Fixing Screw - Inspect and fix loosened or lost screws.
● Insulation - Inspect and repair peeled thermal insulation material on cabinet.
(e) Electrical Equipment
● Activation - Inspect for abnormal activation of the magnetic contactor, auxiliary relay, PCB and
etc.
● Line Condition - Pay attention to working voltage, amperage and phase balance. Inspect for
faulty contact caused by loosened terminal connections, oxidized contacts, foreign matter, and
other items. Inspect for electrical insulation resistance.
(f) Control and Protective Devices
● Setting - Do not readjust the setting in the field unless the setting is maintained at a point other
than the point listed in “11. SAFETY AND CONTROL DEVICE SETTING” of “TCII”.
(2) For Indoor Unit
(a) Air Filter
● Cleaning - Inspect and remove any accumulated dirt and dust according to “12.2 Filter Cleaning”
of “TCII”.
(b) Drain Pan, Drain-up Mechanism and Drain Pipe
● Drain Line - Inspect and clean the condensate drain line at least twice a year.
● Drain-up Mechanism - Inspect for activation of drain-up mechanism.
(c) Float Switch
● Activation - Inspect for activation of float switch.
(3) For Outdoor Unit
(a) Compressor
● Sound and Vibration - Inspect for abnormal sound and vibration.
● Activation - Inspect for that the voltage drop of power supply line is within 16% at start and within
2% during operation.
(b) Reverse Valve
● Activation - Inspect for any abnormal activating sound.
(c) Strainer
● Clog - Inspect for that no temperature difference between both ends.
(d) Earth Wire
● Earth Line - Inspect for continuity to the earth.
(e) Oil Heater
● Activation - The oil heater should be activated at least 12 hours before start-up, by switching ON
the main power source.

5-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5.10 Service & Maintenance Record by 7-Segment Display

Data Sheet for Checking by 7-Segment Display Client: Checked by: Date: . .
Outdoor Unit Model (Serial No. ) RAS- (Serial No. ) RAS- (Serial No. ) RAS- (Serial No. ) RAS- (Serial No. ) RAS- (Serial No. )
(1) Operation Model
(2) Test Run Start Time
(3) Data Collect Start Time
(4) Read Out Data from 7-Segment in Outdoor Unit
Protection Control Code
Outdoor Microcomputer Output SC 52C1 52C2 52C3 52C4 AC Chopper 52C1 52C2 52C3 52C4 AC Chopper 52C1 52C2 52C3 52C4 AC Chopper 52C1 52C2 52C3 52C4 AC Chopper 52C1 52C2 52C3 52C4 AC Chopper

FAN2 RS 20A 211 212 OH FAN2 RS 20A 211 212 OH FAN2 RS 20A 211 212 OH FAN2 RS 20A 211 212 OH FAN2 RS 20A 211 212 OH

Indoor Total Operating Capacity oP

Inverter Frequency H1
Compressor Running Quantity CC
Outdoor Fan Step TE
Outdoor Unit Expansion Valve Opening oE1
oE2
oEb
Discharge Pressure Pd
Suction Pressure Ps
Discharge Gas Temperature Td1
Td2
Td3
Td4
Heat Exchanger Liquid Pipe Temperature TE1
TE2
Outdoor Temperature To
Compressor Running Current A1
A2
A3
A4
Indoor Unit (Unit No.)
Expansion Valve Opening iE
Heat Exchanger Liquid Temp. TL
Heat Exchanger Gas Temp. TG
Intake Air Temp. Ti
Outlet Air Temp. To
Capacity (1/8HP) CA
Indoor Unit Stoppage Cause Code d1
Restricted Control for Prevention of Compression Ratio Decrease c11
Restricted Control for Prevention of High Pressure Increase c13
Restricted Control for Prevention of Discharge Gas Temp. Increase c15
Restricted Control for Prevention of TdSH Decrease c16
Restricted Control for Prevention of Overcurrent c17
Accumulated Operation Time of Comp. 1 UJ1
Accumulated Operation Time of Comp. 2 UJ2
Accumulated Operation Time of Comp. 3 UJ3
Accumulated Operation Time of Comp. 4 UJ4
Outdoor Alarm Code AC
Inverter Stoppage Cause Code iTC
Total Indoor Unit Capacity (1/8HP) CP
Total Indoor Unit Quantity AA
Refrigerant System Address GA
R. C. Sw: Remote Control Switch, O.U.: Outdoor Unit, I.U.: Indoor Unit
52C1: CMC1, 52C2: CMC2, 52C3: CMC3, 52C4: CMC4
FAN2: Constant Speed Fan (16, 20HP Only), RS: Relay for Starting
20A: Solenoid Valve (SVA), 211: Four Way Valve (RVR1), 212: Four Way Valve (RVR2), CH: Oil Heater
*: Multiply 1/8 by the code on the 7-segment.

5-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5.11 Service & Maintenance Record by Remote Control Switch

Data Sheet for Checking by Remote Control Switch
Time : : : : : : : : Client:
I.U. Model Installation Date:
I.U. Serial No. System No.:
I.U. No. / Alarm Code Date Checked:
Check Mode 1 Check Mode 2 1 G
2 1 G
2 1 G
2 1 G
2 1 G
2 1 G
2 1 G
2 1 G
2 Checked by:
B Temp. Indication
Set Temp. b1 -- Result
Inlet Air Temp. b2 91
Discharge Air Temp. b3 92
Liquid Pipe Temp. b4 93
Remote Thermistor Temp. b5 --
Outdoor Air Temp. b6 94
Gas Pipe Temp. b7 95
Evaporating Temp. at Heating b8 96
Control Information b9 97
Comp. Top Temp. bA 98
C Micro-Computer State Indication
I.U. Micro-Computer C1 --
O.U. Micro-Computer C2 --
D Stopping Cause State Indication
Stopping Cause State Indication d1 --
E Alarm Occurrence
Times of Abnormality E1 --
Times of Power Failure E2 --
Times of Abnormal Transmitting E3 --
Times of Inverter Tripping E4 --
F Automatic Louver State
Louver Sensor State F1 --
H Pressure, Frequency State Indication
Discharge Pressure H1 99
Suction Pressure H2 9A
Control Information H3 9b
Operating Frequency H4 9C
J I.U. Capacity Indication
I.U. Capacity (1/8HP) J1 --
O.U. Code J2 --
Refrigerant Cycle Number J3 --
Refrigerant Cycle Number J4 --
L Opening of Ex. Valve
I.U. Ex. Valve L1 9d
O.U. Ex. Valve 1 L2 9E
O.U. Ex. Valve 2 L3 --
O.U. Ex. Valve B L4 --
P Running Current Indication (Reference)
Comp. Current P1 9F

5-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION

5.12 Service & Maintenance Record

Service & Maintenance Record

No. Check Item Action Judgement

1 Is service space sufficient? YES or NO
2 Short Circuit of Discharge Air? YES or NO
3 Any Heat Influence YES or NO
4 Is earth wire connected? YES or NO
5 Refrigeration Piping GOOD or NOT GOOD
6 Fixing of Units GOOD or NOT GOOD
Any Damage on Outer or Internal
7 YES or NO
Surface?
TIGHTENED or
8 Checking of Screw and Bolts Tighten if loosen.
NOT TIGHTENED
Tighten all terminal screws by TIGHTENED or
9 Tightening of Terminal Screws
phillips driver. NOT TIGHTENED
Are compressor terminals PUSHED or
10 Push all terminals.
tightly fixed? NOT PUSHED
Measure insulation resistance by
insulation resistance-meter.
11 Insulation Resistance Comp. and Fan GOOD or NOT GOOD
Motor: greater than 3MΩ
Others: greater than 3MΩ
Check for smooth flow by
12 Does drain water smoothly flow? GOOD or NOT GOOD
pouring water.
13 Check for leakage at compressor. Check for any leakage. GOOD or NOT GOOD
Check for leakage at
14 ditto GOOD or NOT GOOD
outdoor heat exchanger.
Check for leakage at
15 ditto GOOD or NOT GOOD
indoor heat exchanger.
16 Check for leakage at 4-way valve. ditto GOOD or NOT GOOD
17 Check for leakage at check valve. ditto GOOD or NOT GOOD
18 Check for leakage at accumulator. ditto GOOD or NOT GOOD
19 Check for leakage at strainer. ditto GOOD or NOT GOOD
Check for leakage at
20 ditto GOOD or NOT GOOD
electronic Ex. Valve.
21 Check for leakage at piping. ditto GOOD or NOT GOOD
22 Check direction of fans. by Viewing or Air Flow Volume GOOD or NOT GOOD
23 Voltage among each Phase. higher than 220V GOOD or NOT GOOD
Check fan, compressor, piping,
24 Vibration and Sound GOOD or NOT GOOD
etc.
Check activation of COOL,
25 Activation of Each Operation Mode GOOD or NOT GOOD
HEAT, STOP and TEMP. switches.
26 High Pressure Cut-out Switch Check actual activation value. GOOD or NOT GOOD
27 Check activation of drain mechanism. Check it during cooling operation. GOOD or NOT GOOD
o o
28 Indoor Inlet Air Temp. (DB/WB) C DB/ C WB
o o
29 Indoor Outlet Air Temp. (DB/WB) C DB/ C WB
o o
30 Outdoor Inlet Air Temp. (DB/WB) C DB/ C WB
o o
31 Outdoor Outlet Air Temp. (DB/WB) C DB/ C WB
32 High Pressure Switch kg/cm2G
33 Low Pressure Switch kg/cm2G
34 Operating Voltage V
35 Operating Current A
Instruction Cleaning of Air Filter
36 DONE or NOT YET
to Client
Instruction for Cleaning
37 DONE or NOT YET
Method to Client
38 Instruction for Operation to Client DONE or NOT YET

5-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifications in this catalog are subject to change without notice, in order that HITACHI may bring the latest innovations to their
customers.

Catalog No.5413553 2003 Printed in Japan (N)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8
ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS 1
All data related to Indoor Units can be
found in Technical Catalogue for FSG
8. ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM (For Models: RAS-8FXG and RAS-10FXG)

0DUN 1DPH
CA 1 Capacitor
CB 1,2 Capacitor
CH, CH 2 Crankcase Heater
CMC1,2 Contactor for Compressor Motor
CN, PCN Connector
CS 1,2 Capacitor
CT 2, 5, U, V Current Transformer
DCL Reactor
DM Diode Module
DS 3,4,9∼12 I.F. Connector
DSW 1~10 Dip Switch on PCB1
DSW 1 Dip Switch on PCB3
EF1~4 Fuse
IPM Transistor Module
ITO 1 Internal Thermostat for Outdoor Fan Motor
LED Light Emitting Diode
MC 1,2 Motor for Compressor
MOF1 Motor for Outdoor Fan
MV 1,2,B Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve
NF 1~10 Noise Filter
OH 1 Oil Heater for Oil Separator
PCB 1~3 Printed Circuit Board
Pd, Ps Sensor for Refrigerant Pressure
PSH Pressure Switch for Protection
PSW1~3 Push Switch on PCB1
R 1,2 Resistor
RS 1,2 Resistor for Starting
RVR 1,2 Reversing Valve Relay
SVA Solenoid Valve for Hot Gas Bypass
TB 1,2 Terminal Board
TF Transformer
THM 7~10 Thermistor
Y Auxiliary Relay on PCB1
ZNR Surge Absorber
Š Terminals

1RWH $OOWKHILHOGZLULQJDQGHTXLSPHQWPXVW
FRPSO\ZLWKQDWLRQDODQGORFDOFRGHV

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8
2 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS

ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM (For Models: CH-4.0GE and CH-6.5GE)

For CH-6.5GE Only
Cooling/Heating Changeover Unit

ELECTRICAL CONTROL BOX

Arrangement of Solenoid Valve

(view of the top)

Electrical Control Box

ElectricFactory Wiring

Earth Wiring

Field Wiring

Factory Setting Position

(Dip Switch)

Outdoor Unit or Indoor Unit Power Supply

the other
Changeover Unit

For CH-6.5GE Only

0DUN 1DPH 5HPDUN

PCB 1, 2, 3 Printed Circuit Board
TB 1 Terminal Board Power Supply
TB 2 Terminal Board Operation Line
TF 1 Transformer
EF 1 Fuse 1 (A)
NF 1 Noise Filter
SVD1,
Solenoid Valve DC220-240V
SVS1
SVD2,
Solenoid Valve AC220-240V
SVS2
1RWH $OOWKHILHOGZLULQJDQGHTXLSPHQWPXVW
FRPSO\ZLWKQDWLRQDODQGORFDOFRGHV Printed Circuit Board Electrical Control Box of CH Unit

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 
CONTROL SYSTEM 1
9. CONTROL SYSTEM
9.1.REFRIGERANT CYCLE (EXAMPLE: RAS-10FXG)
Indoor Units
Outdoor Unit
Refrigerant Flow for Cooling
Refrigerant Flow for Heating
Field Refrigerant Piping
Flare Connection

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Flange Connection
Brazing Connection
1R 3DUW1DPH 1R 3DUW1DPH 1R 3DUW1DPH
1 Compressor 10 Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve 19 Check Joint
2 Heat Exchanger 11 Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve (Liquid Bypass) 20 Stop Valve (1/2) for Liquid Line
3 Receiver 12 Distributor 21 Stop Valve (1) for Gas Low Line
4 Oil Separator 13 Reversing Valve 22 Stop Valve (3/4) for Gas High Line
5 Accumulator 14 Capillary Tube 23 High Pressure Switch for Protection
6 Strainer 3/8 15 Check Valve (3/8) 24 Sensor for Refrigerant Pressure
7 Strainer 1/2 16 Check Valve (5/8) 25 Sigh Glass (FXG Only)
8 Strainer 3/4 17 Check Valve (3/4) 26 Dryer (FXG only)
9 Strainer 18 Solenoid Valve (Gas Bypass) 27 E-102XME
Refrigerant R407 (FXG)
Airtight Test Pressure 3.3 MPa
 
2 CONTROL SYSTEM
&+8QLW&+*(
Ô To Indoor Unit To Outoor Unit
Õ
Liquid Line (∅9.53mm) Liquid Line (∅9.53mm)
High Pressure
Gas Line (∅12.7mm)
High Pressure Low Pressure
Gas Line (∅15.88mm) Gas Line (∅15.88mm)
Low Pressure
Refrigerant Flow Direction (Cooling Operation)
Refrigerant Flow Direction (Heating Operation)
Field Refrigerant Piping
Flare Connection
&+8QLW&+*(
Liquid Line
Ô To Indoor Unit To Outoor Unit
Õ Liquid Line
High Pressure
Gas Line

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

High Pressure Low Pressure
Gas Line Gas Line
Low Pressure
Refrigerant Flow Direction (Cooling Operation)
Refrigerant Flow Direction (Heating Operation)
Field Refrigerant Piping
Flare Connection
0DUN 3DUW1DPH 0DUN 0DWHULDO6L]H2'PP×WKLFNQHVVPP 0DWHULDO
1 Solenoid Valve (AC) a 9.53 × 0.8
2 Solenoid Valve (DC) b 6.35 × 0.7
3 Strainer c 15.88 × 1.0 Copper Tube
4 Check Valve d 19.05 × 1.0 C1220T-O
5 Capillary Tube e 3 × 0.8
6 Capillary Tube f 4 × 0.7
1RWH 7KHPDUNRILQVLGH>@LVVKRZQLQWKHHOHFWULFDO
ZLULQJGLDJUDP